U  N  I  VERS  ITY 
Of  1  LLI  N  O  I  S 

492-4 

G  6>2.£- 


Return  this  book  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2018  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign  Alternates 


https://archive.org/details/elementaryhebrew00gree_1 


l2mo>  cloth .  $1.25. 


ELEMENTARY 


HEBREW  GRAMMAR, 

WITH 

licking  unfa  Writing  $mm  anfo  tobalarits. 


BY 

WILLIAM  HENRY  GREEN, 

PROFESSOR  IN  TIIE  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY  AT  PRINCETON,  NEW  JERSEY. 


NEW  EDITION  WITH  CORRECTIONS. 


NEW  YORK: 

JOHN  WILEY  &  SONS,  PUBLISHERS, 

15  Astor  Place. 

1879. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1871, 
By  WILLIAM  HENRY  GREEN, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


Trow’s 

Printing  and  Bookbinding  Co., 
205-213  East  1 2th  St.y 
NEW  YORK. 


PREFACE. 


r> 


This  brief  Manual  has  been  prepared  with  special 
reference  to  the  wants  of  beginners.  The  essential 
facts  of  the  language  are  concisely  stated,  without  the 
encumbrance  of  minute  details,  which  would  confuse 
their  minds  and  impede  their  progress,  and  which  be¬ 
long  properly  to  a  more  advanced  stage  of  study. 
The  tabular  form  has  been  adopted  to  as  great  an 
extent  as  possible,  in  order  to  exhibit  to  the  eye  what¬ 
ever  is  capable  of  such  a  mode  of  representation. 
The  Reading  Exercises,  which  are  of  the  simplest  kind, 
have  been  carefully  selected  with  a  view  to  illustrate 
he  forms  and  uses  of  different  parts  of  speech,  and 
especially  the  various  classes  of  perfect  and  imperfect 

verbs ;  and  they  are  accompanied  by  a  special  Voca¬ 
bulary. 

~  It  will,  as  is.  hoped,  meet  the  wants  of  non -profes¬ 
sional  students  who  seek  a  general  knowledge  of  this 
venerable  and  sacred  tongue  rather  than  a  thorough 
acquaintance  with  it,  and  who  might  be  repelled  by  a 
larger  and  more  costly  apparatus.  It  is  sufficiently 

I  wUlo#7 


IV 


PKEFACE. 


simple  for  private  study,  as  wel-  as  adapted  for  use  in 
schools  and  colleges  where  facilities  are  offered  for  the 
acquisition  of  the  Hebrew.  The  author  will  be  re 
joiced  if  this  humble  volume  should  tend  in  any  way 
to  a  more  extended  familiarity  with  the  original  lan 
guage  of  the  Old  Testament  among  intelligent  and 
liberally  educated  laymen. 


Princeton,  August  22,  1866. 


PREFACE 

TO  THE  SECOND  EDITION. 


The  Grammar  has  been  entirely  rewritten,  with  a  view 
to  adapt  it  more  fully  to  the  wants  of  those  for  whom  it 
is  intended.  In  doing  this,  the  writer  has  had  the  benefi  t 
of  practical  suggestions  from  some  of  the  best  Hebrew 
teachers  in  various  parts  of  the  country,  among  whom  he 
is  particularly  indebted  to  Prof.  Hoyt,  of  Ohio  "Wesleyan 
University,  Delaware,  Ohio.  The  paradigms  are,  as  in 
the  previous  edition,  combined  together  in  Grammatical 
Tables,  which  afford  a  complete  survey  of  all  the  forms 
of  the  language.  But  for  the  greater  convenience  of  the 
student  a  number  of  the  paradigms  are  inserted  in  the 
text  of  the  Grammar  likewise,  and  in  some  of  the  earlier 
of  these  the  pronunciation  is  also  given  in  Roman  letters, 
to  relieve  the  labor,  and  prevent  the  mistakes  incident  to 
an  imperfect  acquaintance  with  the  characters.  A  more 
complete  system  of  exercises  both  in  Hebrew  reading 
1  and  composition  has  been  provided  throughout,  and  the 
greatest  pains  have  been  taken  to  make  them  .strictly 
progressive  in  their  character.  No  grammatical  form  or 
construction  is  admitted  into  the  lessons  until  this  has 


VI 


PREFACE  TO  THE  SECOND  EDITION. 


» 


first  been  explained.  In  the  orthography  these  exercises 
are  inserted  in  the  text  of  the  Grammar  in  order  that  the 
eye  of  the  student,  perplexed  by  the  strange  forms  of 
unfamiliar  characters,  may  readily  pass  from  the  rules  or 
principles  to  their  application.  The  exercises  in  tranS' 
lation,  whether  from  Hebrew  into  English  or  from  Eng 
lish  into  Hebrew,  are,  as  in  the  former  edition,  removed 
to  the  end  of  the  volume.  A  special  vocabulary,  num¬ 
bered  to  correspond  with  each  successive  lesson,  contains 
all  words  not  previously  learned,  while  their  separation 
upon  different  pages  is  designed  to  counteract  the  temp¬ 
tation  to  negligence,  which  would  arise  from  having 
these  significations  before  the  eye  in  the  very  act  of 
recitation.  It  is  assumed  that  all  words  are  mastered  as 
the  student  proceeds,  so  that  they  are  never  repeated  in 
the  special  vocabularies.  General  vocabularies  follow 
both  Hebrew-English  and  English-Hebrew,  which  con¬ 
tain  every  word  to  be  found  in  any  of  the  lessons.  The 
principles  of  Syntax  successively  illustrated  in  the 
lessons,  or  necessary  to  be  known  in  order  to  their  proper 
understanding,  are  supplied  in  accompanying  Remarks  or 
Directions.  The  learner  is  thus  gradually  familiarized 
with  the  practical  application  of  nearly  all  the  important 
principles  of  Syntax  before  he  comes  to  study  them 
together  in  systematic  order. 


I 


Prenceton,  October  11,  1871.  . 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Orthography.  §  31 

§  1.  The  Letters .  1  .  §  32. 

§  2.  Their  Classification .  3  §  33. 

§  3.  The  Vowel-Letters .  5  §  34. 

§4.  The  Vowel-Points .  5 

§  5.  Sh’va .  6  §  35. 

§  6.  Pattahh-furtive .  7 

§  7.  Quiescence  of  the  Vowel-  §  36. 

Letters .  8 

§  8.  Scriptio  plena  and  defectiva  9  §  37. 

§  9.  Syllables  .  10 

§10.  Resulting  Vowel -changes.  . .  12  §  38. 

§11.  Kamets  and  Kamets-Hha- 

tuph .  13  §  39. 

§  12.  Daghesh-lene .  14  §  40. 

§  13.  Daghesh-forte .  15 

§  14.  Mappik .  15  §  41. 

§  15.  Raphe .  16.  §  42. 

§  16.  Accents .  16  §  43. 

§  17.  Position  of  the  Accent .  17  §  44. 

§18.  Recession  of  the  Accent. ...  18  §  45. 

§  19.  Pause  Accents .  18 

§  20.  Consecution  of  Accents .  19  §  46. 

§  21.  Makkeph .  20  §  47. 

§  22.  Methegh .  20  §  48. 

§  23.  K’ri  and  K’thibh .  21  §  49. 

§  00. 

Etymology.  g  ^ 


§  24.  Prefixed  Particles .  23  §  52. 

§  25.  The  Article .  23  §  53. 

§  26.  He  Interrogative .  24  §  54. 

§  27.  Inseparable  Prepositions. ...  25  §  55. 

§  28.  Vav  Conjunctive .  25  §  56. 

§  29.  Personal  Pronouns .  26  §  57. 

§  30.  Other  Pronouns .  28  §  58. 


VA  G1 


Verbs.  Their  Species . .  29 

Perfect  Verbs . .  30 


Kal  Preterite  and  Infinitives  31 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Pre- 
terites  and  Infinitives. ...  32 

The  remaining  Preterites  and 


Infinitives .  34 

Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and 

Participles .  35 

Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Fu¬ 
tures,  etc .  37 

Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hith- 

pael  Futures,  etc .  39 

Peculiar  Forms .  40 

Paragogic  and  Apocopated 
Future  and  Imperative.  . .  41 

Vav  Conversive .  42 

Verbs  with  Suffixes .  43 


Gender  and  Number  of  N ouns  45 
Feminine,  Dual,  and  Plural  46 
Dual  and  Plural  in  Feminine 


Nouns .  49 

Construct  State .  50 

Its  Formation .  51 

Paragogic  Vowels .  52 

Nouns  with  Suffixes .  53 

Irregular  Nouns .  55 

Imperfect  Verbs .  56 

Guttural  Verbs .  57 

Pe  Guttural  Verbs .  57 

Ay  in  Guttural  Verbs . . .  58 

Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs.  ,  59 

Pe  Nun  Verbs .  60 

Ayin  Doubled  Verbs .  61 


Pe  Yodh  Verbs- .  ....  63 


vm 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

59.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh 


Verbs .  64 

§  60.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs .  65 

§  61.  Lamedh  He  Verbs .  66 

g  62.  Doubly  Imperfect  Verbs. ...  68 

g  63.  Unusual  Forms .  68 

§  64.  Quadriliteral  Verbs .  69 

§  65.  Numerals .  69 

g  66.  Separate  Particles .  70 

Syntax. 

§  67.  The  Copula .  71 

§  68.  The  Article .  71 

g  69.  Nouns  definite  without  the 

Article .  72 

§  70.  Adjectives .  72 

g  71.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. ...  72 

g  72.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. . .  73 

g  73.  Numerals .  73 

g  74.  Apposition .  74 

g  75.  The  Construct  State .  74 

g  76.  Tenses  of  Verbs .  75 

g  77.  The  Preterite .  75 

§  78.  The  Future .  76 

g  79.  The  Secondary  Tenses .  77 

g  80.  Participles .  77 

§  81.  The  Infinitive .  78 

g  82.  Object  of  Verbs .  78 

g  83.  Verbs  with  more  than  one 

Object .  79 

g  84.  Adverbial  Expressions .  79 

g  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement .  79 

g  86.  Compound  Subject .  80 

g  87.  Repetition  of  Words .  81 

g  88.  Relative  Pronouns .  81 

§  89.  Conjunctions .  81 


PAG* 


Grammatical  Tables. 

I.  The  Letters .  83 

II.  Classification  of  the  Let¬ 
ters.  The  Points.  . . -  84 

III.  The  Accents .  85 


IV.  Inseparable  Prepositions 

and  other  Prefixes .  86 

V.  Pronouns.  Verbs,  their 

Species .  87 

VI.  Paradigm  of  Perfect  Verbs,  88 

VII.  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect 

Verbs  with  Suffixes. ...  90 

VIII.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Guttural 


Verbs .  92 

IX.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Guttural 

Verbs .  93 

X.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Gut¬ 
tural  Verbs .  94 

XI.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs  95 

XII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Doubled 

Verbs .  96 

XIII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Vav  and 

Ayin  Yodh  Verbs .  98 

XIV.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Yodh  Verbs  100 

XV.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Aleph 

Verbs . .  101 

XVI.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  He 

Verbs .  102 

XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns . 104 

XVIII.  Paradigm  of  Nouns  with 

Suffixes .  107 

XIX.  Numerals .  108 

XX.  Consecution  of  Accents...  109 

Lessons  in  Reading  Hebrew..  Ill 
Lessons  in  Writing  Hebrew.  . .  137 
Hebrew-English  Vocabulary.  ,  175 
English-Hebrew  Vocabulary.  .  185 


ELEMENTARY  HEBREW  GRAMMAR. 


ORTHOGRAPHY 


The  Letters. 


1.  The  Hebrew  lias  twenty-two  letters ;  these  are  all 
consonants,  and  are  written  from  right  to  left. 


r 

Aleph 

X 

12.  La/medh 

b 

L 

2. 

Beth 

n 

Bh, 

B 

13.  Mem 

D  £ 

M 

3. 

Gi  mel 

y 

Gh, 

G 

14.  Hun 

)  > 

.N  ,  iA  | 

4. 

Daleth 

Dh, 

D 

15.  Sa'mekh 

0 

S  1  *i:  i 

5. 

He 

n 

H 

16.  A. 'yin 

y 

- - 

6. 

Vav 

t 

V 

17.  Pe 

f|  © 

Ph,  P 

7. 

Zayin 

T 

Z 

18.  Tsa'dhe 

r 2 

Ts 

8. 

Hheth 

n 

Hh 

19.  Koph 

p 

K 

.  9. 

Teth 

T 

20.  Resli 

R 

10. 

Yodh 

n 

Y 

21.  Shin 

/  tu 

-  Sh,  S 

11. 

Kaph 

T  3 

Kh, 

K 

22.  Tav 

n 

Th,  T. 

a.  For  the  proper  pronunciation  of  the  vowels  occurring  in  the  names  of  the 
letters,  see  §  4.  1.  a. 

*  f  -  • 

2.  There  are  two  letters,  for  which  no  equivalent  is 
given  in  the  preceding  table;  x  like  the  English  li  in 
hour  or  the  smooth  breathing  in  Greek  had  no  sound ;  5 
had  a  strong  guttural  sound,  but  one  which  it  is  so  difii 
cult  to  make,  .that  it  is  commonly  neglected  in  reading. 

i  k i  f.Ti  ^  i  |  J  P  (kA 


2 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


I 


3.  For  seven  of  the  letters  two  equivalents  are  given. 
Thus,  the  six  aspirates  have  also  an  unaspirated  sounds 
which  is  indicated  by  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter, 
§  12;  -  is  bh  or  v  and  3^/5  gli,  a  g  •  “  dh  as  th  in  the, 
“  d 3  hi i  as  the  German  ch  in  ich,  3  h  j  B  ph  or  f,  B  p> ; 
n  th  as  in  thin,  n  t.  As,  however,  there  are  no  sounds 
in  English  corresponding  to  gh  and  kh,  a  may  be  pro¬ 
nounced  g  like  a,  and  3  k  like  3.  The  letter  to  with  a 
dot  over  its  light  arm  has  the  sound  of  sh,  and  is  called 
Shin ’  to  with  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Sin,  and 
is  pronounced  like  s. 

4.  In  three  instances  two  letters  have  the  same  equi¬ 
valent;  thus  is  and  n  are  represented  by  t,  3  and  p  by 
k,  o  and  to  by  s.  These  letters,  though  pronounced 
alike  by  us,  are  nevertheless  quite  distinct  and  must  not 
be  confounded. 

5.  n  and  3  require  a  doubled  letter  or  two  letters 
combined  to  represent  them;  n  is  the  simple  h,  n  has  a 
stronger  sound  as  of  rasping  the  throat,  and  is  represent¬ 
ed  by  hli  /  3  is  ts  in  sits. 

6.  Fire  of  the  letters  have  two  forms;  3  ,  ,  2  ,  s,  3 

(combined  in  the  memorial  word  psia?  kimncippets )  are 
used  in  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words;  at  the 
end  of  words  the  bottom  stroke  is  bent  downward,  1  ,  ]  , 
fl  ,  f  ,  or  the  letter  closed  up.  a. 

EXERCISE  1.  I" 

7  rebrew  words  must  never  be  divided  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

Write  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  in  their  order,  with 
their  names  and  equivalents. 

Write  the  following  words  or  combinations  of  letters 
placing  under  each  its  equivalent: —  a 


2. 


LETTERS. 


3 


1  Pe-gii.iel  Nun-samekk-kaph  Sin-teth-nun  Ayin-daleth 
Kapli-lamed b  Y odh-mem-yodli  He-alepb-resb-tsadlie  Za 
yin  resh-ayin  Koph-tsadbe-yodb-resb  Hheth-mem  Ilhetk 
resli-pe  Lamedb-alepb  Y odh-shin-betk-tav-vav. 

Name  tbe  letters  in  Genesis  i.  1-3 on  page  133,  and  give 
the  equivalent  of  eacb. 


Their  Classification. 


Tbe  letters  may  be  divided, 


1.  First,  with  respect  to  tbe  organs  by  wbicb  they  are 
pronounced,  into  five  classes,  viz.,  Gutturals  or  those 
which  represent  a  sound  produced  in  the  throat ;  Palatals 
formed  by  pressing  the  root  of  the  tongue  against  the 
posterior  roof  of  the  mouth ;  Linguals  formed  by  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  in  contact  with  the  anterior  roof  of  the 
mouth;  Dentals  formed  by  the  air  driven  against  the 
teeth ;  and,  Labials  formed  by  the  lips. 


Gutturals  8  n  n  y 

Palatals  3  ’’Dp 

Linguals  T  T2  b  5 

Dentals  t  o  s  © 

Labials  2  “ins 


(ynns  ahCiha) i- 
(P?\n  gikhak ) 
n  ( datlenetli) 
( tesct  zastsash ) 

(erata  -  bumapli) 


jfz  ^  N  * 

•  i  though  not  properly  a  guttural  may  be  classed  with 

them,  as  it  partakes  of  their  peculiarities. 

/  •  • 

,jM  <'v 

2.  Secondly,  into  weak,  medium,  and  strong.  Tlie 
weak  consonants  suffer  or  occasion  frequent  changes  in 
tbe  formation  and  inflection  of  words.  The  strong  con¬ 
sonants  are  capable  of  entering  without  change  into  any 
combinations  which  analogy  may  require.  Those  of 


4 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


medium  strength,  are  neither  so  stable  as  the  latter,  no’ 
so  feeble  and  fluctuating  as  the  former. 


Weak  {  x  n  1  ^  Vowel-Letters. 

(  n  n  n  y  Gutturals. 

Medium  j  b  *  :  n  Liquids. 

I  T  o  y  o  Sibilants. 

Strong  |  a  2  p  |  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 

( n  n  ts ) 


3.  Tliiidly,  with  respect  to  the  function  which  they 
pei f oi  m  in  the  constitution  of  words,  into  radicals  and 
serviles.  The  former,  which  comprise  just  one-half  of 
the  alphabet,  are  only  used  in  the  roots  or  radical  portions 
of  woids.  -The  latter,  though  they  may  also  enter  intJ 
roots,  are  likewise  employed  in  the  inflection  of  words, 
and  the  formation  of  derivatives,  in  prefixes  and  suffixes. 
Tiie  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial  words 
1  abri  n®a  (Mum  moshe  v'hhelebh ,  Ethan,  Moses,  and 
vmleb).  All  the  other  letters  are  radicals,  viz.  3  ,  "i ,  t 


0  9 


s// 


,  p,  1 


-  >v_/ 


j  /  ''k  .*//“■ 

jtc A-j  «  /y^ 1  * 


EXERCISE  2. 


"Write  the  letters  of  each  class  with  their  names  and 

equivalents.  •  ~-^1mhHK8  SH 

W  rite  the  following  letters,  and  indicate  the  class  to 
►  which  each  belongs  in  respect  of  organ,  strength,  and 
tunction : — 

i  Aleph,  Lamedh,  He,  Shin,  Mem,  Vav,  Tav,  Beth,  Nun, 
Yodh,  Gimel,  Daleth,  Resli,  Tsadhe,  Ayin,  Koph,  Kaph, £ |r 
Samekli,  Pe,  Zayin,  Hlieth,  Teth. 


5 


§§  8.  «> 


-  ci, 

VOWELS. 

'  -  Of**' 

-  X,  ^  e 

3.  The  Vowel-Letters. 


There  were  originally  no  separate  signs  for  the  vowels 
in  Hebrew.  They  were  either  not  written  at  all,  or 
when  it  was  thought  necessary  to  express  them,  the 
vowel-letters  ( "0“i<  ehfm)  Avere  employed  for  this  pur¬ 
pose.  Thus  '  Avas  used  to  signify  not  only  y  but  also  i 
and  e;  1  stood  for  6  and  u;  x  or  n  for  a,  and  in  some 
cases  for  e  or  o;  e  was  also  sometimes  represented  by  ^ 
or  n ;  the  other  short  A7owels  were  scarcely  ever  Avritten. 
Thus  bin  or  ben ;  mp  horn  or  hum;  ”b5  gala,  gold,  gHe 
or  gale ;  ns'UBn  t1  shuhhend. 

§  4.  The'  Vowel-Points. 


1.  After  the  HebreAV  ceased  to  be  spoken,  a  more  com¬ 
plete  method  of  writing  the  voAvels  was  needed,  in  order 
to  indicate  the  exact  pronunciation  of  words.  With  this 
vieAV  the  voAvel-points  were  invented.  Of  these  three 
represent  long,  three  short,  and  three  doubtful  vowels. 


Long  Vowels. 
Ka'met-s  —  a 

r 

Tse're  _  e 

•• 

IJlio'lem  -1  o 


Shoi't  Vowels. 
Pat'tahh  __  a 

Se'o’hol  _  e 

Kamets-Hhatuph__  o 


Doubtful  Vowels. 

Hhi'rik  —  l  or  t 
% 

Shu'rek  ^  i 
Kib'buts-  }Sorfi 


a.  The  vowel  a  is  pronounced  as  in  father,  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in  met 
1  as  in  machine ,  i  as  in  pin ,  o  as  in  note ,  6  as  in  not ,  u  as  in  rule,  u  as  in  fuU. 
The  quantity  will  be  marked  when  the  vowels  are  long,  but  not  when  they  are 

short. 


2.  All  the  vowels  are  Avritten  under  the  letter  after 
Avhich  they  are  pronounced,  except  tAvo,  viz.  Hholem  and 

Shurek 

3.  Hholem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the  letter  to 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§5. 


which  it  belongs.  When  followed  by  ©  or  preceded  by 
©  it  coincides  with  the  diacritical  point  over  the  letter 
e.  g.  nfc©  moslie ,  si©  sane;  when  it  follows  ©  or  precedes 
©  it  is  written  over  its  opposite  arm  e.  g.  nib©  ,  ©inn  tirpds. 
Accordingly,  if  an  unpointed  consonant  precede  (i.  e.  one 
without  a  vowel  or  Sh’va,  §  5)  ©will  be  osh  and  ©  os;  if 
it  have  itself  no  other  vowel  point  ©will  be  so  and  ©  slid, 
except  at  the  end  of  words. 

4.  Shurek  is  a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Vav. 
When  there  is  a  1  in  the  text,  the  vowel  u,  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  1  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 


EXERCISE  3, 

.  The  place  of  Aleph  will  be  indicated  in  this  and  in  following  exercises  by  *,  and 
that  of  Ay  in  by  f.  Teth,  Koph,  and  Sin  will  be  denoted  by  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  t,  k,  s. 

w  rite  the  long,  short,  and  doubtful  vowels  with  their 
names  and  equivalents. 

Write:  Zahabh,  lehhem,  r&bh,  yet,  kliol,  kol,  kharnus. 
famal,  me*6yebh,  sho*el,  soleth,  fim,  *eth,  bh&yith, 
shorashim,  yaruts,  shophet,  shalosh,  soraph,  bhosem. 

Read  the  following  words,  and  give  the  names  and 
equivalents  of  the  vowels  which  they  contain. 


> 


a©' 


bb© 


inb©  ,  rib©  , 

••  7  V  / 

,  dob©  ,  ex 

7  •  •  T  7 


,nt2© 

,  t?*  ,  T*J*'  ,  Pb®  ,  ,  n©3 


*  Kamets-Hhatuph. 


§  5.  Sh'va.  .  .  ■«, 

1.  Sh’va  —  is  placed  under  vowelless  consonants  to 
indicate  the  absence  of  a  vowel,  e.  g.  Tiab©©  mamldkhti 


sh'va.  pattahh  furtive. 
/ 


i 


§6 


At  tlie  end  of  words,  however,  it  is  omitted  :  ba  (not  ba) 
bal,  “>ab  (not  )  soger ,  unless  the  last  letter  is  1  or  is 
immediately  preceded  by  another  vowelless  letter,  or  is 
;  doubled  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  13.  ^bb  melekli ,  'atop  hosht, 
ns  att. 

2.  When  a  syllable  begins  with  two  consonants  a  slight 
sound  is  heard  between  them,  as  in  English  between  the 
last  two  consonants  of  girin,  heavin'  thus  *fps p'ko dh,  ria 
5Vm,  not  bra.  Sli’va  is,  therefore,  said  to  be  silent  at  the 
end  of  syllables,  but  vocal  at  the  beginning. 

3.  Sometimes,  particularly  after  the  gutturals,  this  tran¬ 
sition  sound  resembles  an  extremely  short  <2,  e,  or  0.  It  is 
then  represented  by  the  compound  Sh’vas,  which  are 
formed  by  combining  the  sign  for  simple  Sh’va  already 
explained  with  that  for  Pattahh,  Seghol,  or  Kamets- 
Hhatuph,  as  the  case  may  be. 


p  f  Hhateph-Pattahli  ;  thus  inn  hardgh 

Sh’vas  )  Hhateph-Seghol  —  ;  thus  nrn  Itfydth. 

I  Hhateph-Kamets  —  ;  thus  ■’bn  hh°li. 

§  6.  Pattahh-furtive. 

Pattahh-furtive  is  a  scarcely  audible  <2,  which  steals  in 
before  the  letter  under  which  it  is  written.  It  occurs 
with  y ,  n  or  the  conscmant  n  at  the  end  of  words, 
jwhen  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  other  than  a.  or  followed 
by  another  vowelless  consonant,  nij  gablufli ,  rnpb 
lakaahht.  Comp,  in  English  fire,  pronounced  fif  r. 

exercise  4 

[Write  the  different  Sh’vas  and  Pattahh-furtive  with 
ir  names  and  equivalents. 


s 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§  * 

Write  the  following  words,  and  where  per  Pattahh 
furtive  has  heen  improperly  omitted,  make  the  requisite 
correction : 

Sh’n&yim,  th’nu,  y’dhekhem,  lihragham  y’h6shuaf,  *elbh; 
mof°madh,  kh&*“slier,  milhhamoth,  bh’simhhathkhem,  le*°- 
khol,  z’bhul,  yhfTehu,  samehh,  s’bhibhothhyikh,  rakif, 
dh’gh&th,  yest. 


Quiescence  of  the  Vowel-Letters . 


1.  The  vowel-points  above  described  were  attached  to 
the  sacred  text  without  any  change  in  its  letters.  Con¬ 
sequently  every  vowel,  which  had  previously  been  indi¬ 
cated  by  a  vowel-letter,  Avas  iioav  denoted  both  by  that 
and  by  the  sign  subsequently  added.  In  all  such  cases 
the  letter  is  said  to  quiesce  in  the  voAvel,  that  is,  it  has 
not  its  consonant  sound,  but  the  ATOAvel-sound  represented 
by  the  accompanying  or  preceding  point.  Thus  in  "Via 
VaAr  stands  not  for  v  but  for  d,  and  the  word  is  read  bar  ‘ 
in  rib's  :  n  represents  not  h  but  a,  and  the  word  is  gala. 

2.  At  the  beednnino;  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the 

o  O 


letters  x  n  i  ■>  are  consonants,  if  they  are  followed  by 
a  vowel  or  a  Sh’va;  if  not  so  followed,  they  are  quies¬ 
cent:  nib  love,  i-’®  seyo,  but  tala  mot ,  m'a  both. 

3.  At  the  end  of  words  1  is  quiescent  AA7hen  preceded 
by  6  or  v,  and  ■>  Avhen  preceded  by  e  or  1/  but  they  are 
consonants  if  preceded  by  any  other  vowel  sign,  Tf  hhe, 
’’a  hi,  but  "’n  hliay ,  *’13  gby. 

Final  n  is  quiescent,  unless  it  has  Mappik,  §  14, 
artsa,  but  nans  artsdh. 

Final  x  is  invariably  quiescent,  if  a  vowel  precede! , 
«b  lt\  S3  bag  but  if  a  vowelless  consonant  precedes,  it 
termed  otiant:  K*i*i  vayyar. 


8. 


VO  WEL-LETTERS. 


9 


a.  It  may  be  observed  that  x  quiesces  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  where  it  is  not 
properly  a  vowel-letter,  which,  in  fact,  it  rarely  is.  Its  feebleness  is  such  that  it 
scarcely  ever  terminates  a  mixed  syllable.  Such  forms  as  do  occur;  bnt 

&  mostly  loses  its  consonantal  power  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  whatever  the  pre¬ 
ceding  vowel  may  be.  Yodh  similarly  gives  up  its  consonantal  character  in  the 
termination  -p  ,  or  at  least  is  neglected  in  the  pronunciation,  thus 
$  briar  av,  *1133*  andv . 


EXERCISE  5. 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  and  apply  the  rules 
for  the  quiescence  of  the  voweldetters. 


©itf2  ,  *pK 

7  •  7  ’  .  “ 

,  sin  ,  nbiy 
,  nil?  ,  ma 

7  "7  :  - 


,  b^is  ,  1ST'1 

,  ,  PT? 

sen  ,  nsba  , 

:  7  t  :  -  J 


,  n  ,  ^ 
,n>? 

niba  ,  r'bn 

.  Tni23  , 

T  :  7 


“1253 


,  ,  n  ,  nin  ,  fnm 

,  DTCPK  ,  lin  ,  IT  ,  “9B 

7  **  *  :  -  7  7  7-t 

■>ni:3  ,  ninnen  ,  nViy8 


1  The  Shurek  is  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  1 ,  and  a  is  quiescent.  2  ish,  not 

iyosh.  3  The  Hholem  belongs  not  to  the  1 ,  -which  has  Sh’va,  but  to  the  1 ;  the 
word  is  hence  to  be  read  edh'vbth. 


8.  Scriptio  plena  and  defectiva. 


1.  Vowels,  which  are  indicated  both  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  by  a  vowel-point,  are  said  to  be  written  fully,  as  in 
nmis  dthoth ,  crc-'b©  shalishim,  mb  muth  ;  those,  for  which 
a  vowel-letter  might  have  been  employed,  but  which  are 
expressed  by  the  points  only,  are  said  to  be  written 
defectively,  as  tins  t  DBb®  }  tra  . 

2.  As  letters  were  rarely  used  to  represent  the  short 
vowels,  §  3,  u  and  i,  when  written  fully,  are  almost 

ways  long,  e.  g.  mb  llnu  ;  when  written  defectively, 
y  may  be  either  long  or  short,  e.  g.  BT  ywash ,  TT 
\har.  Ban  tdmush ,  3?©a  mushJcdbh. 


10 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


EXERCISE  6. 

Precision  in  the  employment  of  the  vowel-letters  can  only  be  attained  by  pi 
fcice  and  a  knowledge  of  forms.  For  the  present  the  following  general  rules  wiu 
suffice  : 

Write  e  and  l  with  Yodh  and  o  and  u  with  Yav  at  the  end  of  words ;  elsewhere 
they  may  be  written  with  or  without  the  vowel-letters  at  discretion. 

Write  a  and  e  without  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  where  d  may 
and  e  must  be  represented  by  He. 

In  the  following  words,  write  the  vowels  both  fully  and 
defectively,  wherever  both  forms  are  admissible : — - 

Zu,  nirash,  *otho,  yashobh,  lanu,  ze,  bho,  hekirnu, 
yamush,  moslie,  bhul,  yakiitsu,  *abhinu,  h&fidhothi, 
mityim,  *aven,  me,  me,  mi,  yamoth,  yamoth,  luhhoth, 
shvibh,  min,  hushlhkh. 


1.  Two  vowels  can  never  come  together  in  the  same 
word  in  Hebrew  without  an  intervening  consonant,  and 
hence  there  can  never  be  more  than  one  vowel  in  the 
same  syllable. 

2.  Every  syllable  except  initial  *1  must  begin  with  a 
consonant,  and  may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more 
than  two. 

3.  Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel  are  called  simple, 
no  ma,  rrpn  haM-md-tha  ;  those  ending  with  a  consonant, 
or,  as  is  possible  at  the  close  of  a  word,  with  two  con¬ 
sonants,  are  said  to  be  mixed,  ornoto  nish-mar-tem  /ni 
nerd. 


4.  As  Pattahh-furtive  and  the  vocal  Sh’vas,  whether 
simple  oi  compouud,  are  not  vowels  but  involuntary 
transition  sounds,  they  with  the  consonants  under  wine/1 
they  stand  cannot  form  syllables;  Pattahh-furtive 
accordingly  attached  to  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  a 


§9. 


SYLLABLES. 


11 


the  vocal  Sli’vas  to  that  of  the  following  vowel;  thus 
?iiT  z:roa. 

5.  Unaccented  simple  syllables  always  contain  long 
vowels,  and  unaccented  mixed  syllables  short  vowels. 
But  an  accented  syllable,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  long  or.  a.  short  vowel. 


6.  A  letter  with  simple  Sh’va  in  the  body  of  a  word 
may  either  end  or  begin  a  syllable.  If  it  is  preceded  by 
another  Sh’va  or  by  an  unaccented  long  vowel,  it  belongs 
to  the  following  syllable,  TDTn  tiz-Wru,  "n?T  zb-WJre'  ‘  if 
by  a  sdiort  vowel  or  by  an  accented  long  vowel  it  is 
mostly  attached  to  the  preceding  syllable,  ‘facn  Mas-do. 
n:^p  Tcbm-na  '  if  it  be  doubled  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  Iff, 
the  first  of  the  two  consonants  into  which  it  is  resolved 


is  connected  with  the  preceding  and  the  second  with  tlie 
following  syllable,  tjfl?  yit-t'nu.  ‘ 

ftfjrnetimes  a  r-nn sniw it f,  wl  i i r-T>  ia  i 


7.  Sometimes  a  consonant  which  is  not  doubled  belongs 
in  a  measure  to  two  syllables,  completing  that  which  pre¬ 
cedes  and  beginning  that  which  follows.  In  this  case 
the  former  syllable  is  strictly  speaking  neither  simple 
nor  mixed,  but  may  be  denominated  intermediate,-  thus 
in  Winn  t&Jkaji'1  gliu'  and  viiy'bhaM shu  for  vo/y- 

?/’ bhah-F shu,  the  first  two  are  intermediate  syllables. 


Si 


a.  Consonants  which  stand  in  this  equivocal  relation  are  such  as  remain  single 
when  analogy  would  require  them  to  be  doubled,  step  2?  *1  for  sirp^l  bilin 
i/bba-hel  for  y'bhah-hel  /  or  have  a  vocal  Sh’va  or  a  vowel  when  they  might  be 
expected  to  have  a  silent  Sh’va,  S| for  iiinpn  tah-r' ghu ;  or  are  preceded  by  a 

Ifciort  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh’va,  for  nsn  ?  n:^2  bid/d  ghdth for 

5  for  5  kb-dhdshlm  for  .  Also  when  the  same 

consonant  is  immediately  repeated  in  the  same  word  the  intervening  Sh’va  is 
made  vocal  in  order  to  give  distinctness  to  the  reduplication,  e.  g.  iVipS  tsiFlb. 


Write  the  folio  win 
If  their  vowels : — 


EXERCISE  7. 

g  words,  and  ascertain  the  quantity 


12 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


10 


Yis-ra-*el',  gbo-yim',  blbnc-the-hem/,  u-bh’fcO-ts’ro-tha'yikh, 
khu-sb^n',  rish-fa-tM'yim,  me'-lekh,  bh’bhit-no',  li-hu-dha/, 
fazobh-khenT,  yith-ka-fe'-ha. 

"Write  and  divide  into  syllables : — 

Umiknekbem',  yesb’bhu/,  biimtsatbo',  yikhrafem', 
sbigbyonotb',  bbe*emunatbd',  vdar’*ubbeni',  tbabaro'gbu, 
sb6leabb'. 


Resulting  Vcnv  el- Changes. 


Certain  vowel-changes  result  from  tbe  foregoing  rules, 


viz. 


1.  If  two  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  tbe  begin¬ 
ning  of  a  syllable,  tbe  first  will  receive  a  short 
vowel.  This  is  commonly  Hbirik,  e.  g.  ■’“n?  dibhre  for 
yirrt  ;  but  if  one  of  tbe  consonants  bad  a  compound  Sb’va, 
tbe  vowel  corresponding  will  be  inserted,  e.  g.  ”£?' 
yaamddh  for  “ns?? ;  or  if  a  vowel  bas  been  rejected,  tbe 
new  vowel  may  be  conformed  to  it,  e.  g.  iiba  moVhho 

for  'A-  from  tfbia . 

»  •  • 


2.  When  a  tone- vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  two 
consonants  tbe  pronunciation  is  frequently  softened  by 
giving  a  pretonic  vowel,  mostly  Kamets,  to  tbe  first,  e.  g. 
rviibro  from  nsba ,  nc' ,  nnjib .  And  tbe  vowel  a  is  often 
retained  in  sucb  a  situation,  when  other  vowels  would  be 


rejected,  e.  g.  from  yntt.but  ‘'ftqv  not  nnbc  fiom 

3.  Tbe  harshness  of  concurring  consonants  at  tbe  end 
of  a  word  is  commonly  relieved  by  inserting  Segbol,  toj 
which  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  conformed,  S’T.  for 
rob  for- rob,  ifyh  for  sjbtt  .  If  either  consonant  is  a  gu 
tnral  Pattabb  is  mostly  used  instead,  ns  3,  bys, 
either  consonant  is  ,  Hbirik  is  used ;  if  tbe  seco: 


§11.  KAMETS  AND  KAMETS  -HHATUPH.  13 

consonant-  is  1  it  will  rest  in  Shurek,  rra,  ’’bp ,  ,  but 

nva . 

V  T 

4.  When  by  reason  of  any  changes  occurring  in  words 
a  short  vowel  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  the 
vowel  must  ordinarily  be  prolonged  or  the  syllable  con¬ 
verted  into  a  mixed  syllable  by  doubling  the  succeeding 
consonant;  thus  instead  of  Jr1??  we  find  ryi"  yd-nlaJih  or 
rnip  yan-niahh. 

5.  When  a  simple  syllable  becomes  mixed  or  a  long 
mixed  syllable  loses  its  accent,  its  vowel  is  ordinarily 
shortened,  e.  a;.  ‘hr©  from  “if© ,  by  from  bay 

/  CD  •  *  V  **  /  V  T  *•  T 

§  11.  Kamets  and  Kamets-HKatupTi. 

Kamets  d  and  Kamets-Hhatuph  6  are  both  represented 
by  the  same  sign  (T  ),  but  may  be  distinguished  by  the 
following  rules : — 

1.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  and 

in  unaccented  simple  syllables,  §  9,  5,  it  is  Kamets, 
rn©  md'veth ,  dd-bhdr' ’  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables 

it  is  Kamets-Hhatuph,  7ihdph-shi\  acnn  'vattd-sJidbJi. 

2.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  Sh’va  the  distinction  is 
mostly  made  by  Methegh  (  —  ),  §  22 ;  without  Methegh 
it  is  always  Kamets-Hhatuph,  with  it  commonly  Kamets, 
niasn  hhdkh-md,  rrasn  hliddcKmd. 

t  :  t  7  t  :  it 

3.  Before  a  guttural  with  Hhateph-Kamets,  or  Kamets- 
Hhatuph,  the  syllable  is  frequently  intermediate,  §  9,  7, 
aid  the  vowel  d,  though  accompanied  by  Methegh,  *nnn 
) djih°ri,  aippn  to^dbJidhem. 

a.  Some  cases  falling  under  2  and  3  can  only  be  decided  by  the  etymology ; 

•  i 

thus  with  the  prefixed  conjunction  vd°niyyoth ,  with  the  article 

j *ul°niyya ;  shordshlm  from  $3  S  ’25 ,  hhdrdshim  from  • 

rvniatlj  in  Ps.  lxxxvi.  2  the  imperative  shdmrd,  in  Job  x.  12  the  preterite  shdm’ra 


14 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


EXERCISE  8. 


Apply  the  foregoing  rules  to  the  words  that  follow. 

.  n:o©  .  rro  ,  wpe  ,  ©ns  ,  m  ,  npnn  ,  nfcnn  ,  triba  ,  op45 

T  :  *  “  -:rr  7  “  h  r  ]  r  r  '  r  7  It  :  rr  >  >T  :  r  ?  •  t  :  7  It  t 

Write : — 

Yahom,  ^az',  *5znam',  mal’khu/,  mdl’kho',  dhabhar 
m6kk°rabh6th',  hkakh’ma,  hhokhma/,  n6'j'6bh,dhem/. 


§  12.  Daghesh-lene. 

1.  Daghesh-lene  is  a  point  written  in  the  letters  3  5  1 
a  a  n  (rsa  “32  ISghadh  WphatTi)  to  indicate  the  loss  of 
their  aspiration,  §  1,  3.  They  retain  their  aspirate  sound, 

when  they  are  immediately  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  a 

* 

voeal  Sh’va;  when  not  so  preceded,  they  receive  Daghesh 
lene,  nri“32  V  ghadhtem. 

2.  An  initial  aspirate  following  a  word  which  ends  n 
a  vowel,  and  has  a  conjunctive  accent,  §  16,  does  not  tak 
Daghesh-lene  wh  nryn  ,  Gen.  i.  2  ;  but  if  the  accent  is  dis 
junctive,  Daghesh-lene  is  inserted,  since  in  this  case  th 
aspirate  is  regarded  as  removed  from  the  influence  of  th  . 
vowel  uhlans  ^cabsa  Gen.  i.  26. 

*  w  '  »«  •  •  »-•  •  —  •  I 

•  Vi  •  ✓ 

'  .  V  ’ 

EXERCISE  9. 

Correct  the  following  sentences  by  inserting  or  omit  tin 
Daghesh-lene : — 

Yashabh  bhafir  fadh  fom’dho  liphne  hafedha  Finish 
phat  fadh  moth  khohen  ghadhol.  . 

V’fasita  hliesed  f al  fabdeka  ki  bib’rit  “donay  hebe*tai 
et  abd’ka  v’*im  bi  favon  h“miteni  v’f ad  *fibika  lo*  t’bi*eni ; 


§§  18,  14. 


DAGHESH-FORTE. 


15 


§  13.  Da  ghe  sit- forte. 

1.  Daghesh-forte  is  a  point  inserted  in  the  bosom  of  a 
letter  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled;  thus  bi 2*5  vayyimr 
nidi.  It  is  never  found  in  the  gutturals  x  n  n  s  ,  and 
rarely  in  "i . 

2.  A  point  in  one  of  the  aspirates  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Dagheshdene,  §  12,  1, 
ri"ia,n  dibbartd.  The  aspirates  when  doubled  likewise 
lose  their  aspiration. 

3.  A  point  in  Vav  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a  vowel  pre¬ 
cedes  ;  otherwise  it  is  Shurek  TO?  y'tsavvu. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  sometimes  inserted  for  euphony,  as 

■'isy  imCbhe  for  irihhe.  When  the  first  letter  of  a 
••  •  •  ••  •  • 

•  • 

word  is  doubled  in  order  to  link  it  with  the  final  vowel 
of  the  word  preceding,  it  is  called  Daghesh-forte  con¬ 
junctive,  isf  TOp  Icumu.Js-ts'u. 

5.  Daghesh-forte  is  frequently  omitted  from  vowelless 

letters,  whether  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  words. 
In  the  former  case  the  following  Sh’va  generally  remains 
vocal,  Cfn?i  vayUiaph  for  5|h*l  vayy'hhapp.  A 


§  14.  Mappile. 

V 

Mappik'  is  a  point  inserted  in  a  final  He  to  denote  that 
it  is  a  consonant,  and  not  a  vowel,  §  7,  3,  TOb?2  maTkdli , 


psbtt  mailed. 

•7  T  • 


i  EXERCISE  10. 

i  W rite : — 

Shibbhtsta,  Mtthbbafoth,  d&bb’rah,  **dh&bb’ra,  gulghlto, 
bikkartim,  vhyyibbak’fu,  hhyyulladh,  tukh’lii,  fasitha  116. 

Pronounce  the  following  words  and  name  the  points 
which  are  written  in  the  letters  : — 


10 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


>  C» 


15,  16 


,  in:ro,  dnx  ,  nrtabn  ,  by«ban  ,  ibma  ,  wry  ,  rrr  ,  iripv^ 

,  wan  ,  ^ib-kn  ,  nn-ia  ,  wbrnb  ,  o^bs  ,  n^bar  ,  nfri  ,  nfr 
,  ff'jbisa  ,  libra  ,  wnien  ,  jwis  ,  ?i~?  ,  nn)  ,  nab  a  ,pybc 
.  T'bs  ,  bs^i  ,  wbsn  ,  wb  nb’yr  ,  ww  *rxapx  ,  prppx 

t  t  7  *  -  7  •  -  -  7  t  v  -:  1-  7  v  i  t*  v  :  f-  ■;  7  W ;  !••  :  v 


§  15.  Raphe. 

Raphe  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke  placed  over  a  letter, 
and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte, 
or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be :  njc'n  hivvas'dha  not 
hivvas1  dhah. 


S  16.  Accents. 

'  i  s  *  J 

\  Jf  * "  •  1  Cl  * U  v*V  *Ki7 

1.  An  accent  is  written  upon  every  word,  with  the 
twofold  design  of  marking  its  tone-syllable  and  of  indi¬ 
cating  its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 

2.  Accents  are  either  disjunctives  or  conjunctives,  as 
shown  in  table  III.  The  former  indicate'  that  the  word 
'upon  which  they  are  placed  is  more  or  less  separated 
from  those  that  follow;  the  latter  that  it  is  connected 
with  what  follows. 

3.  The  place  of  the  accent  is  either  over  or  under  the 
letter  preceding  the  tone- vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the  j 
prepositives  (marked  prep,  in  the  table),  which  always 
accompany  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  and  the  post- 
positives  (marked  postp.'),  which  stand  upon  its  final 
letter. 

4.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh ;  but  tin 
former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the  Iasi 
word  in  the  verse,  while  Methegh  is  never  written  unde 
a  tone-syllable.  Paslita  is  likewise  distinguished  fror 


§17. 


ACCENTS. 


Kadhma,  and  Y’thibh  from  Mahpakh,  only  by  fl 
position. 

o.  In  the  poetical  books,  Job,  Psalms,  and  Proverbs,  a 
different  system  of  accentuation  prevails  from  that  which 
is  in  use  in  the  rest  of  the  Old  Testament. 


§  17.  Position  of  the  Accent. 

The  accent  always  falls  either  upon  the  ultimate  or 
penultimate  syllable,  and  is  governed  by  the  following 
rules : — 

1.  In  their  uninflected  state  all  words,  whether  primi¬ 
tive  or  derivative,  are  accented  on  the  ultimate,  "irn  ,  inn  . 
But  Segholate  words  and  forms,  that  is,  such  as  have 
an  unessential  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  inserted  to  soften 
the  harshness  of  concurring  consonants,  §  10.  3,  are  ac¬ 
cented  on  the  penultimate,  ?fba  for  ljba  ,  bro  for  b:o. 

2.  If  the  word  receive  an  addition  at  the  end  consist¬ 
ing  of  a  vowel  or  beginning  with  one,  this  will  attract 
the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its  initial  vowel,  cna"  ,  iihn  . 

Exceptions. — a.  Suffixes  added  to  the  3  fern,  preterite 
of  verbs,  cnjnn.  l>.  Personal  terminations  of  verbs 
and  the  paragogic  vowels  n  t  ,  n  _  and  ■> .  ,  when  they  do 
not  cause  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  previously  accented, 
nap  ,  wnnn  ,  but  >iim . 

3.  When  a  simple  syllable  is  attached  to  a  word  cither 
directly  or  by  means  of  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  is  given 
to  the  penult,  cxa  ,  rcsa  ,  ^nosa  ,  bp  ,  nib'p . 

The  suffix  follows  the  general  rule,  when  preceded  by 
a  vowel,  or  attached  to  the  3  fem.  preter.  of  verbs  ;  other¬ 
wise  it  draws  the  accent  upon  itself,  Tppx  ,  “npb^  ?  fj"p  . 

4.  A  consonant  appended  to  a  long  final  vowel  draws 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate,  nma;1 ,  prr.a^ . 


OKTHOGRAPHY. 


18,  19 


r  Appended  mixed  syllables  always  receive  the  accent 
Erobn ,  DDshtt . 

••  •  —  ••  7  ••  •  •  • 

•  •  •  /  •  •  • 

0.  The  only  prefixes  which  affect  the  position  of  the 
accent  are  the  V av  Conversive  of  the  future,  which  draws 


it  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  ittst'H ; 
and  the  Vav  Conversive  of  the  preterite,  which  throws  it 
forward  from  the  penult  to  the  ultimate,  nnicso  . 


EXERCISE  11. 

Accent  the  following  words  : 

*abh  and  the  derived  forms  lia*abh,  *abln,  *abhinu, 
^.abhik,  *abkoth,  *abkothenu,  M*abh6thehem. 

Pakadh'  and  the  derived  forms  pak’dhu,  pakfidhnu, 
pakadhti,  p’kidhtlv,  p’k&dht&m,  ylphkodh,  hiphkidh, 
y&phkidhehu,  hithpak’dhu,  h&mmuphkadhim. 

§  18.  Recession  of  the  Accent 

% 

A  conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the  ultimate 
to  the  penult,  if  a  disjunctive  immediately  follows, 
whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  the  penult  of  a  dissyl¬ 
lable,  rib ->b  Gen.  1 :  5. 

§  19.  Pause  Accents. 

The  greater  disjunctives,  which  mark  the  limits  of 
clauses  and  sections,  are  called  pause  accents. 

These  sometimes  stand  upon  the  penult  in  words 
ordinarily  accented  on  the  ultimate,  "p:x  ,  "pis  ;  or  vice 
versa  upon  the  ultimate  in  place  of  the  penult,  . 
They  also  occasion  certain  vowel  changes,  viz.,  they 
1.  Lengthen  short  vowels,  particularly  (  . )  or  ( ..  )  to 

(  )  TC8  ,  TS  ;  31  y  ,  31 V  . 

\  ▼  /  -  ▼  7  at  r  7  .  r  v  /  v  <*» 


20. 


ACCENTS. 


lb 

2.  Restore  vowels  dropped  in  inflection,  'I'ta'n  ,  . 

3.  Change  simple  Sh’va  to  Seghol,  "l<7? ,  ‘,r£ . 

4.  Change  compound  Sh’va  to  the  corresponding  long 
vowel,  “'is  ,  ■>:§  . 

§  20.  Consecution  of  Accents. 

.  1.  The  last  word  in  every  verse  receives  Silluk,  and  is 
followed  by  two  dots  vertically  placed  ( ; )  called  Soph 
Pasuk  (i.  e.  end  of  the  verse). 

2.  If  the  verse  consists  of  two  clauses,  the  last  word  of 
the  first  clause  is  marked  by  Athnahh.  If  of  three 
clauses,  which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can 
contain,  the  first  is  limited  by  Segholta,  the  second  by 
Athnahh,  and  the  last  by  Silluk. 

3.  These  clauses  are  divided  into  sections,  if  necessary, 
by  one  or  more  of  the  disjunctives,  Zakeph  Katon, 
Zakeph  Gadhol,  R’bhia,  Pazer,  and  T’lisha  Gh’dhoia. 

4.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are  disposed 
relatively  to  the  disjunctive  which  marks  its  close,  see 
table  XX. 

5.  Each  disjunctive  of  the  first  class  is  regularly  pre¬ 
ceded  by  one  conjunctive  and  a  disjunctive  of  the  second 
class ;  disjunctives  of  the  second  class  by  two  conjunctives 
and  a  disjunctive  of  the  third  class  ;  disjunctives  of  the 
third  class  by  three  conjunctives  and  a  disjunctive  of  the 
fourth  class ;  and  disjunctives  of  the  fourth  class  by  four 
or  more  conjunctives. 

6.  The  trains  of  accents  thus  formed  are  adapted  to 
sections  of  different  length  and  character  by  omitting 
such  of  the  Conjunctives,  and  more  rarely  by  repeating 
such  of  the  Disjunctives,  as  the  mutual  relations  of  the 
words  may  seem  to  require,  and  breaking  off  the  series 
whenever  all  the  words  in  the  section  have  been  supplied. 


20 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


21,  22 


§  21.  Makkeph. 

1.  Makkeph  (")  is  used  to  connect  words.  Monosyi- 
Jabic  pai'ticles  especially  are  frequently  tlius  linked  with 
the  succeeding  or  preceding  word,  “'bvite^rrDjj! 

2.  Where  two  or  more  words  are  united  in  this  tnannei 
the  last  only  has  an  accent.  Hence  a  long  mixed  syl¬ 
lable,  followed  by  Makkeph,  must  be  shortened,  §  9,  5, 
tpy-bs,  or  else  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh, 

§22,  ttnrrS- 

EXERCISE  12. 

Connect  each  pair  of  words  by  Makkeph,  inserting 
Daghesk-forte  conjunctive  whenever  the  former  ends  in 
a  or  e. 

Kol  yisra*el,  yal’dha  lo,  *eth  *elle,  *ethmokh  bo,  tih’ye 
li,  ten  li,  sh’losh  *elle,  y’bkakkesh  dafath,  l’kha  na*. 


§  22.  Metliegk. 


1.  Methegh  (  —  )  represents  a  minor  stress  of  the  voice, 
which  usually  falls  upon  the  second  syllable  before  the 
accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth,  if  the  word  have  so 
many,  nisb^nnwi,  iirnsn  ;> . 


2.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  mixed,  it 
may  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple  syl¬ 
lable  ;  or  if  none  such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  alto¬ 
gether. 

3.  It  is  always  given  to  simple  syllables,  followed  by 
a  vocal  Sh’va,  tit? 50  ;  also  to  intermediate  syllables  fol 
lowed  by  compound  Sh’va,  or  a  vowel  which  has  arisen 
from  compound  Sh’va,  nfeSib,  rnn|) ,  and  frequently  when 
the  Sh’va  is  simple,  . 

4.  The  place  of  Methegh  is  often  supplied  by  an 


23. 


21 


k’ri  and  k’thibh. 


accent  chosen  agreeably  to  the  laws  of  consecution, 

I 


EXERCISE  13. 

Apply  the  rules  for  Methegh.  A  hyphen  represents 
Makkeph. 

VeAbhe',  M*adhdnehern/,  meh &mm&f arakh a ',  f  £mm!na- 
dhabh',  ben-ha^ama',  berfikhnukhem',  v&yylr’*u',  h&n- 
nogh’sim',  haAshsha',  meAtrtso',  latheth-la/nu,  hithh£l- 
lekh-noTdk,  me^bhodMth’khem'. 

§  23.  ICri  and  KHTiibh. 

1.  K’ri  ( read )  is  the  technical  name  of  a  marginal 
reading  in  the  Hebrew  Bible,  which  is  sanctioned  by  tra¬ 
dition  as  a  substitute  for  the  corresponding  reading  in 
the  text,  or  the  K’thibh  (written).  The  vowels  of  the 
K’ri  are  connected  with  the  letters  of  the  text  and  a 
reference  made  to  the  margin  where  the  letters  of  the 
former  may  be  found. 

2.  If  a  given  word  is  to  be  omitted  in  reading,  it  is 
left  unpointed,  and  the  note  “Hp  sbi  svo  written  but  not 
read ,  placed  in  the  margin.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word  is  to  be  supplied,  its  vowels  are  inserted  in  the 
text,  and  the  letters  placed  in  the  margin  with  the  note, 
.1TD  xbi  iip  read  but  not  written. 

3.  In  some  words  of  frequent  occurrence,  a  different 
reading  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone,  without  a  mar¬ 
ginal  explanation.  Thus  the  sacred  word  mm,  which  the 
Jews  have  a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  is  read 
by  them  as  if  it  were  Lord ,  whose  points  it  accord¬ 
ingly  receives,  mm ,  unless  these  two  names  stand  in 
immediate  connection,  when  to  avoid  repetition  it  is  read 
cribs  and  pointed  mm;  so  the  pronoun  sin  is  read  snn. 


22 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


23 

EXERCISE  14. 

„ 

Write  tlie  following  words,  as  they  would  appear  in 
the  text,  and  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  uniting 
the  points  of  the  K’ri  with  the  letters  of  the  K’thibh, 
and  making  the  appropriate  marginal  note. 

Larubh  k’thibh — laribh  k’ri ;  sima  k’thibh — suma  k’ri : 

•  /  •  •  •  / 

fasithi  k’thibh — fasitlia  k’ri ;  bish’mitk  k’thibh — Msh- 
shana  k’ri ;  fabhdo  k’thibh — fhbhdekha  k’ri ;  hotsithiha 
k’thibh — hhtstsitliuha  k’ri ;  bh’yisra*el  k’thibh — yisra*el 
!k’ri;  p’rath  read  but  not  written;  *im  written  but  not 
read. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  24.  Prefixed  Particles. 

1.  The  significant  elements  of  speech  in  Hebrew  con¬ 
sist  of 

(1)  Prefixed  particles,  which  do  not  form  a  complete 
word  of  themselves,  but  are  always  attached  to  that 
which  follows. 

(2)  The  Pronouns,  which  are  used  both  separately 
and  as  appendages  to  other  words. 

(3)  The  remaining  parts  of  speech,  which  always  con¬ 
stitute  separate  words. 

2.  The  prefixed  particles  are  the  article,  He  interroga¬ 
tive,  the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Vav  Conjunctive. 


25.  The  Article. 


1.  The  definite  article  consists  of  n  with  Pattahh  fol¬ 
lowed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to 
which  it  is  prefixed,  Sfb'n  a  Icing,  tjban  the  Icing. 

2.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  Sh’va,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  the  aspirates,  §  13.  5, 
t'ion ,  -erran,  but  nsran,  reran. 

3.  Before  ■  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 

forte,  §  13.  1,  the  article  has  Kamets,  §  9.  5.  This  is 
always  the  case  before  and  “i  and  commonly  before 
y ;  before  n  and  n  Pattahh  is  mostly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
bn'sn,  yisin,  ann  but  *nnn,  senn. 

V  T  7  ▼  T  IT  7  •  -  T  7  ••  T  “7  1  V  • 

a.  The  nouns  earth ,  ‘"in  mountain ,  and  D3J  people  on  receiving  the  article 

i  i 

lengthen  their  vowels  to  ,  ~nn  and  03TH  . 


24 


HE  INTERROGATIVE. 


26. 


4  Before  the  strong  gutturals  with  Kamets,  the  article 
has  Seghol.  This  is  always  the  case  with  n,  but  with  n 
and  y  only  takes  place,  when  the  article  stands  upon  the 
second  syllable  before  the  accent,  bin  Bonn ,  D">inn , 
triyn  but  inn ,  oyn . 

1  T  B  /  T  r  7  T  T 


§  26.  He  Interrogative. 

The  letter  n  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh  asks  a 
question,  T?;  we  shall  go ,  tj!«n  shall  we  got  Before  a 
vowelless  letter,  §  10.  1,  or  a  guttural  this  becomes 
Pattahh,  cnyi'n  do  ye  hnow  ?  “?xn  shall  I  go  t 
Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to  Seghol 
nryn  it  was,  nrnnn  was  it  f 

EXERCISE  15. 


Be  careful  to  apply  the  rule  for  Daghesh-lene,  §  12.  1 ;  and  observe  that  simple 
Sh’va  following  either  the  article  or  the  interrogative  is  always  vocal,  §  9,  at 

i  i 


finr'rn  not  cn s-n-n  . 


Prefix  the  article  to  the  following  words : — 

“fcs  flesh ;  anr  gold ;  u)  sea ;  f  ?  tree ;  lix  light ; 
.rwblK  ground ;  Ifiari  darkness ;  rosbio  work ;  n:xn  fig. 
tree ;  i tv  dust ;  02^  bone ;  nnb  bread ;  nin:  corpse ; 
?^i  firmament ;  nil  spirit ;  21?  evening ;  ain  sword ; 
yii  seed ;  abis  star ;  nby  leaf ;  D~s  man ;  niir  year ; 
in:  river;  pis1  earth;  ay  people;  ‘‘h  or  living; 
ciai  words ;  nisr®  shoulders. 

See  §  25.  3,  a. 


Prefix  He  Interrogative  to  the  following  words : 

,T?  ,ri*T  ,  *riy  ,n»  ,*j?  ,i£®  ,  -o:»  ,ria^ 

,nxa  ,  sr>ns®  ,bxb  ,b»  ,nfc»  ,2-ra  ,^yi?b  ,PH 

,®iix  ,  nbDtt  orpsi  ,  min1  ,  ipn  ,12:10  ,.  rnn  ,  tfesn  ,  nnx 

.21  ,D3  ,B?B  ,122 

1  Resh  is  not  regarded  as  a  guttural  in  the  rule  for  He  Interrogative. 


S  27,  28.  INSEPARABLE  PREPOSITIONS. 


8  27.  Inseparable  P repositions 


25 


1.  The  prepositions  2,  3  and  V  are  regularly  prefixed 
with  Sh’va,  rvfcjna ,  Vis  ,  on-aaV.  Before  vowelless 

7  '  '*  I  7  •  *  TT#.  r  - - - r~--  „ _ n _ 

letters  they  take  Hhirik,  §  10.  1,  pjpa  for  Pjpa ;  before  ; 
gutturals  with  compound  Sh ’va  they  take  the  correspond- / 
ing  short  vowel,  §  10.  1,  pso,  VisV,  *nna;  before  mono¬ 
syllables  and  before  dissyllables  accented  upon  the  penult, 
they  frequently  receive  a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  10.  2,  fiSTS, 
OS:V;  before  the  article  its  n  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition  "Q^3  for  li’jTO,  paV  for  pfcnb . 

'  /f  i/  ,  f  rii  isyp.  q  ■'  i  .  -A  v  '  • 

a.  The  initial  X  of  “'jbx  Lord ,  master  when  it  has  a  singular  suffix,  and 

E*,n‘bx  God  quiesces  after  the  inseparable  prepositions,  §  7,  “'jbttb  ?  ? 

o -riba  a  for  c^hbxz  the  Seghol  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable ; 
also  in  the  inf.  const.  to  say  after  b  ^?axb  but  ibXlD  . 

v:  &  7  ••  •:  iv  7  vs  iv 

•  t \  i*  /  ’ 

2.  The  preposition  p  from  may  either  be  written  as  a 
separate  word  or  shortened  to  the  prefix  na  with  Hhirik 
followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  next  letter,  IjTJia  for 
pp  pa .  Before  n  Hhirik  is  commonly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
but  before  other  gutturals  it  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  §  9. 

5,  prua  for  pn  pa,  but  fiiffa,  5|Wtd.  -•  -i 

ijf  ft  y  /  ■'  *  a 

yT i  1  1  j  w  [  •  f  -  % 

a .  The  inseparable  prepositions  take  before  the  divine  name  rnrp  the  same 
pointing  that  they  would  receive  before  ,  which  the  Jews  substitute  for  it  in 

reading,  thus  rnrpa,  rrirra,  rrimb,  niPPE,  Comp.  §  23.  3. 

'  T  |-  7  T  T  1-7  T  I--*  W 


§  28.  Vav  Conjunctive. 

The  conjunction  1  and  is  regularly  prefixed  with  Sh’va 
fjfljh'i ,  pkrn  .  Before  one  of  the  labials  3,  a,  &,  or 
before  a  vowelless  letter  V av  quiesces  in  Shurek  pii , 
Snp ;  before  a  vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in 

which  the  Yodh  quiesces,  TP ;  before  a  guttural  with 

9 


2G 


ETYMOLOGY. 


29 


compound  Sli’va  it  receives  tlie  corresponding  short 
vowel  ,  “'bzstT.  ,  ritri  ,  ’’Srn ;  before  monosyllables  and  dis¬ 
syllables  accented  on  the  penult  it  frequently  receives  a 

pretonic  Karnets  *iHan ,  . 

A 

'  ♦ 

Vocabulary  1. 

The  parts  of  speech  are  distinguished  by.initials  or  abbreviations;  m.  denotei 
masculine,  f.  feminine,  pi.  plural. 


S"*?  ii.  m.  man 
"i*i»  n.  m.  light 
a  prep,  in 

nrna  n.  f.  least,  cattle 

rta  n.  m.  house 

"!j?a  n.  m.  morning 

“lira  n.  m.  flesh 

Ii  conj.  and 

“ten  n.  m.  darkness 

nr1  n.  m.  day 

c"1  n.  m.  sea 
▼ 

rn*1  n.  m.  moon 


•  ••  T 


3  prep,  according  to,  as,  like. 

Dnaaia  n.  m.  pi.  stars 

b  prep,  to,  for 

so  aclv.  not 

on's  n.  m.  f.  Iread 
•  •  •• 

n.  m.  night 
fa  prep,  from 
“i?  prep,  unto,  until 
an?  n.  m.  f.  evening 
rn©  n.  m.  field 

n.  m.  pi.  heaven 
©©©  n.  m.  f.  sun. 


Lesson  1  in  Reading  Hebrew,  see  page  111. 

Lesson  1  in  "Writing  Hebrew,  see  page  137. 

The  succeeding  lessons  are  connected  with  the  vocabu 
laries  that  follow  in  their  order. 


§  29  Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  the  following,  viz. : 

SINGULAR. 

1.  I  -  ■pass  anokhf,  ,,:s<  ani 
j  Thou  m.  “rs  atta' 

3‘  (  Thou  f.  rx  (;nx)  att 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


21 


'ft  29. 


(He 

hu 

3 

\  She 

• 

(inn)  hi 

PLURAL. 

1. 

We 

*i:n:x 

•  —  •• 

•  • 

“nahhnuj 

• 

• 

nahh'nu,  'OS  *nu 

(  Ye  m. 

CPS? 

attend 

2 

1  Ye  f. 

m 

atten', 

n:  nx 

T  - 

atte'na 

Q 

(  They  m. 

on 

hem, 

man 

T  *• 

hem  ma 

o 

{  They  f. 

in 

hen, 

nsn 

T  - 

hen'na 

• 

2.  When  governed  by  verbs,  nouns  or  particles  they 
are  appended  to  them  in  the  following  shortened  forms, 
called  pronominal  suffixes : 


Com. 

SINGULAR. 

*  0/-V  ,  L  , 

'  ^  A 

•  •  - — : 

PLURA.L 

• 

• 

/yy-6---  *  -  ° 

Masc. 

a 

*  .  i  * 

DD 

-  V" 

a 

Hem. 

km  '4  1* 

,  A  ^  '  > 

<  1? 

Vv  , 

i  iff- 

Masc. 

n  on 

•  a 

• 

-  tw 

Hem. 

.  jr-  f  1  /  J  k 

n 

T 

i  in 

II 

3.  In  the  first  person  singular  is  used  with  nouns, 
and m ■’3  with  verbs.  The  third  plural  forms  on,  in  are 
used  with  plural  nouns ;  D,  1  with  verbs  and  singular 
nouns.  The  suffixes  to ,  ID.  on .  ]n  are  called  grave,  the’ 
rest  are  light. 

4.  The  inseparable  prepositions  are  united  with  pro¬ 
nominal  suffixes  as  shown  in  Table  IV. ;  D  is  prolonged  by 
the  syllable  ‘i'Q  and  p?  becomes  before  light  suffixes  Ta’a 
or  "BE .  The  suffix  Ti  preceded  by  —  is  contracted  to  i 
e.  g.  is  for  VQ ,  ib  for  ?.nb ;  n  preceded  by  —  is  short¬ 
ened  to  n  e:  u.  for  <"0  and  in  like  manner  with  the 

T  ~  T  T  T 

pause  accent  ^3  ,  2  masc.  sing,  for  p3  . 


28 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Vocabulary  2. 


rrix  n.  m.  f.  sign 
ns  n.  m.  brother 
T’S  there  is  not 
C'h'bs  n.  m.  pi.  God 
77s  n.  f.  earth,  land 
pa  prep,  between 
anr  n.  m.  gold 
ti  adj.  living ,  alive 
nirp  n.  m.  Jehovah 

T  J 


n.  m.  Israel 

■  • 

^  ••  ^  n.  m.  silver 
*Tiy  adv.  yet,  besides 
b?  prep,  upon,  over 
nby  n.  ra.  eternity 
oy  prep,  with 
■'niay  or  ‘,iay  with  me 

•  f  •  •  • 

npy  adv.  now 

T  — 

nnn  prep,  under ,  instead  of. 


§  30.  Other  Pronouns. 

1.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  is 

Masc.  Fem.  Common . 

Singular  ht  nsr  this  Plural  bs  nbs  these 

•  & 

The  poetic  form  IT  is  used  both  as  a  demonstrative  and 
a$  a  relative. 

2.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  sin  is  also 
employed  as  a  remote  demonstrative  that. 

3.  The  relative  pronoun  is  “1©$  who,  which,  sometimes 
shortened  to  ©  ,  see  Table  V.  When  the  relative  is 
governed  by  verbs,  nouns,  or  particles,  it  stands  without 
change  of  form  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause,  and  the 
appropriate  pronominal  suffix  is  attached  to  the  govern¬ 
ing  word  “bai"1  tts  who  his  day  i.  e.  whose  day  ib— mrs 
who — to  him  i.  e.  to  whom.  When  a  preposition  stands 
before  the  relative,  it  governs  not  the  relative  itself  but 
its  antedecent  understood ;  thus,  icsb  means  not  to  whom 

/  7  v  :  i~ 

■  r 
or  to  which  but  to  him  who  or  to  that  which.  It 

receives  an  adverbial  sense  when  followed  by  D©  there, 


31. 


VERBS.  THEIR  SPECIES. 


29 


e.  sc.  D® — icx  where,  “'a is — ncs  whither ,  oca — -nc» 
whence. 

4.  The  interrogative  and  indefinite  pronouns  are  itf 
who  ?  or  ivhoever  and  “ft  what  f  or  whatever.  The  vowel 
of  rra  varies  with  the  first  letter  of  the  following  word, 
see  Table  IY.  In  a  few  instances  its  voweldetter  is 
dropped,  and  it  is  converted  into  a  prefix,  e.  g.  “Tft  for 
sit  nft  what  is  this  f 

5.  Another  interrogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
particle  "•s?  to  the  pronoun  nr  ,  nsr,  thus  nr  "|N  which  f 
or  what  ?  csib  is  for  what  f  why  ?  n-ia  is  from  what 
place  ?  whence  ? 

Vocabulary  3. 


n.  m.  whole ,  all ,  every 
nia  n.  m.  pi.  water 
^?a  adv.  above 


Dipa  n.  m.  f.  place 
tnp  n.  m.  holiness ,  a  holy 
place  or  thing. 


VERBS. 

t 

§  31.  Their  Species. 

1.  Hebrew  verbs  have  seven  different  forms,  called 
species  or  conjugations,  viz. : 

Simple  active. 

Simple  passive. 

Intensive  active. 

Intensive  passive. 

Causative  active. 

Causative  passive. 

7.  Hithpael  Reflexive. 

2.  The  first  of  these  species  is  called  Kal  light,  because 
in  it  no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and 
these  only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  names  are 
taken  from  bps  to  do ,  being  the  forms  assumed  by  this 
verb  in  each  species  severally. 


1.  Kal 

2.  Niphal 

3.  Piel 

4.  Pual 

5.  Hiphil 

6.  Idophal 


30 


ETYMOLOGY. 


32 


3.  To  each  of  these  species  belong  a  preterite  and 
future,  t\vo  forms  of  the  infinitive  called  respectively  the 
absolute  and  the  construct,  a  participle,  and  except  to  the 
Pual  and  Hoplial,  which  as  pure  passives  cannot  express 
a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  alone  has  two  par 
ticiples. 

a.  All  of  these  species  very  rarely  co-exist  in  the  same  verb.  Their  signification 
is  commonly  but  not  invariably  what  is  stated  above.  The  Piel  is  sometimes 
causative  like  the  Hiphil,  and  the  Niphal  reflexive  like  the  Hithpael,  or  the 
Hithpael  passive  like  the  Niphal.  In  these  cases  one  or  other  of  the  equivalent 
species  is  often  dropped  as  unnecessary,  or  some  distinction  in  usage  is  created 
between  them.  In  intransitive  verbs  the  Niphal,  if  it  exists  at  all,  is  usually  the 
passive  of  a  transitive  or  causative  sense. 


Perfect  Verbs. 


1.  Verbs  are  called  perfect,  -when  they  conform 
throughout  to  the  standard  inflection ;  and  imperfect, 
when  in  consequence  of  a  weak  letter,  §  2.  2,  or  some 
other  peculiarity  in  the  root  they  deviate  from  it. 

2.  If  bbp  to  hill  be  taken  as  the  model  of  the  perfect 
Verb,  the  various  species  with  their  significations  will  be 
as  follows,  viz. : — 


1.  Kal 

2.  Niphal 

3.  Piel 

4.  Pual 

5.  Hiphil 
<3.  Hoplial 
7.  Hithpael 


to 

hill. 

to 

be  hilled. 

-bp 

to 

hill  many  or  to  massacre. 

to 

be  massacred. 

bibpn 

to 

cause  to  hill. 

btspr. 

-  >:  ▼ 

to 

be  caused  to  hill. 

bbpnn 

**  f-  J  • 

to 

hill  one's  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite,  which 
in  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification,  therefore,  is  he  lifts  JcUl-eU,  etc.  Hut 
when  these  forms  are  used  to  represent  the  species  their  proper  e  uivalent  is  th« 
infinitive,  which  is  the  form  employed  in  designating  verbs  in  English.. 


33. 


VAT.  PRETERITE  AND  INFINITIVES. 


31 


§  33.  Hal  Preterite  and  Infinitives . 
1.  The  Kal  preterite  is  inflected  thus : — 


PRETERITE. 

* 

Si  ng.  3  masc.  bbj?  katal'  he  killed,  did  kill  or  has  hilled. 

3  fern,  nbi?]?  kat’la/  she  killed. 

2  masc.  ribb]?  katal'ta  thou  (m.)  killedst. 

%fern.  nbbj?  katalt  thou  (f.)  killedst. 

1  com.  *’Pbt?i3  katal'ti  I  killed. 

*  s 

Plur.  3  com.  ^btp;?  kat’lu  they  killed. 

2  masc.  DPbuj?  k’taltem'  ye  (m.)  killed. 

2  fem.  ipboj?  k’talten'  ye  (f.)  killed. 

1  com.  i:bbp  katal  nu  we  killed. 

Infinitive  absolute  bib]?  katol',  construct  bbj?  k’tol  to  kill. 


2.  The  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  the  Kal  preterite 
is  commonly  Pattahh,  as  in  bbp;  in  a  few  verbs,  how¬ 
ever,  most  of  which  are  intransitive,  it  is  Tsere  as  in  “is 
to  be  heavy,  or  Hholem  as  in  bib  to  be  bereaved. 


Kal  Preterite  with  e. 


3  masc. 

3  com. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

Sing  *733 

••  T 

nins 

t  :  it 

mis 

r  :  -  t 

Plur. 

!H33 

:  rr 

npppp 

Infinitive 

absolute  Piss  construct  Pis 

9  - 

2  fem. 


1  com. 


V.122 


Kal  Preterite  with  o. 


3  masc. 

3  com. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing,  bib 

T 

nbob 

t  :  it 

nbib 

t  t 

nbib 

:  :  r 

'nbbb 

•  •  t 

Plur. 

>fob 

:  it 

Qpbsb 

•  •  •  r  • 

•  •  r  • 

inbsb 

i  v  :  t  { 

’cbib 

:  t 

Infinitive  absolute  biib ,  construct  bib . 

32 


ETYMOLOGY. 


I  84 

3.  The  endings  of  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the 
preterite  are  fragments  of  the  corresponding  pronouns ; 
thus  n  in  Pibip  is  from  “ns  2  masc.  sing.,  ri  in  Fib  op 
from  pis  2  fern,  sing.,  nr)  and  ]pi  from  the  2  plur.  nnx 
and  inx ;  ■’Pi  in  "'Pibop  is  by  eup>honic  change  for  ’’3  from 
•’5:x  1  pers.  sing.,  ^3  in  ^:bop  from  'fit*  1  pers.  plur.  As 
two  of  the  persons  are  thus  designated  by  pronominal 
fragments,  no  such  designation  was  needed  in  the  case  of 
the  third  and  only  remaining  person.  The  simple  form 
of  the  verb  without  addition  bop  is  accordingly  used  for 
the  3  masc.  sing. ;  PiT  in  nbop  being  the  sign  of  the 
feminine  and  so  used  also  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  * 
in  Top  the  sign  of  the  plural. 


Vocabulary  4. 


V?  v.  (fut.  a)  to  be  great  “isr  adv.  very 

pap  v.  (fut.  a)  to  cleave,  adhere  niao  n.  f.  commandment 


rbb  n.  f.  door 
Tin  n.  m.  majesty 
Tin  n.  m.  splendor 


biro  v.  to  rule 
■)b?  v.  to  give 
“150  v.  to  shut 
ppa  n.  m.  righteousness 
rar  v.  to  rest ,  cease ,  keep 
Sabbath 


pa?  v.  to  pour 

conj.  for ,  because,  that 
trip  n.  m.  pi.  vessels,  articles 

rib  or  rib  v.  (fut.  a)  to  ni®  n.  m.  f.  Sabbath 
put  on,  xvear,  be  clothed  v.  to  dwell 
with  nor  v.  to  keep,  observe. 

rx  is  the  sign  of  the  definite  object  and  is  placed 
before  pronouns  or  definite  nouns  when  governed  by  a 
transitive  verb. 


§  34.  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Puad  Preterites  and  Infinitives. 

9 

The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  5;  the  Piel  andPual 
by  doubling  the  second  radical  and  attaching  the  appro¬ 
priate  vowels. 


§34. 


33 


“NTPTT  A  h,  PIEL,  AND  PUAL  PRETERITES. 


NIPHAL  PRETERITE. 


3  masc.  3  com. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing,  bap? 

nbap: 

T  •  1  •  • 
•  •  r  • 

i  nbzjpa 

PibapD 

•  •  -  * 

•  •  • 

ipbaps 

•  '  • 

Plur.  biaps 

cnbaps 

•  •  w  • 

■mbaps 

'  •  •  9  9 

spbapj 

Infinitive  absolute  bapn 

,  constimct  bapn . 

0 

PIEL 

PRETEKITE. 

3  masc.  3  com. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing,  bap 

nbap 

t  :  1  • 

p.bap 

nbap 

•'nbap 

Plur.  'bap 

ahbap 

•  •  •  —  1 » 

•  •  r 

■Rf®!? 

!i:bap 

Infinitive  absolute 

construct  bap . 

PUAL 

PRETERITE. 

3  masc.  3  com . 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing,  bib]? 

nbap 

t  : 

nbap 

nbap 

inbap 

Plur.  }bap 

•  *  *m 

anbap 
••  •  *  1  • 

•  •  f  • 

laba  p 
:  -  >\ 

Infinitive  absolute  b®]? , 

construct  bap. 

Vocabulary  5. 

The  initials  K. ,  N. ,  P. ,  etc. ,  denote  the  verbal  species. 


“ijpbis  n.  in.  Eleazar 
Th*  n.  m.  f.  ark 
bia  v.  N.  to  be  separated, 
divided 

5>~?  v.  K.  to  know 

®a?  v.  K.  P.  to  subdue /  N. 

to  be  subdued 
*’.?sb  before 

v.  K.  to  take 
naa  v.  K.  to  anoint 

n.  m.  tabernacle ,  dwell¬ 
ing 


"i30  v.  N.  Pu.  to  be  shut 
fop  y.  P.  to  gather  ■  N.  to  be 
gathered 

Y.  P.  H.  to  sanctify, 
consecrate /  N.  Pu.  to  be 
sanctified 

yi®  v.  N.  to  swear 
bb®  v.  P.  to  bereave 

“ji®  v.  P.  H.  to  cause  to 
dwell 

To®  n.  m.  oil. 


‘i* 


34 


ETYMOLOGY. 


35 


§  35.  The  remaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives. 

The  Hipliil  and  Iloplial  are  formed  by  prefixing  n  with 
the  proper  vowels.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  by  prefixing 
m  to  the  construct  infinitive  of  the  Piel. 


HIPHIL  PEETEEITE. 


3  masc. 

3  com. 

%  fem. 

2  masc.  2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

V’bpn 

nbibpn 

t  •  1;  • 

rbppn  nbbpn 

inbbpn 

*  :  “ »:  • 

Pllte. 

abibpn 

•  h  • 

onb-opn  ■jnb'jpn 

•  •  r  •  *  •  #  r» 

arbbpn 

Infinitive  absolute 

bopn ,  construct  bibjpn . 

- 

HOPHAL  PRETERITE. 

3  masc. 

3  corn. 

3  fem. 

2  masc.  2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

bbpn 

nb-jpn 

t  :  t 

nbbpn  nbbpn 

“'nbbpn 

•  *  **  "•  ▼ 

Plue. 

ibppn 

•  "  5  T 

ohbupn  ‘inbtapr. 

•  *  •  * 

Infinitive  absolute  bbpn  ,  construct  btajpn  . 

t  « 

HITHPAEL 

PRETERITE. 

3  masc. 

3  com. 

3  fem. 

2  masc.  2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

bbpnn 

••  h-  •  • 

t  :  F-  :  • 

nbbpnn  nbbpnn 

■  •  r  #  m  •  w  • 

■'nbbpnn 

Plue. 

fiapprn 

ohbtapnn  inbbpnn 

••  •  •  1—  •  •  7  ••  •  —  1—  •  • 

•  •  r  •  •  •  w  • 

nbbpnn 

Infinitive  absolute  bbppn }  construct  bbpnn . 


% 


Vocabulaey  6. 


b'bs  v.  H.  to  separate 
cya  n.  m.  pi.  nations 
03  conj.  also 
“fin  n.  m.  David 

•  T 

run  n.  f.  animal ,  wild  beast 

i  -  7 

rro  v.  II.  to  cut  of;  Ho.  to 
be  cut  off 


nisbia  n.  f.  work 

'  '  • 

p'btt  v.  Ho.  to  be  caused  to 
reign,  to  be  made  king 
•jbta  n.  in.  king 
miVa  n.  f.  kingdom 
oyia  n.  a  little 1 


1  "C  is  a  noun  meaning  a  little  thing  or  a  small  quantity  of  any  thing,  but  nof 


KAL  FUTURE. 


35 


§  36. 

aya  v.  H.  to  make  small  or  ria®  v.  H.  to  cause  to  rest , 
few  or  cease 

tnp  v  Hith.  to  sanctify  or  fin©  v.  H.  to  destroy 
purify  one's  self  fib©  v.  P.  H.  to  send. 

aSp  v.  H.  to  bring  near ,  offer 


§  36.  Kal  Future ,  Imperative ,  and  Participles. 

1.  The  future  and  imperative  of  each  species  are 
formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  attaching  the 
proper  pronominal  fragments. 


FUTURE. 


Sing.  3  masc. 

yiktol' 

he  shall  or  will  hill 

3  fern. 

bibpn 

tiktol' 

she  will  hill 

2  masc. 

biipn 

tiktol' 

thou  (m.)  'wilt  hill 

2  fern. 

ibopn 

•  :  *:  • 

tikt’ll' 

thou  (f.)  wilt  hill 

1  com. 

ektol' 

I  shall  hill 

Plur.  3  masc. 

yikt’lu' 

they  (m.)  will  hill 

%  fern. 

rt&ibpn 

tiktol'na 

they  (f.)  will  hill 

2  masc. 

nbt:pn 

•  r  • 

.tikt’lu 

ye  (m.)  will  hill 

2  fern. 

nsbiipn 

t  :  h  • 

tiktol'na 

ye  (f.)  will  hill 

1  com. 

^p? 

niktol' 

we  shall  hill. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.  2  masc. 

blip 

k’tol' 

hill  thou  (m.) 

2  fern. 

kit’li' 

hill  thou  (f.) 

Plur.  2  masc. 

*&?p 

kit’lu 

hill  ye  (m.) 

2  fern. 

n;b-jp 

k’tol'na 

hill  ye  (f.) 

little  or  small  as  an  adjective.  Thus  we  may  say  ME  a  little  water,  ME 
cn5  a  little  bread  ;  but  ME  could  not  be  used  in  such  phrases  as  a  little  house 

"  '•*  —  I  » 

a  little  door.  A  different  word  would  be  required  in  the  latter  case. 


36 

ETYMOLOGY. 

.§  36 

% 

PARTICIPLES. 

Singular. 

Active. 

Plural. 

masc. 

fem. 

masc. 

fem. 

nrSp  or 

nbbp  oVitsp 

rvflwp 

hilling 

hotel' 

kot’la' 

kote'leth  kot’linT 

kot’loth” 

Passive. 

rwt:p 

t  »: 

D^Bp 

rrftTOj? 

hilled 

katul' 

k^ula' 

k’tulim' 

k’tuloth' 

2.  Some  verbs  have  Pattahh  in  the  second  syllable  of 
•the  Kal  future  and  imperative.  This  is  regularly  the 
case  with  those  wdiich  have  Tsere  or  Hholem  in  the  pre- 


terite,  thus  “li?1? , 

bath. 

—  •  • 

• 

1 

KAL  FUTURE  with  d. 

3  masc. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing.  "231 

P3DP 

•H32P 

•  •  •  • 

•  • 

—  .  •• 

•  • 

Plur.  vta?? 

•  • 

nrjion 

r  •  •  •  • 

■  •  • 

?133n 
*  :  • 

renion 

T  •  •  •  • 

•  •  • 

"1333 

•  •  • 

• 

IMPEEATIVE. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

Sing.  “32 

“H32  . 

Plur. 

rt32 

n:"i33 

3.  In  the  inflection  of  the  future  the  letters  prefixed 
mostly  denote  the  person  and  those  affixed  the  gender  or 
number;  “>  of  the  3  masc.  ijlbp?  is  by  euphonic  change  for 
“i  from  i«n,  and  as  in  the  preterite  *i  is  appended  as  the 
sign  of  the  plural  ;  n  of  the  3  fem.  -2pn  is  the  sign 
of  the  fem.  (see  above  the  fem.  ending  of  the  participle), 
and  ro  is  appended  in  the  plural  n:  Sepn  from  njn .  In 
the  second  person  n  is  from  npx ,  the  fem.  taking  1 . 
from  ■’PX ,  the  masc.  plur.  '  as  in  the  third  person,  and 


N1PIIAL,  PIEL,  AND  PUAL. 


37 


the  fem.  ns  from  ripns? .  In  the  first  person  sing,  -tips 
x  is  from  ‘OS  ;  in  the  plur.  blips ,  2  is  from  . 

4.  In  the  imperative  no  personal  prefix  is  needed,  as 
but  one  person  is  in  use ;  gender  and  number  are  distin¬ 
guished  as  in  the  second  person  of  the  future. 


Vocabulary  7. 


n'bvfi  n.  f.  pi.  virgins 
v.  P.  to  speak 
!T|Oi“>  n.  m.  Joseph 
adv.  so 
n.  m.  rock 


ny  n.  m.  f.  time 
•  • 

Qinicbs  n.  m.  pi.  Philistines 
n.  f.  Zion 
“'i®  n.  m.  crimson 
“iy»  n.  m.  f.  gate. 


§  37.  Niphal ,  Piel ,  and  Pual  Futures ,  etc. 

•m 

1.  Where  the  infinitive  has  n  prefixed  to  the  radicals 
this  is  rejected  in  the  future  after  the  personal  prefix, 
thus  from  bispn  is  formed  btsp'' . 

2.  The  participles  of  the  Piel  and  subsequent  species 
are  formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  prefixing  sa  ,  a 
fragment  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  or  Tva . 


KIPHAL 

FUTURE. 

3  masc. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing.  bisp? 

btspn 

••  IT 

btspn 

■'bupn 

•  :  Irr  • 

btspK 

••  It  ? 

Plur.  ’ibisp? 

nsbispn 

t  :  ••  • 

*ibtspn 

nsbtspn 

btSpS 

IMPERATIVE. 

2  masc 

2  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

Sing.  btspn 

“'btspn 

•  :  Irr  • 

Plur. 

^btspn 

:  Irr  • 

nsbiopn 

t  :  ••  Ft  • 

PARTICIPLE. 

masc. 

fem. 

masc. 

fem. 

Sing,  bi:ps  nbtsps 

T  li  •  »■*»•• 

or  nbtsps 

Plur. 

D^btspS 

•  t  h  • 

nib  pp: 

ETYMOLOGY. 


PIEL  FUTUEE. 


3  masc. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  #>7ft 

Sing. 

bap1’ 

..  1-  ; 

bapr\ 

bapn 

“’bapn 

•  :  i 

baps 

Plur. 

ibap"' 

n:bapn 

ibapn 

n:bapn 

•  •  r  • 

’sap: 

IMPEEATIVE. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

Sing. 

^ap 

Plur. 

^bap 

robtbp 

t  :  M  r 

PAETICIPLE. 


masc. 

fern. 

masc. 

fem. 

Sing. 

b  apia 

PiSaptt 

T  • 

■  •  r  • 

Plur. 

Qibrapa 

nibapa 

PUAL 

FUTURE. 

3  masc. 

Z  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  097ft. 

Sing. 

bapn 

bapn 

■>bapn 

•  ••  • 

baps 

Plur. 

nbapi 

:  K  * 

n;bapn 

t  :  - : 

^ibapn 
•  *.  • 

n:bapn 

t  :  -  *\  : 

^ap? 

imperative  wanting. 

Sj^g. 


PAETICIPLE. 
masc.  fem. 

bapa  nbapa  or  nbapa 

t  :  t  r  :  v  v  »\  : 


masc . 


fem . 


Plur.  a^bapa  nibapia 

•  r  *\  :  t  : 


Vocabulary  8. 


■vas  v.  K.  to  say 

rrna  n  f.  covenant 

nsn  int.  lo!  behold! 
••  • 

ala  adj.  good, 
ap?^  n.  m.  Jacob 
■irrn’'  n.  Jericho 

•  t 


“aa  v.  P.  to  honor  /  N.  to 
be  hort or ed 
niaa  n.  in.  honor 
a  ana  n.  m.  pi.  priests 
trip  v.  K.  to  cut ,  make  a  co 
venant 


HIPHIL,  HOPHAL,  AND  H1THPAEL. 


39 


§  38. 


s • ^2  \.  IC >  to  te  i tli J / oltl,  ~keep  Pap  v.  H.  to  />  «m  incense 
back  S’!1  adj.  had ,  evil 

“ps  n.  f.  company ,  assembly  nio  v.  K.  to  forget 
‘is-bs  in  the  presence  of  "la©  v.  1ST.  to  keep  one's  self, 

as  n.  ip.  people  take  heed. 

*11  conj.  lest,  that  not 


Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  Futures,  etc. 


HIPHIL 

FUTURE. 

3  maze. 

3  fem. 

2  maze. 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

b^tap"1 

•  h  - 

V'tjpn 

b^apn 

•'b^apn 

•  •  »:  - 

bttips 

Plur. 

^ibap-' 

•  >:  - 

nsbapn 

^app 

robapp 

biI3p3 
.1;  - 

IMPERATIVE. 

2  maze. 

2  fem . 

2  maze. 

2  fem. 

Sing. 

biapn 

..  i.  - 

.  . ».  - 

Plur. 

'iV'apn 

•  h  - 

n:bt3pn 

t  :  •• b.  - 

PARTICIPLE. 

maze. 

fem. 

maze. 

fem. 

Sing. 

b^ap©  nbapia  or  nbapa  Pj; 

•1;  -  y  v>:  - 

ur.  n^’rapa 

niSiapa 

HOPHAL 

FUTURE. 

3  maza 

3  fem. 

2  maze . 

2  fem. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

bap* 

-  i;  T 

bapn 

bapp 

“>bapp 

•  :  >:  r 

baps 

-  h  r 

Plur. 

'ib'ap’’ 

*  P  *  T 

•  r  •  T 

mbapp 

t  ;  -h  t 

ibapp 

rabapp 

t  :  -  b.  r 

biapa 

-1:  v 

imperative  wanting. 


PARTICIPLE. 


maze. 


Sing.  b’b|?'a 


fern. 

rVrjjStt  or  nbapE 


maze.  fem. 

Plur.  n^apw  nibap« 

•  tii  t  t »;  r 


40 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§39 


IIITHPAEL 

FUTURE. 

S  masc. 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem.  1  com. 

Sing. 

bapn;> 

biopnp, 

..  i-  .  . 

biapnn  *• 

•  •  l<-  •  • 

r  • 

'  \53pnPi  btopns 

Plub. 

*iSc®ni 
•  •  • 

t  :  ••  I-  :  • 

liDpnp  : 

nsbtapnn  bepro 

..  ! '  -  * 

%  * 

V3fear>\%  V 

^  4  IMPERATIVE. 

* 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

*  V 

2  masc.  2  fem. 

Sing. 

bapnn 

••I-  ;  • 

■>bt3p!nn 
•  •  !•  •  • 

•  r  • 

Plub. 

ibapnn  nrbspnn 

PARTICIPLE. 

masc. 

fem. 

masc.  fem. 

Sing. 

bspris  nbtapna  or  nbapna  Plub. 

t  :  )•  ;  •  V  V  I-  : 

Qibapna  nibiaprra 

A  •  W  1—  •  *  •  imm  0  0 

*  JV,  0  •  9  •  •  9  % 

VoCABULABY  9. 


non  n.  m.  kindness,  mercy  v.  H.  to  cause  to  reign 

n.  m.  salvation,  njbya  n.  f.  cry 

ns  adv.  thus  bis  v.  H.  to  he  wise,  act 

ttib  v.  H.  to  cause  to  gout  wisely 

on,  to  clothe  niroiB  n.  f.  gladness 

v.  H.  to  cause  to  rain  'jitoto  n.  m.  joy 


ntJio  n.  m.  rain 


t  r 


rvna©  n.  f.  remnant. 


39.  Peculiar  Forms. 


1.  When  the  last  radical  is  5  or  n,  it  is  united  by 
Daghesh-forte  with  personal  endings  beginning  with  the 
same  letter,  e.  a.  ‘ininrn  for  •'nnacn,  nsion  for  nrfsen . 

2.  The  vowel-letter  n  may  be  added  to  the  2  masc. 
sing,  of  the  preterite,  and  dropped  from  the  fem.  plural 
of  the  future  and  imperative,  e.  g.  nrnaa ,  jni-jri . 


o 

JLKJ 


\  ll 


40. 


PARAGOGIC  AND  APOCOPATED  FUTURE. 


41 


3.  Final  1  is  sometimes  added  to  u  of  the  preterite,  and 
to  u  and  %  of  the  future,  e.  g. 

4.  The  Kal  construct  infinitive,  in  a  few  instances,  has 
Pattahh  in  place  of  Hholem,  aito ,  b£to ;  and  occasionally 
i  t  takes  a  feminine  ending  “jbi'n  for  Jiap  . 

5.  The  N iphal  absolute  infinitive  may  be  either  bto~D  or 
bto]?n ;  bibj?  may  be  used  for  the  absolute  as  well  as  the 
construct  infinitive  Piel. 

6.  A  few  verbs  have  Pattahh  or  Seghol  as  the  vowel 
of  the  second  radical  in  the  Piel  preterite,  topp.  "isp 
instead  of  topp ,  “iin ;  Pattahh  also  occurs  in  the  Hith- 
pael  pRpr.n . 

7.  Pual  sometimes  has  Kamets-Hhatuph  and  Hophal 
Kibbuts  in  the  first  syllable  Fnp  ,  aston . 

8.  Tav  of  the  prefixed  nn  in  Hithpael  is  transposed 
with  the  first  radical  of  the  verb,  if  it  be  one  of  the 
sibilants  o ,  to  or  to ;  with  £  the  n  is  transposed  and  in 
addition  changed  to  © ;  with  “I ,  ©  or  n ,  and  occasionally 
with  other  letters,  the  n  is  assimilated  to  the  first  radical 
and  united  with  it  by  Daghesh-forte,  biren ,  pp'Jin  J 

I 


§  40.  Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future  and  Imperative. 

1 .  The  vowel  s\  is  appended  to  the  first  person  of  the 
future,  and,  in  a  very  few  instances,  to  the  third  person 
singular,  to  express  desire  or  determination,  “pn::  we  will 
break  or  let  us  break.  This  is  called  the  paragogic  or 
cohortative  future. 

2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  a  shortened 
form  of  the  second  or  third  persons  singular  and  expresses 
a  wish  or  command,  or,  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  or 
prohibition.  In  perfect  verbs  it  is  distinguished  from 


42 


ETYMOLOGY. 


41 


tlie  simple  future  only  in  the  Hiphil  species,  in  which  the 
\  of  the  ultimate  is  changed  to  (_  ),  baton  thou  mayest 
understand  or  understand  thou. 

3.  Paragogic  nr  is  sometimes  appended  to  the  mascu¬ 
line  singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  command 
into  an  entreaty  or  expression  of  desire,  nrato  oh,  hear  ! 
or  pray,  hear  ! 

4.  The  addition  of  “T  to  a  future  or  imperative  com¬ 
monly  causes  the  rejection  of  its  last  vowel,  except  in  the 
Hiphil  species  where  \  remains  or  is  restored  rnrtox , 

.  The  Kal  imperative  with  6  becomes 
hot1 Id/  the  Kal  imperative  with  d becomes  rnaa  hibh'dhd. 


§  41.  Vav  Conversive. 

. 

Vav  Conversive  is  a  modification  of  the  copulative  1 
and,  and  is  so  called  because  it  has,  in  certain  cases,  • 
the  effect  of  converting  the  future  into  a  preterite  and 
the  preterite  into  a  future.  I 

Vav  Conversive  prefixed  to  the  future  takes  Pattahh 
followed  by  Daghesh -forte  in  the  next  letter,  nao?  he  tv  ill  : 

shut,  nao?n  and  he  shut.  If  this  be  Yodh  with  ShVa, 
Daghesh  is  usually  omitted.  tonp^n  .  Before  x  of  the  first 
person,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh,  Pattahh  is  length¬ 
ened  to  Kamets,  nanx; .  The  verb  commonly  suffers  the 
same  change  as  in  the  apocopated  future,  §  40.  2,  and  in 
the  first  person  sometimes  has  paragogic  nr. 

Vav  Conversive  prefixed  to  the  preterite  has  the  same 
pointing  with  Vav  Conjunctive,  §  28,  “Too  he  has  hept, 
nr  in  and  he  will  heep. 

For  the  influence  of  Vav  Conversive  on  the  accent,  see . 

§  17.  6. 


VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


43 


Vocabulary  10. 


D©?  v.  K.  to  dwell ,  inhabit 
ttj’ro  n.  f.  tunic 
nib©  n.  f.  queen 
“Oil©  n.  m.  Mordecai 


n.  m.  Aaron 
bx  adv.  not 

"bx  prep,  to,  unto,  respecting 
ib»  n.  m.  ashes 
D’H.'ui  n.  m.  pi.  garments 
nil  u.  m.  hail 

▼  T 

ron  adv.  hither 

T  *• 

P?T  v.  K.  (fut.  d)  to  cry 

nppT  n.  f.  cry 

inn  n.  f.  sword 
••  •• 

•  • 

v.  k.  to  be  weary 
*r  n.  f.  hand 

©S'  or  ©Sj  v.  K.  to  drive  out 


Pip  v.  P.  to  receive,  accept 
lip  v.  K  (flit,  a)  come  near, 
approach 

yip  v.  K.  (fut.  d)  to  rend 
©an  n.  m.  head 

v.  K.  (fut.  d)  to  wash 
p©  n.  m.  sackcloth 
nb©  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  send. 


§  42.  Verbs  with  Suffixes. 

% 

1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to 
the  verbs  of  which  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of 
the  suffixes  have  already  been  given,  §  29.  2. 

2.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  suffer  the 
following  changes  before  suffixes : — 

PRETERITE, 

Sing.  3  fern.  nr  becomes  P)_. 

2  masc  Pi  sometimes  becomes  Pi  before  ‘p . 

2  fern.  Pi  becomes  ''Pi . 

Plur.  2  masc.  dpi  becomes  to.  The  2  fern,  plur,  does 

not  occur  with  suffixes. 

FUTURE. 

ri.UR.  2  and  3  fern.  njb-jpri  becomes  ^©ppi . 

3.  The  suffixes  are  joined  directly  to  those  verbal 
forms  which  end  in  a  vowel ;  those  forms  which  end  in  a 


44 


ETYMOLOGY. 


42 


consonant  insert  before,  ?! ,  Dp  and  a  vocal  Sb’va,  and 
before  the  remaining  suffixes  a  full  vowel,  which  in  the 
preterite  is  mostly  a  and  in  the  future  and  imperative 
mostly  e. 

4.  Nun  is  sometimes  inserted  between  the  future  of  the 
verb  and  the  suffix,  particularly  in  emphatic  and  pausal 
forms.  This  is  called  Nun  Epenthetic.  It  is  commonly 
united  by  Daghesh-forte  with  2  of  the  1  pers.  suffix  and 
*T  of  the  2  pers.,  to  which  it  is  almost  always  assimilated. 

5.  The  3  pers.  suffix  is  liable  to  the  following  contrac¬ 
tions  ;  in  the  masc.  TOt  becomes  i ,  VP .  becomes  V . ,  inn 
becomes  TO.,  Vi2_  becomes  ?3v ;  in  the  fem.  n  r  becomes 
«T,  nn_  becomes  nn hd.  becomes  ns.. 

6.  The  first  and  second  persons  of  the  verb  do  not 
receive  suffixes  of  the  same  person  with  themselves. 

The  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Preterite  Kal  bt?j?  assumes  the 
following  forms  in  combination  with  suffixes : — • 


Sing. 

1  com. 

*>2  bop 

•  "  t); 

k’tala'ni 

he  hilled  me 

2  masc. 

^i? 

k’tal’kha 

he  hilled  thee  (m.) 

2  fem. 

k’talakh' 

he  hilled  thee  (f.) 

• 

3  masc.  i 

C 

1 

k  talcl  llll  IT  7  '77  j  7  • 

,  ,  ,  ,  l  he  fciUed  him 

k’talo  j 

3  fem. 

k’talah' 

he  hilled  her 

Pluk. 

1  com. 

?2X!p 

t  t  f; 

k’tala'nu 

he  hilled  us 

0 

2  masc. 

Qpbpp 

k’tal’khem' 

he  hilled  you  (m.) 

2  fem. 

ifte? 

k’tal’khen' 

he  hilled  you  (  f.) 

3  masc. 

E=?Vi? 

k’talam' 

he  hilled  thevi  (in.) 

3  fem. 

fr-p 

k’talan' 

he  hilled  them  (  f.) 

7.  Verbs  having  e  in  the  Preterite  substitute  Tsere  for 

© 

Kamets  with  the  second  radical  throughout  the  Kal  pre 
terite  with  suffixes,  e.  g.  from  b~a. 

The  remaining  parts  of  the  verb  are  sufficiently  repre¬ 
sented  in  Table  VII. 


NOUNS,  GENDER  AND  NUMBER. 


45 


§  43. 


Vocabulary  11. 


ax  n.  m.  father 
■’iia?  n.  m.  Lord 
ox  n.  f.  mother 


na  n.  f.  daughter 
bia  v.  P.  to  make  great 
pan  v.  H.  to  overtake 
Dn  n.  m.  blood 


T*?n  n.  m.  Haman 
■*  ••  •  •  n.  m.  altar 
rvanbtt  n.  f.  war,  fighting 
159  v-  P-  to  shut  up  ’  H.  to 
cause  to  shut 
iso  y.  P.  to  recount ,  tell 
a’in  n.  m.  famine. 


Vocabulary  12. 


naa,'X  adv.  how 

n.  m.  man 
“®x  n.  f.  woman 
i-ona  n.  f.  blessing 
piBiai  n.  Damascus 
Sjit  n.  m.  f.  way 
pbn  v.  K.  to  go,  walk 
“lit  v.  K.  to  remember 
Y'in  r.  P.  to  deliver 
f|59  v.  P.  to  soil,  defile 
bcra  y.  H.  to  cause  to  rule 

-  T 

so  pray,  I  pray  thee 


iai  prep,  before,  in  the  pre¬ 
sence  of 

bay  n.  m.  suckling,  babe 

ids  y.  P.  to  crown 

D&B  v.  K.  to  take  off  clothes 

rna  n.  f.  trouble 

D?San  n.  f.  du.  feet 

Darin  adj.  merciful 

rrabffi  n.  f.  garment 

Da®  v.  H.  to  rise  early 

sis®  y.  K.  to  hear 

in  sn  v.  K.  to  lay  hold  of  ,  seize 1 


NOUNS. 

§  43.  Gender  and  Number. 

1.  Nouns  in  Hebrew  are  of  two  genders,  masculine 
and  feminine.  The  masculine  has  no  characteristic  ter¬ 
mination  ;  the  feminine  ends  in  rtT  or  n . 

2.  There  are  three  numbers,  the  singular,  dual,  and 
plural.  The  dual  is  restricted  for  the  most  part  to  the 


46 


ETYMOLOGY. 


44. 


names  of  objects  occurring  in  pairs.  It  ends  in  O'? .  in 
nouns  of  both  genders. 

3.  The  plural  of  masculine  nouns  ends  in  D\  ,  or  more 
rarely  ‘p .  ,  and  that  of  feminine  nouns  in  rri . 

4.  It  is  to  be  observed,  however,  that  a  number  of 
feminine  nouns  lack  the  characteristic  ending  in  the 
singular.  Also,  that  some  masculine  nouns  take  ni  in 
the  plural,  some  feminines  take  d\  ,  and  some  of  each 
gender  take  indifferently  O’1 .  or  ni . 


§  44.  Feminine ,  Dual ,  and  Plural. 

The  following  changes  result  from  appending  the  tei 
minations  for  gender  and  number. 


I.  The  feminine  ending  n . 

1.  If  the  ultimate  is  simple  there  is  no  change. 


masc. 

•*nsa 

•  •  • 

an  Egyptian, 

fern. 

rvnara 

•  •  • 

masc . 

•  •• 

second , 

fern. 

mi© 

•  •• 

nr 

•  t  : 

right , 

rv’sw 

•  t  : 

■'©■'b© 

•  •  : 

third, 

jv©*b® 

•  •  • 

• 

•'aas 

•  •  • 

• 

interior , 

nrbas 

•  •  : 

s&ia 

•• 

finding , 

nsiia 

2.  If  the  ultimate  is  mixed,  an  unaccented  Seghol  is 
inserted  before  the  termination  to  prevent  the  concur¬ 
rence  of  vowelless  consonants,  §  10.  3,  and  to  this  a  pre¬ 
ceding  a,  e  or  1  is  commonly  assimilated. 


maze. 

fern . 

masc. 

fem.. 

t  :  • 

broken, 

maw 

v  •*  :  • 

i  •  • 

a?© 

lying 

nab© 

••  •• 

•  • 

©boa 

▼  \  : 

triple, 

n©b©a 

••  ••  •  • 

"i3  “ia 

• 

speaking 

min© 

•  •••  mm  • 

•  •  • 

gathered, 

naapa 

large 

rrvis 

••  ••  — 

•  « 

reddish, 

nasals 

•  •  ••  •  mm  •• 

•  •  • 

©■'b© 

imverious 

JL 

nab® 

V  f  - 

shedding, 

n?B© 

b-©©a 

•  •  • 

• 

prudent 

nbsaa 

••  ••  •  m 

•  •  • 

3.  If  the  last  letter  be 
stituted  for  Seghol,  §  1 0.  3. 

a  guttural,  Pattahh 

is  sul> 

§  44.  FEMININE,  DUAL,  AND  PLURAL.  47 

yii©  friend ,  fem.  nyni©  y©©3  heard,  •  fern,  ny©B3 

513®  hearing ,  fem.  ny©©  y->a©  touching ,  fem.  nya© 

II.  The  feminine  nr ,  the  plural  D\  or  ni ,  and  the 
dual  0?. . 

1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  penult, 
except  from  nouns  in  n  . .  , 


biia 

T 

great, 

fem.  ntHna 
• 

pi.  crbiia 

f.  pi.  nib-ha 

naa 

-  T 

high , 

fem.  nhna 

pi.  oyaa 

f.  pi.  ninaa 

sans 

T 

written , 

fem.  narna 

pi.  Brians 

f.  pi.-  nianna 

restoring , 

fem.  nan©© 

t  •  ; 

pi.  D'd-’©© 

f.  pi.  niap©© 

THK 

master , 

pi.  ©-ina 

yb©  interpreter,  pi.  Q-yb© 

nin 

T  T 

%oord, 

pi.  cyan 

sib  heart. 

pi.  niaab 

T™T 

memorial , 

pi.  niiitar 

aiy  grape , 

pi.  n-'i:? 

fl?? 

wing, 

du.  ©“'tea 

•  _  t  ; 

ybs  W6, 

t  ••  7 

pi.  cyba 

2.  In  an  accented  mixed  ultimate 

(1)  Tsere  is  rejected  except  from  monosyllables,  or 
when  the  preceding  vowel  is  a  pretonic  Kamets.  Other 
vowels  suffer  no  change. 


?fbn 

going, 

fem.  roVn 

t  :  1 

pi.  D-pbn  f.  pi.  niabh 

shedding, 

fem.  nis© 

t  :  i 

pi.  nds©  f.  pi.  nias© 

judge, 

pi.  D“,t3B© 

nat©  altar ,  pi.  ninat© 

K>3 

priest, 

pi.  ohri'a 

b{?©  rod,  pi.  nibp© 

but 

nr? 

dead, 

fem.  nn© 

T  *• 

pi.  ny©  f.  pi.  nirra 

nb© 

•*  T 

complete, 

fem.  rvibb® 

t  ••  : 

pi.  n‘l©b©  f.  pi.  ni©b© 

••  T 

dry, 

fem.  noa? 

pi.  nyy  f.  pi.  ni©a;< 

r? 

tree, 

pi.  Q-dy 

D©  name,  pi.  ni©© 

ti? 

thigh, 

du.  yan? 

naa  heavy,  pi.  oyaa 

(2)  If  two 

consonants 

have  coalesced  in  the  final 

letter,  this  is  doubled,  and  the  preceding  vowel,  if  long. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


is  shortened.  A  like  doubling  occurs  in  a  few  instances 
where  there  has  been  no  contraction  in  the  form. 


pi.  a^sn 
pi.  o-'isn 


f.  pi.  min 
f.  pi.  man 


an  (from  ap)  much ,  fern,  nil 
an  (from  Ban)  perfect,  fern,  “isn 
lap  small ,  fern,  map  pi.  f.  pi.  nirtapp 

pay  deep,  fern,  njpy  pi.  o-’p'a?  f.  pi.  nip? 

P  (from  pa)  garden,  pi.  ap  pis  %vheel, 

T?  (from  Tjy)  goat,  pi. any  brin  bramble , 
pn  (from  ppn)  statute ,  pi.  apn  ab  (from  aab)  heart,  pi.  rrab 
ps  (for  p:s)  nose,  du.  Bps  1©  (from  po)  tooth,  pi.  apo 


pi.  apsis 
pi.  a-'bnn 


3.  Nouns  having  an  unaccented  vowel  in  the  ulti¬ 
mate,  commonly  called  Segholates,  §  10.  3,  drop  this 
vowel  before  the  feminine  ending  n T ;  in  the  plural 
pretonic  Kamets'  i i  inserted,  §  10.  2,  and  the  vowel  of 
the  first  radical  falls  away ;  the  dual  sometimes  drops 
the  unaccented  Seghol  and  sometimes  inserts  pretonic 
Kamets. 


king, 

fern. 

nib© 

t  :  - 

queen , 

pi. 

a^ibia 

•  t  ; 

kings 

nrb 

••  •• 

covert , 

fem. 

nino 

»  T  :  • 

pi. 

D^no 

•  t  : 

b?y 

calf, 

fern. 

n??y 

■  •  • 

pi. 

a^b:>y 

•  T  *• 

n©  s 

••  00 

saying, 

fem. 

nirs 

t  :  • 

or  rriEtf 

am  •  mm 

•00 

pi. 

•  T  T 

aay 

strength, 

fem. 

rvaay 

t  :  t 

pi. 

©■>©ay 

•  ▼  t: 

byi 

lord, 

fem. 

nbya 

t  i- 

lady, 

pi. 

Q-'bya 

•  r  : 

lords . 

• 

bii 

••  •• 

•  0 

foot, 

du. 

a^bai 

• 

ps  ear, 

du. 

•  -  :  t 

•pi 

"00 

knee, 

du. 

B'iia 

• 

pp  horn, 

du. 

o?pp  or  a?  Pi? 

a.  Medial  Vav  frequently  quiesces  in  Hholem  and  Yodh  in  Tsere  before  ths 
dual  and  plural  endings. 

tri  death,  pi.  rPT  olive  tree.  pL  o^rnt 

•px  iniquity ,  pi.  D^ilK  ^5  eye,  du. 


45. 


FEMININE,  DUAL,  AND  PLUItAL. 


49 


4.  In  a  simple  ultimate 


(1) 

nr  is  rejected. 

nsi 

V  T 

•  t  n 

fair,  fem.  na? 

pi.  mp? 

f.  pi.  n*®? 

ncy 

doing,  fem.  ncy 

pi.  D-'xby 

f.  pi.  nicy 

ncyc 

v  ■:  r 

work,  pi.  n^ira^ia 

n:p  reed, 

pi  nil? 

HaiC 

appearance ,  pi.  nbnn 

nhc  field, 

pi.  nihc 

nrrra 

••  ••  i— 

•  •  1 

camp,  'du.  nine 

njn  seer , 

pi.  nih 

(2) 

.  becomes  fp  ,  d1’*  . 

or  d\  ,  ni\ . 

"he  fresh ,  fem.  nHt?  pi.  ninn  f.  pi.  tfUTJ 

by  afflicted ,  fem.  nbsj  pi.  ni:?  f.  pi.  nihy 

"’’bay  Hebrew ,  fem.  rh-iay  pi.  □■’Hay  or  ffnay  f.  pi.  nvnay 

*•»  island ,  pi.  nyx  “'nebs  Philistine ,  pi.  D'ricbs 


45.  In  Feminine  Nouns. 


1.  Feminine  nouns  in  nr  of  the  form  derived  from 
Segholates,  §  44.  3,  insert  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural, 
and  drop  their  original  vowel;  all  others  simply  substi¬ 
tute  the  plural  for  the  singular  ending. 


nabc  queen,  pi.  niabc 

rnno  covert,  pi.  ninno 

ns-in  reproach,  pi.  nisnn 

rnrx  saying ,  pi.  nin'ai!: 

na-in  desert,  pi.  niann 

nbya  lady,  pi.  nibya 


nine?  salvation,  pi.  nijnnh 
nana  blessing,  pi.  niana 
ni?i?3  vengeance,  pi.  tni^apa 
niy  counsel,  pi.  niiy 
garden,  pi.  nib 
nbx  ship,  pi.  nibx 


2.  Feminine  nouns  in  n .  (or  n_)  substitute  the  plural 
for  the  singular  ending,  and  reject  the  preceding  vowel,  if 
it  be  Hholem  or  derived  from  Tsere ;  otherwise  they  restore 
it  to  Avhat  it  would  have  been,  if  n  had  not  been  appended, 
§  44. 1.  2.  Nouns  in  n\  take  nv>,  and  nouns  in  nn  take  nr\  . 


60 


ETYMOLOGY. 


46. 


rvrbtia 

•«•••• 

•  •  • 

(from 

naira) 

observance, 

pi. 

rrinaca 

t  :  • 

nbaxxj 

(from 

baxa) 

r  t~  / 

knife , 

pi. 

nibaaa 

t  i- 

manans 

•  •  ••  •  mm  •• 

•  •  •  • 

(from 

anans) 

reddish, 

pi. 

nianany 

•  • 

(from 

Pina) 

nurse , 

pi. 

nipra 

nyata 

(from 

ya-o) 

ring , 

pi. 

niyaa 

1  — 

n?ib 

(from 

??3) 

touching , 

pi. 

niya: 

:  i 

npS'p 

(from 

m 

sucker, 

pi. 

rrippi^ 

sing. 

nbiiba  shill, 
•  •  •.  / 


pi. 

rivayia 


n:ro  tunic . 

•  \  ' 

riba©  ear  of 


pi.  sing. 

nibaba  mayha  Moabitess , 
tiro  mnapa  Egyptian  woman,  nis'isa 
corn,  D-oao  maba  kingdom,  rrraba 


8.  Before  tile  dual  ending  nr  becomes  n, ;  and  nouns 
in  nr  follow  the  rule  of  other  Segliolates,  §  44.  II.  3. 


n:« 
-▼  ▼ 


thigh, 

du.  n^nani 

•  -  t  :  - 

nbn 

•  •  •• 

•  • 

folding-door,  du.  n^nbn 

lip, 

du.  E^nsir 

nbiy 

sloth,  du.  Dunbar 

year, 

du.  n“n:tD 
*  "  ▼  • 

turn  a 

••  • 

•  • 

brass,  du.  n^ncn: 

7  ‘-si* 

•> 

'  Y  OCABULAEY 

13. 

n.  in.  f. 

a  stone 

v.  K.  to  reign 

Diny  n.  m.  Edom 
“ya  n.  f.  a  well  t 
■jiyaa  n.  Gibeon 
bina  adj.  great,  large 
■>ia  n.  in.  nation 
cnn  adj.  new 
nab  v.  K.  to  capture 


n.  (with  art.)  Ai 
Ty  n.  f.  city 

an  adj.  (nan)  much,  many 
nan  n.  f.  evil 

T  ▼ 

rfyo  v.  H.  to  cast 

n:yn  n.  f.  (n-'asn )  fig-  tree,  fid 


46.  Coristruct  State.  * 


7- 


^  V  '7  -9  • 

1.  "When  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  dependence 


/ 


on  another,  the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state.  A 

'  .  ;  •  -  t.  '  dfiypt  *A-4-lr*L  cl  a-u  pr  hij  l 

••  ■  •  ..  j’-te  d.  •  <+*if  .1,',  A 

4  /  •  *  _ _  _ _ 


§47.  FORMATION  OF  THE  CONSTRUCT.  51 

noun  which  is  not  so  related  to  a  following  one.  is  said 
to  be  in  the  absolute  state.  Thus  “Q?  word  is  in  the  ab¬ 
solute  state  ;  but  in  the  expression  ?bi£n  ~\yn  the  word  oj 
the  Icing ,  "O?  is  in  the  construct  state. 

2.  The  construct  is  a  shortened  form,  the  speaker 
naturally  hastening  forward  from  the  first  noun  to  the 
second,  which  is  necessary  to  complete  the  idea. 


Its  Formation. 


The  following  changes  occur  in  the  formation  of  the 
construct : 

1.  The  feminine  n r  becomes  ta_;  the  dual  0?_  and  the 
plural  D-1 ,  become  ..  . 


it?  a  garden ,  const,  rasa 
•abba  queen,  const,  tabba 
saba?  calf,  const,  riba? 
nb?a  lady ,  const,  rib?? 


cpn  statutes,  const, 

D'EBaf  judges,  const,  ■'taaic 

D^baa  feet,  const,  “'ban 

D">aTX  ears ,  const,  ‘•dtsc 

•  -  :  t  7  ••  :  t 


2.  In  a  mixed  ultimate  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh ; 
so  is  Tsere  when  preceded  by  pretonic  Kamets. 


absol. 

const 

absol. 

\ 

const. 

OT 

T 

fish, 

OT 

IP? 

old, 

iP.i 

abas 

T 

star, 

niis 

ahn 

••  r 

court, 

nin 

Capa 

sanctuary, 

nis 

••  T 

heavy , 

nis  or  nab 

-  •  v  ■; 

3.  Medial  a  commonly  quiesces  in  Hliolem  and  a  in 
Tsere  ;  final  a .  becomes  "* . . 

raaa  death,  const,  raaa  R‘a  valley ,  const, 

?an  midst,  const.  spn  laab  house,  const,  rna 

naateja  cups,  const,  taiicja  nib  ^fountains,  const,  rrir? 

but  ‘ja?  iniquity,  const,  ’ja?  ''la  life,  const.  ,,n 


52  ETYMOLOGY.  §  48 

4.  In  a  simple  ultimate  n  t  becomes  n  _ ;  other  vowels 
remain  unchanged. 

“to  sheep ,  const,  nto  sails  going  forth,  const.  ssia 

n?b  shepherd ',  const.  nin  sna  host ,  const,  sis 

nipo  cattle ,  const,  nips)  si?  fearing ,  const,  si? 

near  work ,  const.  ritepia  *>n3  fruit ,  const,  ■’is 

5.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  syllable 
preceding  the  accent ;  and  if  this  occasions  a  concurrence 
of  vowelless  consonants,  a  short  vowel  is  inserted  between 
them,  §  10.  1. 


absol. 

const . 

absol. 

const. 

pns 

master, 

nana 

t  t  : 

blessing, 

nana 

TH|T 

memorial, 

TiT?T 

niapa 

t  Jt  : 

vengeance, 

niaps 

nan 

▼  T 

word, 

OB  • 

• 

n  in  sis 

•  -  t  : 

lips, 

YlS© 

..  .  . 

15? 

cloud, 

w 

caba 

•  t  : 

kings , 

■oba 

reed,  * 

n:p 

••  >: 

nisnn 

t  •: 

reproaches , 

nisnn 

•  •  • 

•  • 

interpreter, 

niina 

t  : 

threshing  floors, 

niina 

:  t 

nab 

T  *• 

heart, 

nab 

• 

nisina 

••  • 

• 

beasts , 

nbona 

See  Table  XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns. 


Vocabulary  14. 

nbos  n.  Amanah  “®y  n.  m.  (ni)  dust 

■jn  int.  lo !  behold!  “Toy  n.  m.  Esau. 

nnu  v.  K.  to  be  clean ,  pure  a  sis  n.  Pharpar 

5|3|  n.  f.  wing  bip  n.  m.  (ni)  voice,  sound 

2TO  n.  m.  cherub  ]bp ,  pop  adj.  (nsop)  little% 

bz'q  v.  K.  to  small 

nnj  n.  m.  (a1 .  and  ni)  rw;<?r 

i  \ 

§  48.  Paragogic  Vowels. 

1.  The  unaccented  vowel  n  t  added  to  nouns  indicates 
motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  whence  it  is  called 


49. 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


53 


He  directive  or  He  local,  D‘a©  heaven ,  na^a©  heaven 
ward. 

2.  Paragogic  ,  i ,  or  n,  are  in  poetic  or  archoeic 
forms  sometimes  appended  to  nouns  without  affecting  the 
sense,  e.  g.  ‘aa  ,  Gen.  xlix.  11  for  l? ,  tph  Gen.  i.  24  for 
trn,  nnincr'  Ps.  iii.  3  for  nyw? . 

/  T  T  J  ▼  • 


Nouns  with  Suffixes,  see  Table  XVIII. 


1.  The  pronominal  suffixes  are  appended  to  nouns  in 
the  sense  of  possessive  pronouns. 

2.  The  forms  which  they  assume  when  attached  to 

singular  nouns  or  combined  with  ">  _  of  nouns  in  the  dual 
and  plural  are  shown  in  Table  V.  >  <--  ■ 

■  I.  Before  the  grave  suffixes  (viz. :  as  ,  fa ,  on  ,  fn), 
Nouns  of  both  genders  and  of  all  numbers  take  the 
form  of  the  construct. 


“4'?  word, , 

words , 
Donate  Ups , 
ninsia  Ups, 
nina  blessing, 

niana  blessings, 


const, 

const,  ’’■nan 

••  :  • 

const.  ‘’ha© 

••  •  • 

const,  nirato 

•  • 

const,  naia 
-  :  • 

const,  niana 
•  • 


suffix . 

aanaT  your  word 
Qa'Ha'7  your  words 
naans©  your  lips 
naanns©  your  lips 
nanana  your  blessing 
naanana  your  blessings. 


II.  Before  the  light  suffixes, 

1.  Singular  or  plural  nouns  with  a  feminine  ending 
adopt  the  construct  form,  only  n.  is  changed  to  n t. 


naba  gueen,  const,  naba 
niaba  queens,  const,  niaba 
“ana  blessing,  const,  nana 
niana  blessings ,  const,  niana 


suf.  ‘’Saba  my  queen 
suf.  ’’in aba  my  queens 
suf.  ''Sana  my  blessing 
suf.  ■|nana  my  blessings. 


2.  Singular  or  plural  nouns  not  having  a  feminine 


ETYMOLOGY. 


ending  adopt  the  same  form  as  before  the  absolute  plural 
termination. 


plur. 

nn'5  heart,  D“aab 
"Oi  word,  n^an 

T  T  7  •  T  ; 

tiste  judge ,  O'1  teste 
?jba  king,  nteba 


suf. 

**32b  *  my  heart , 
“ins'!  my  word, 
“’teste  my  judge, 


“’32b  my  hearts 
“nT:  my  words 
“’teste  my  judges 
“teb'a  my  kings. 


*  The  resemblance  to  the  plural  form  does  not  imply  that  the  word  is  plural, 
but  simply  that  appending  the  suffix  produces  the  same  effect  upon  the  voweli 
and  syllables  of  the  word  as  the  addition  of  the  plural  ending. 


3.  Dual  nouns  retain  the  form  which  they  ha.ve  before 
the  absolute  dual  termination. 


suf  suf. 

0“,ip  hands,  “H?  my  hands,  D^iTS  ears,  *'?ts  my  ears 
c^brn  feet,  “’byn  my  feet,  n?teste  lips,  “’teste  my  lips. 


III.  Before  all  suffixes,  grave  or  light, 

1.  Segholate  nouns  in  the  singular  drop  their  unac¬ 
cented  vowel,  as  before  the  feminine  ending  n  t. 


•fbte 

king 

suf. 

“teba  my  king, 

D23btt 

•  •  •  •  mm 
•  •  • 

your  king 

in  6 

covert 

“’tepp  my  covert , 

oinno 

••  •  •  • 

•  •  • 

your  covert 

cste 

strength 

“’tery  my  strength, 

oiayy 

t»  •  •  T 

•  •  •  ■ 

your  strength 

bys 

'work 

“’bys  my  work, 

osbys 

▼  it 

your  work 

nnteteK  observance  “’tenptep  my  observ., 

nirnatea  your  observ. 

pins 

\ 

tunic 

*’p:p 3  my  tunic , 

D3PDP3 

•  •  •  •  T  • 

•  •  •  ■  \ 

your  tunic. 

2.  Final  letters  which  are  doubled  in  the  plural,  or  in 
which  two  consonants  have  coalesced,  are  doubled. 


plur. 

Suf. 

‘3  garden 

cia 

“’33 

my  garden, 

0233 

•  •  •  mm 

•  • 

your  garden 

3b  heart 

piab 

• 

*’3b 

•  • 

my  heart, 

D22b 

••  •  • 

•  • 

your  heart 

■jsis  wheel 

crisis 

•  “ 

:  my  wheel, 

obssix 

•  •  •  mm 

•  • 

your  wheel 

ph  statute 

n-pn 

f-  \ 

my  statute ,  but  Dbprj 

your  statute 

[§  13-  5- 


50. 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 


55 


3.  Final  <\  is  dropped. 


flip  shepherd  suf.  “’ip  my  shepherd , 
nbj?e  cattle  suf.  "’bjp'a  my  cattle , 
nee  rod  suf.  “’tae  my  rod , 


qjp  thy  shepherd 
T12J5D  thy  cattle 
?|t3Ta  thy  rod 


Vocabulary  15. 


nas  v.  P.  to  destroy 

nnx  adj.  one 

nns  prep,  after 

os  n.  m.  f .  fire 

nbcs  n.  f.  (o'1,  and  ni)  pillar 

nan  n.  m.  word 

yiT  n.  m.  seed 


v.  K.  to  fall,  fail 
CB?  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  soul ,  life 
ro?  v.p.  to  demolish 
nay  v.  K.  to  serve 
v.  K.  to  burn 

nae  v.  P.  to  break  in  pieces 
dc  adv.  there 

T 

DC  n.  m.  (ni)  name 


Dab  n.  m.  (ni)  heart 
naae  n.  f.  statue 

§  50.  Irregxdar  Nouns. 


1.  The  following  nouns  of  frequent  occurrence  are 
irregular  in  the  plural : — 

plur.  DnoJS  rarely  D^iins 


B’X  man 

nos  woman ,  const,  nek 
nrs  maid-servant 
n?a  house 
ia  son 

na  daughter ,  suf.  “ina 
dP  day 
"py  city 
esn  head 


plur. 

•  r 

plur. 

nines 

t  *: 

plur. 

D^na 

•  T 

plur. 

nPa 

•  T 

plur. 

ni:a 

T 

plur. 

•  T 

rarely  nio? 

plur. 

D*ny 

•  T 

once  D,,n‘’? 

*  T  ™S 

plur. 

ff’CSl 

*  t 

2.  The  nouns  as  father ,  ns  brother ,  and  me  mouttx 
take  the  vowel  V  in  the  construct  and  before  suffixes^ 
e.  g.  const,  “’as  ,  suf.  ■’as  ,  spas  . 


56 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Imperfect  Verbs. 


9 


Imperfect  verbs  depart  more  or  less  from  the  standard 
inflection,  as  the  nature  of  their  radicals  may  require. 
They  are  of  three  classes,  viz. : — 


I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttural 
letter  in  the  root. 

r  * 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

III. *  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel-letter  in  the  root. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  guttural  verbs : — 

1.  Pe  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  a 
guttural. 

2.  A  yin  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

3.  Lamedh  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radi¬ 
cal  is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs : — • 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun. 

2.  Ayin  Doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  alike. 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs  : — 

1.  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Yodh. 

2.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Vav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Alepli  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Lamedh  He  verbs,  or  those  in  which  He  takes  the 
place  of  the  third  radical. 

These  names,  like  those  of  the  verbal  species,  §  31,  are 
derived  from  the  verb  to  do  j  a  Pe  Guttural  verb  is 


PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS. 


57 


§§  52,  53. 

one  which  has  a  guttural  in  that  place  which  Pe  occupies 
in  bys ,  that  is,  as  its  first  radical ;  and  so  with  the  rest. 


§  52.  Guttural  Verbs. 

Gutturals  have  the  following  peculiarities : — 

1.  They  prefer  the  vowel  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  preference  to  simple  Sh’va. 

4.  They  do  not  admit  Daghesh-forte. 

Eesh  shares  the  last  peculiarity,  but  partakes  of  the 
others  only  in  a  very  limited  degree. 


§  53.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs ,  see  Table  VIII. 

1.  Hhirik  of  the  letters  prefixed  to  the  root  is  changed 
to  Pattahh  or  Seghol;  to  the  latter  chiefly  in  those 
parts  or  tenses  in  which  the  second  radical  has  prevail¬ 
ingly  a. 

2.  For  simple  Sh’va  the  guttural  takes  compound,  either 
Hhateph-Pattahh,  or  a  Hhateph  conformed  to  the  pre¬ 
ceding  short  vowel.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  com¬ 
pound  Sh’va  becomes  a  short  vowel  in  an  intermediate 
syllable. 

3.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative  Niphal,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is 
lengthened  to  Tsere. 

4.  A  few  verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  K,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future,  the  second 
vowel  being  Pattahh  or  Tsere.  This  is  called  the  Pe 

Aleph  (  S3 )  mode  of  inflection. 

3* 


58 


ETYMOLOGY". 


54. 


t 

Vocabulary  16. 


ins  or  ins  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to 

love 

nnx  *  n.  m.  a  man ,  each 
bis  v.  K.  (  SDj  to  eat ,  H.  to 
cause  to  eat 
bx  n.  m.  God 
m  v.  N.  to  be  verified, found 
true 

“ias  v.  N.  (ss)  to  be  said 

■Ji  n.  m.  (Dn??)  son 


tjsn  y.  K.  to  turn ,  N.  to  be 

turned 

pin  y.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be 

strong 

IP  n.  m.  manna 

“ni  n.  m.  servant 

ib  v.K.  to  leave,  forsake 

Tn:?  y.  K.  to  stand 

D2?  n.  f.  (d\  and  ni)  bone 

nbbp  n.  f.  a  curse. 

t  t  »: 


*  is  the  common  word  for  an  individual  man ;  ttji’ax  is  poetic;  is  a 

generic  term,  denoting  man  generally,  and  is  also  the  name  of  the  first  of  the 
human  race. 


§  54.  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  see  Table  IX. 

1.  The  vowel  following  the  guttural  is  converted  into 
Pattalih  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 

species. 

2.  When  the  second  radical  should  receive  simple 
Sh’va,  it  takes  Hhateph-Pattahh  instead ;  and  to  this  the 
new  vowel  formed  from  Sh’va  in  the  feminine  singular 
and  masculine  plural  of  the  imperative  is  assimilated. 

3.  Daghesli -forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  vowel  may  remain  short  in  an  intermediate 
syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere,  Pattahh 
to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts  to  Hholem. 


§55. 


LAMEDH  GUTTURAL  VERBS. 


59 


Vocabulary  17. 


v.  K.  P.  to  bless,  N.  Pu. 
to  be  blessed 

bio  v.  K.  to  redeem ,  P.  to 

-T  7 

defile 


bit!  5  n.  m.  benefit 
ttna  v.  P.  to  drive  out 

—  r 

"ifro  v.  P.  to  purif  y,  cleanse , 
1ST.  to  be  purified 


8  55.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  see  Table  X. 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes  Pat- 
tahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the  femi¬ 
nine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 

species. 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical  may  either  be 
changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the  latter  case,  the 

guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  Hhirik,  Hholem  (of  the  infinitive),  and  Shurek 
suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural,  which  leceives 
a  Pattahh-furtive. 

4.  The  guttural  retains  the  simple  Sh’va  of  the  perfect 
verb  before  personal  terminations  beginning  with  a  con¬ 
sonant,  though  compound  Sh’va  is  used  before  suffixes. 

'  5.  When,  however,  a  personal  affix  consists  of  a  single 
vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  singular  of  the 
preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh-furtive. 


Vocabulary  18. 


n.  m.  lord,  master 
TN  adv.  then 

T 


rps  n.  f.  ear 

tvT  n.  m.  olive-tree ,  olive 


v.  K.  to  sow 
tn  n  adj.  deaf 

;  v.  P.  H.  to  weary,  caus6 
to  toil 


60 


ETYMOLOGY. 


n.  f.  kingdom, 
ybia  v.  N.  to  be  withheld 

-  T 

“ny  adj.  blind 
1??  n.  f.  eye 
7?  n.  m.  tree 


§56 

npss  v.  N.  to  be  opened,  used 
specially  of  the  eyes 
tins  v.  N.  to  be  opened 
nS©  v.  K.  to  send 
Tyeto  adv.  thither. 


§  56.  JPe  Nun  (3t)  Verbs,  see  Table  XI. 

N un,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs,  has  two  peculiarities, 
viz. : — 

1.  At  the  end  of  syllables  it  is  commonly  assimilated 
to  the  following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written 
as  one,  and  the  doubling  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  In 
the  Hophal  Kamets-Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuts  before  the 
doubled  letter. 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
dropped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  at  the  beginning  of  a 
syllable  when  it  is  without  a  vowel.  A  like  rejection 
occurs  in  the  Kal  infinitive  construct  of  a  few  verbs,  the 
abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compensated  by  adding 
the  feminine  termination  n. 

■jro  assimilates  its  last  as  well  as  its  first  radical. 

njsb  has  the  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs. 


VoCABULAKY  19. 


nina  n.  f.  sister 

vy*}  n.  m.  honey 

D'wn  n.  m.  pi.  life 

■’sn  n.  m.  (“’sn)  half 

Jrhb ,  rrsb  for  what  f  why ? 

"icen  n.  m.  instruction 


rnib  n.  m.  death  ■  ) 

*03  v.  Ii.  to  tell ,  Ho.  to  be  told 

-r  7 

cio  v.  K.  N.  to  approach 
miip  n.  f.  incense 

#  w  a 

D^rn  n.  m.  pi.  mercies ,  com 
passions. 


§67. 


AYIN  ^DOUBLED  VERBS. 


61 


§  57.  A  yin  Doubled  (Jfo')  Verbs,  see  Table  XII. 

1.  In  the  Kal,  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal  the  repeti¬ 
tion  of  the  same  sound  is  avoided  by  uniting  the  two 
similar  radicals  and  giving  the  intervening  vowel  to  the 

previous  letter,  thus :  for  aao  ■>  • 

2.  In  the  Kal  this  contraction  is  optional  in  the  pret¬ 
erite  ;  it  is  rare  in  the  infinitive  absolute  though  usual  in 
the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  participles. 
With  these  exceptions  it  is  universal  in  the  species  already 

named. 

3.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both  in 
the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the  pre 
ceding  syllable. 

(1)  When  the  first  radical  has  a  vowel  (pretonic 
Kamets)  this  is  simply  displaced  by  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical,  ano  ,  3? ;  ^asri ,  3i6n . 

(2)  When  the  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable,  this 
will  become  simple  upon  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  from 
the  second  radical  to  the  first.  Then  a  Daghesh-forte 
may  be  given  to  the  first  radical  in  order  to  preserve  the 
preceding  short  vowel,  or  the  preformative  may  take  the 
simplest  of  the  long  vowels  ci,  or  its  previous  vowel  may 
be  lengthened  from  Ilhirik  to  TLsere,  Pattahh  to  Kamets, 
and  Kamets-Hhatuph  to  Shurek,  thus:  330^  becomes 
ac1?  or  ao? ,  and  ■vyo1?  ^ . 

(3)  The  vowel,  which  has  been  thrown  back,  is  com¬ 

pressed  as  vowels  usually  are  before  two  consonants. 
Thus  in  the  Niphal  future  and  imperative,  J 

aacn ,  non  (comp,  biop ,  nbtoj?) ;  in  the  Hiphil,  , 

aon  (comp.  ,  nabopn). 

_  4.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second  and 
third  radicals  have  been  contracted,  represents  two  con- 


ETYMOLOGY. 


sonants,  the  doubling  cannot  be  made  to  appear  at  the 
end  of  a  word.  But, 

(1)  When  in  the  course  of  inflection  a  vowel  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  preceding 
vowel,  even  where  it  would  be  dropped  in  perfect  verbs, 
is  retained  to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre¬ 
serves  its  accent,  §  17.  2.  b,  nab  ,  'fib;1 . 

(2)  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
begins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is  aided  by  inserting  0  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e 
(\.)  in  the  future.  By  the  dissyllabic  appendage  thus 
formed  the  accent  is  carried  forward,  and  the  previous 
part  of  the  word  is  shortened  in  consequence  as  much  as 
possible,  sen,  mien;  no?,  nation . 

(3)  When,  by  the  operation  of  a  rule  already  given, 
the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplication  of 
the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to  relieve 
the  word  of  too  many  doubled  letters,  toCf1. ,  n:nbn . 

5.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  preserve 
the  perfect  forms,  sometimes  reduplicate  the  contracted 
root,  as  ^bao ,  bpbj^nn  ,  and  sometimes  give  up  the  redup¬ 
lication  altogether  and  insert  the  long  vowel  Hholem 
after  the  first  radical,  aiio ,  bbann . 

6.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  futures,  when  the  penult  is  a 
simple  syllable,  the  accent  is  drawn  back  by  Yav  Con- 
versive  and  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  shortened,  ab? , 

I  • 


Vocabulary  20. 

ax  conj.  if  baa  n.  m.  Baal ,  lord 

*ns  v.  K.  to  curse  ;  Ho.  to  boa  v.  K.  to  roll 

be  cursed  ppy  v.  H.  to  crush,  pulverize 


PE  YODH  VERBS. 


bHn  v  H.  to  begin 
rrrrp  n.  m.  Judali 
■'■p.pp  n.  m.  a  Jew 
rrufla  n.  f.  cave 

t  r  i 


33D  v.  K.  surround 

•is  n.  m.  (const.  ns)  mouth 

D\is  n.  m.  pi  .face. 


§  58.  Pe  Yodh  ( “|B )  Verbs ,  see  Table  XIV. 

1.  The  first  radical  is  mostly  Yodh  at  the  beginning, 
and  Vav  at  the  close,  of  a  syllable. 

2. r  In  the  Kal  future,  if  Yodh  be  retained  it  will  quiesce 
in  and  prolong  the  previous  Hhirik,  and  the  second  radi¬ 
cal  will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  ffiny ;  if  the  first  radical  be 
rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly  lengthened  to 
Tsere,  “ip? ,  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syllable  being 
sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond  with  it,  ; 
in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is  preserved  by  giving  Daghesh- 
forte  to  the  second  radical  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs,  ns? ,  pip . 

3.  Those  verbs  which  reject  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con¬ 
struct,  the  infinitive  being  prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs 
by  the  feminine  termination. 

4.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  Yav  quiesces 
in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Ilholem;  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled,  it  retains  its 
consonantal  character. 

5.  In  the  Hiphil,  Vav  quiesces  in  Hholem ;  a  few  verbs 
have  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  ^trn,  ;  more  rarely 
still  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the  preceding  short 
vowel  is  preserved  by  doubling  the  second  radical, 

6.  In  the  Hophal,  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek ;  occasionally 

the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh  inserted  in  the 
second  radical,  3k ^ .  : 


64  ETYMOLOGY.  §  59 

7.  In  the  Hithpael  the  first  radical  is  commonly  Yodh. 
but  a  few  verbs  have  Vav. 

!j?n  follows  the  analogy  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs. 


VoCABULAKY  21. 


-"5?  n.  m.  tent 
Dxnx  n.  m.  Ahab 

t  :  - 

adv.  where? 
v.  H.  to  cause  to  go, 
lead 

rri*>  v.  K.  to  be  dry 

••  T  %J 


3h?  v.  H.  to  cause  to  Tcnoio , 
let  know 

©p?  v.  H.  to  drive  out 
S53  n.  m.  (ni)  throne 
lp“ra  n.  m.  wilderness 
deed  n.  m.  judgment. 


§  59.  Ayin  Vav  (fy)  and  Ayin  Yodh  ( ^9 )  Verbs, 

see  Table  XIII. 

1.  The  quiescent  may  be  rejected  and  its  vowel  given 
to  the  preceding  radical.  So  in  the  Kal  preterite :  Dp 
for  Dip ,  where  d  is  in  partial  compensation  for  the  con 
traction,  rvb  for  hid.  Active  participle  Dp  for  Dip,  rra 
for  nils ,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  superseded 
by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative.  Hiphil  and  Ho- 
phal:  oipn  for  n-npn,  Dip?  for  Blip?,  opin  for  oipn, 
the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  prolonged  in  a  simple 
syllable. 

2.  Or  it  may  be  converted  into  its  homogeneous  vowel 
u  or  i,  Dip,  Dip;  Dipi ,  Dipi,  the  prefix  usually  taking 
the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  d‘  u  combined  with  a 
preceding  or  accompanying  a  forms  d,  Kal  abs.  infin.  Dip 
=kdum,  Niphal  oipD  for  Dips . 

3.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Xiphal  and 
Hiphil  preterites,  o  (i)  is  inserted  before  the  afiixed  termi¬ 
nations,  and  sometimes  e  (\)  in  the  feminine  plurals  of 


LAMEDH  ALEPH  YEEBS. 


65 


§60. 

the  Kal  future.  In  the  Niphal  preterite,  when  the  in¬ 
serted  i  receives  the  accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  euphony 
changed  to  *i. 

4.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  species  the  apocopated  future 
takes  o  and  e  in  distinction  from  the  ordinary  future, 
which  has  u  and  i,  atp  ,  atP .  With  Vav  Conversive  the 
accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the  vowel 
of  the  last  syllable  is  shortened,  a©*] ,  a©»i . 

5.  (1)  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  the  form  of  per¬ 
fect  verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  appearing 
as  i ,  e.  g.  “!•!? ,  or  as  ^ ,  e.  g.  a  *p . 

(2)  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  reduplicated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Pi.  ©nip , 
Pu.  nnip,  Hith.  D'biprn . 

(2)  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the 
root,  and  the  resulting  biliteral  is  reduplicated,  Pi.  bibs  > 

Pu.  bsbs . 

•  * 

VOCABULAEY  22. 

n.  f.  ground,  land  “ip?  n.  m.  young  man 
p!*  adv.  where  f  only  after  "Dp  v.  K.  to  bury  •  N.  to  be 

pa ,  psn  whence  f  buried 

rax  adv.  whither  t  frapp  n.  f.  former  state 

aia  v.  K.  (fut.  sia?)  to  come /  a'p  v.  K.  to  arise 

H.  to  cause  to  come ,  bring  api  v.  K.  to  contend 

p?n  Hith.  to  go  for  one's  ar©  v.  K.  to  return  j  H.  to 

self  go  about  cause  to  return ,  bring 

pb  v.  K.  to  lodge  back 

mn  v.  K.  to  die ;  H.  to  put  sans©  n.  f.  handmaid. 

to  death 

§  60.  Lamedh  Aleph  (  tfb )  Verbs,  see  Table  X\b 

I.  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains  its  con- 


66 


ETYMOLOGY. 


sonantal  character  only  when  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in  the 
preceding  vowel,  and  if  this  be  Pattahh,  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets;  so  always  in  the  Kal  future  and  imperative, 
where  8  as  a  guttural  requires  a,  xia?  for  . 

3.  Before  syllabic  affixes  x  quiesces  in  Kamets  in  the 
Kal  preterite  nxia ,  except  in  those  words  which  have 
Tsere  as  their  proper  vowel,  rso? .  In  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  it  quiesces  in  Tsere,  and  in  all 
futures  and  imperatives  in  Seghol. 


Vocabulary  23. 

"nx  n.  Ur  xia  v.  K.  to  find 

xna  v.  K.  to  create  sna  n.  f.  Mara  ( bitter ) 

nine  adj.  clean,  pure  “W3  n.  f.  Naomi  {sweet') 

si?  v.  K.  to  go  out ;  H.  to  "lb?  n.  m.  Eli 
bring  out  xnj?  v.  K.  to  call 

D *h®3  n.  m.  pi.  Chaldees  n.  m.  pi.  troughs 

3b  n.  m.  (rnab)  heart  v.  Iv.  to  run 

xb»  v.  K.  to  be  full ;  N.  to  3?©  v.  K.  to  lie  down 
be  filled;  P.  to  fill  bxro©  n.  m.  Samuel 


§  61.  Lamedh  He  (  rfb  )  Verbs,  see  Table  XVI. 

1.  The  third  radical  which  is  Yodh  or  Vav,  does  not 
appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  except  in  the  Kal  passive 
participle  ’’aba  ;  in  all  other  cases  it  is  re j  ected  or  softened, 
the  resulting  vowel  termination  being  usually  expressed 
by  the  letter  n . 

The  various  preterites  end  in  <"It. 

The  futures  and  participles  in  <%. 


LAMEDH  HE  VERBS. 


67 


§61. 

The  imperatives  in  n.. 

The  absolute  infinitives  in  n'  or  M  . 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  ending  Mi . 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the 
last  radical  (though  occasionally  retained  in  prolonged 
and  pausal  forms  Ten),  is  commonly  rejected,  and  its 
vowel  given  to  the  antecedent  consonant,  $3  for  Tba . 

3.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  radical  *■  remains  and  quiesces  in  either  Hhirik  or 
Tsere  in  the  preterites  and  in  Seghol  in  the  futures  and 
imperatives. 

4.  The  third  person  feminine  of  the  preterites  retains 
the  primary  characteristic  Mt,  M&P,  which  is  commonly 
softened  by  an  appended  Mt,  nnba . 

5.  Forms  not  augmented  by  personal  endings  lose  their 
final  vowel,  before  suffixes,  e.  g.  "cba  ,  ^ba  from  Mba  .  The 
preterite  3  fern,  takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  Tin's  a  or  "Mba  . 

6.  The  final  vowel  Mv  is  rejected  from  the  futures 
when  apocopated,  or  when  preceded  by  Vav  Conversive, 
e.  g.  bi"1 ,  bay  from  Mba"1 .  The  concurrence  of  final  con¬ 
sonants  thence  resulting  in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  is  com¬ 
monly  relieved  by  inserting  an  unaccented  Seghol  between 
them,  Kal,  ba?  or  bad  from  Mba? ;  Hiph.  ba? ,  ba*?  from  Mba? . 

7.  The  final  vowel  M_  is  sometimes  rejected  from  the 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g. 
ba  for  nba ,  baft  for  MbaM  bann  for  nsarn . 

—  ••  •  I  ••••  *••«•/  —  •  •  ••  •  •  • 

/  •  •  •  /  •  • 

M?n  to  be ,  fut.  m?m? ,  apoc.  Ti? ,  part.  Man  . 

M?n  to  live ,  fut.  M?rt? ,  apoc.  *in7  - 


Vocabulary  24. 

dS'atf  adv.  truly ,  indeed  Mia  y.  K.  to  build 
■’3  S|tf  how  much  more ,  or  m?m  v.  K.  to  be 

after  a  negative  how  T??  v.  K.  to  go  down ,  de- 
much  less  scend 


68  ETYMOLOGY.  §§  62,  63. 

]  n.  Jerusalem  nto'b  v.  K.  to  make,  do,  N.  to 

“loss  as  be  done 

b-3  v.  P.  (baba)  to  contain 

ro3  v.  P.  to  complete,  finish  nib  v.  P.  to  command 

nett  n.  f.  bed  nin  y.  K.  to  see,  N.  to  be  seen 

rob  v.  K.  to  go  up,  H.  to  to  appear 

bring  up,  offer  nb'bc  n.  in.  Solomon 

rob  n.  f.  burnt-offering  nriri  adv.  a  second  time 

J  Pointed  as  though  it  were  written  D^Sil3il",P. 


§  62.  Doubly  Imperfect  Verbs. 

Verbs  which  have  two  weak  letters  in  the  root,  or 
which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belong  to  two  different 
classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exhibit  the  peculiar¬ 
ities  of  both,  unless  they  interfere  with  or  limit  one  an¬ 
other.  Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  NS  and  rib  will  follow 
the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former  in  its  first,  and 
the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in  verbs  which  are 
both  “ib  and  tri  b,  the  1  is  invariably  treated  as  a  perfect 
consonant,  and  the  rib  peculiarities  only  are  preserved. 


§  63.  TJnusuad  Forms. 

1.  Verbs  belonging  to  one  class  of  imperfect  verbs 
occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another  and  close!  y  related 
class.  Thus,  a  s' b  verb  may  appear  with  a  rib  form,  or 
an  “ib  verb  with  an  bb  form,  or  vice  versa. 

2.  A  few  verbs  of  different  classes  adopt  the  peculiar 
b*b  or  rib  modes  of  forming  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael, 
inserting  the  vowel  b  instead  of  the  usual  reduplication 


NUMERALS. 


69 


§§  64,  65. 

t* io  and  O’1'© ,  Piels  of  ©“a© ,  '©"ana  and  ac^am  from 
ffi?a ,  or  doubling  tlie  third  radical  in  place  of  the  second, 
e.  g.  13?D,  nas:  (— aas:)  from  ns:  (  =  as: ), 

nann©n  (fut.  “inn©? ,  with  Vav  Cony.  anne^a)  from 
ran© ,  or  reduplicating  an  entire  syllable,  e.  g- 

nrnno . 

—  •  •  • 

•  • 

3.  A  very  few  instances  occur  of  what  may  be  called 
compound  species ;  thus,  Niphal  of  Pual  a^sa: ,  Niphal  of 
Hithpael  ansa:,  "is?:,  inane:. 

§  64.  QiiadriliteraZ  Verbs. 

The  number  of  quadriliteral  verbs  is  very  small.  Some 
adopt  the  vowels  and  inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual 
species,  while  others  follow  the  Hiphil. 

§  65.  Numerals ,  see  Table  XIX. 

1.  The  cardinals  from  three  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the 
singular  number,  and  have  a  feminine  termination  when 
joined  to  masculine  nouns,  but  omit  it  when  joined  to 
feminine  nouns. 

2.  The  tens  are  formed  by  adding  the  masculine  plural 
termination  to  the  units,  D'n©?  tiventy  being,  however, 
derived  not  from  two  but  from  ten  “a©? . 

3.  There  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  numbers  being  used  instead. 

4.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine  ordi¬ 
nals,  as  well  as  by  special  terms. 


Vocabulary  25. 

n.  f.  ephah  raina  n.  m.  Pharaoh 

©“an  n.  m.  month  ra:©  n.  f.  (nv)  year 

n:  n.  m.  Noah  b£©  n.  m.  shekel 

*aa®y  n.  m.  decade ,  ten 


70 


ETYMOLOGY 


§66. 

§  66.  Separate  Particles. 

1.  The  longer  particles,  whether  adverbs,  prepositions, 
conjunctions  or  interjections,  are  written  as  separate 
words. 

2.  The  prepositions  “ins  after ,  “bs  to,  “t?  unto ,  by  upon, 
and  nnn  under,  assume  before  suffixes  the  form  of  nouns 
in  the  masculine  plural,  e.  g.  “’ins ,  ?pins ;  p3  between, 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine 
plural,  and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  ira  and 
■pi ia  ,  iri-Q  and  ’irnira . 

3.  The  preposition  ns  with,  commonly  becomes  Pis 
before  suffixes,  e.  g.  “’ns ,  Dins ,  and  is  thus  distinguished 
from  ns  the  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  becomes 
nis ,  or  before  grave  suffixes,  ns ,  e.  g.  “,ns,  Dins . 


SYNTAX. 


§  67.  The  Copula. 

1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence,  if  a  substantive,  adjec¬ 
tive,  or  pronoun,  may  be  directly  connected  with  its  sub¬ 
ject  without  an  intervening  copula,  oi So  “‘irp:rn:“b3  all 
her  paths  (are)  peace ,  p ?n  sio  the  tree  (was)  good. 

2.  Or  the  verb  rrn  to  be ,  or  the  pronoun  Kin  of  the 
third  person,  may  be  used  as  a  copula,  ^nn  “fnn  pnijn 
the  earth  was  desolate ,  rns  “|iy:r1n  “in:n  the  fourth 
river  is  Euphrates. 


§  68.  The  Article. 

1.  The  article  is  used  in  Hebrew  as  in  English  to  dis¬ 
tinguish  an  object  as  one  which  has  been  mentioned 
before,  as  well  known,  as  the  only  one  of  its  class,  or  as 
distinguished  above  others  of  like  kind. 

2.  It  is  also  prefixed  to  nouns  employed  in  a  generic  or 
universal  sense,  anjri  gold ,  rrcann  wisdom.  So  in  com¬ 
parisons,  ll?  as  a  (lit.  the)  nest ,  Isa.  10 : 14. 

3.  It  is  likewise  found  in  some  cases  where  the  English 
idiom  requires  a  word  still  more  specific,  as  a  possessive 
pronoun :  she  took  5p?an  the  veil ,  Gen.  24  :  65,  i.  e.  the 
one  which  she  had,  her  veil ;  or  a  demonstrative,  as  be¬ 
fore  words  denoting  time,  Di*n  to-day ,  sijffin  this  year  j 
or  the  sign  of  the  vocative,  Sfban  0  king  / 


72 


SYNTAX. 


69-71 


§  69.  Nouns  definite  without  the  Article. 

1.  The  following  are  definite  without  the  article : — 

(1)  Proper  nouns,  which  only  receive  it  if  they  were 
originally  appellatives. 

(2)  Nouns  with  pronominal  suffixes.  I 

(3)  Nouns  in  the  construct  state  before  a  definite 
noun. 

2.  The  article  is  often  omitted  in  poetry  where  it  would 
be  required  in  prose. 


§  70.  Adjectives. 

1.  Both  qualifying  and  predicate  adjectives  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

2.  Qualifying  adjectives  usually  stand  after  the  noun 
and  agree  with  it  likewise  in  definiteness,  that  is  to  say, 
if  the  noun  is  made  definite  whether  by  the  article  or  in 
any  of  the  ways  specified  in  the  preceding  section,  they 
receive  the  article,  Din  a  toise  son,  nnisn  yikn  the 
good  land. 

3.  Predicate  adjectives  commonly  stand  before  the 
noun,  and  do  not  take  the  article,  even  though  the  noun 
is  definite,  ninn  nib  the  xoord  is  good. 


§  71.  Demonsfrative  Pronouns. 

1.  Demonstrative  pronouns  follow  the  same  rule  of 
position  and  agreement,  only  the  nouns  which  they  qualify 
are  invariably  definite,  nixn  cnnnn  these  things ,  nix 
D’nnnn  these  are  the  things. 

2.  If  both  an  adjective  and  a  demonstrative  qualify 


72,  73. 


NUMERALS. 


73 


the  same  noun,  the  demonstrative  is  placed  last, 
ns&r  roiran  this  good  land. 

§  72.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

1.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  means  of  the  preposi¬ 

tion  from ,  placed  after  the  adjective  or  other  word 
expressive  of' quality,  d,’5',i:b©  raio  wisdom  is  better 

than  rubies ,  lit.  is  good  from  rubies ;  7'?^  I  will  be 
greater  than  thou. 

2.  The  superlative  degree  may  be  expressed, 

(1)  By  adding  bs  all  to  the  comparative  particle  pa, 

bins  greatest  of  all  the  sons  of  the  east ,  lit. 
great  from  all,  etc. 

(2)  By  an  emphatic  use  of  the  positive,  so  as  to  imply 
the  possession  of  the  attribute  in  an  eminent  degree, 
ndzha  ns^n  0  fairest  among  women ,  lit.  the  fair  one,  etc. 

§  73.  Numerals. 

1.  The  cardinal  “ns  one  and  the  ordinal  numbers  are 
treated  like  other  adjectives,  and  follow  the  rules  of  po¬ 
sition  and  agreement  already  given, 

2.  The  other  cardinals  may  stand, 

(1)  In  the  absolute  state  before  the  noun  to  which 
they  belong. 

(2)  Before  it  in  the  construct  state  (if  they  have  such 
a  form). 

(3)  After  it  in  the  absolute  state. 

3.  Nouns  accompanied  by  the  cardinals  from  2  to  10 
are  almost  invariably  plural,  while  those  which  are  pre¬ 
ceded  by  the  tens  (20-90)  or  numbers  compounded  with 
them  (21,  etc.)  are  commonly  put  in  the  singular,  D’nto;? 

twenty  years  and  seven  years. 


74 


SYNTAX. 


74,  75, 


4.  The  cardinals  above  one  may  receive  the  article 
when  the  noun  is  not  expressed,  but  not  when  joined  to  a 
definite  noun,  the  forty,  n h>n  □■’inns  the  forty 

74.  Apposition. 

One  noun  may  be  in  apposition  with  another,  not  only 
when  both  denote  the  same  person  or  thing,  but  also 
when  the  second  specifies  the  first  by  stating  the  material 
of  which  it  consists,  its  quality,  character,  or  the  like, 
r,rmn  npsn  the  oxen  the  brass ,  i.  e.  the  brazen  oxen ; 
nrj?  D'wo  icSte  three  measures  (consisting  of)  meal. 


75.  The  Construct  State. 

L  m  '4yhr  P 

r  Hi  w.-  v-M 


vi  ■  j 


1.  When  one  ,noun  is  limited  in  its  meaning  by  another, 

‘r.  74' .  (/)  °  J  . 

the  first, is  put  in  the  construct  state,  ihe  relation  thus 
ed 


cJ&  Q 


expressed  corresponds  for  the  most  part  to  the  genitive  v.  y 
case,  or  to  that  denoted  in  English  by  the  preposition  ofl'ff 4 

2.  When  the  relation  between  two  nouns  is  expressed  ;o 
by  a  preposition,  the  first  commonly  remains  in  the  abso¬ 
lute  state;  it  may,  however,  especially  in  poetry,  be  put 

in  the  construct,  yhban  inn  mountains  in  Gilboa. 

3.  Nouns  are  sometimes  in  the  construct  before  a  suc¬ 
ceeding  clause  with  which  they  are  closely  connected ; 
thus,  before  a  relative  clause,  oipia  the  place  where , 
etc.,  particularly  when  the  relative  is  itself  omitted, 
nbcri—ra  by  the  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou  wilt  sa%d  ‘ 
and  even  before  the  copulative,  ny~a  rrban  wisdom,  and 
knowledge. 

4.  An  adjective,  participle,  or  demonstrative,  qualify¬ 
ing  a  noun  in  the  construct  state,  cannot  follow  it  imme¬ 
diately,  but  must  be  placed  after  the  governed  noun, 
brian  nVrp  near  the  great  work  of  Jehovah. 

C (J  f  y -IJ ^  .•  UVa.  V 

'"di  1  1  ^  Am. 


.  A  c «-  &*/  • 


THE  PRETERITE. 


75 


§§  76,  77.  - 

5.  An  article  or  suffix  belonging  to  a  noun  in  the  con¬ 
struct  must  be  attached,  not  to  it,  but  to  the  governed 
noun,  b^rin  ■fijiaa  the  mighty  men  of  valor ,  rjt  -  ^  5 

idols  of  gold.  . 

6.  The  preposition  b  to ,  belonging  to ,  with  or  without 

a  preceding  relative  pronoun,  may  be  substituted  for  the 
construct  relation  in  its  possessive  sense,  rr.an  the 

house  of  Elisha,  wu*b  itcs  her  father's  sheep. 


/  ,§76.  of  Verbs. 

■■ 

The  Hebrew  has  distinct  forms  of  the  verb  correspond¬ 
ing  to  the  two  grand  divisions  of  time,  the  past  and  the 
future;  but  all  subordinate  modifications  or  shades  of 
meaning  are  either  suggested  by  accompanying  particles, 
or  left  to  be  inferred  from  the  connection.  Whatever  is 
or  is  conceived  of  as  past,  is  put  in  the  preterite;  the 
future  is  used  for  all  that  is  or  is  conceived  of  as  future. 


§  77.  The  Preterite. 

The  preterite  may  accordingly  be  employed  to  denote, 

1.  The  past,  whether  it  be,  ^ 

a.  Absolute,  i.  e.  the  historical  imperfect,  God  *na 

created.  . 

b.  Relative  to  the  present,  i.  e.  the  perfect,  what  is  this 

that  min 2  thou  hast  done  ? 

c.  Relative  to  another  past,  i.  e.  the  pluperfect,  God 

ended  his  ivorh  which  he  had  made. 

d.  Relative  to  a  future,  i.  e.  the  future  perfect,  he  shall 

be  called  holy ,  when  the  Lord  TV  shall  have  washed ,  etc. 
&  Conditional,  except  the  Lord  had  left  a  remnant, 

ijiin  we  should  have  been  as  Sodom, 
f.  Optative,  0  that  we  had  died. 


SYNTAX 


73 


76 


g.  Subjunctive,  DtiiH?  ■jy'bb  in  order  that  ye  might  fear. 

2.  The  present,  regarded  as  a  continuation  of  the  past, 
tias  I  am  thirsty ,  prop.  I  have  been  and  still  am  thirsty. 

3.  General  truths,  embodying  the  experience  of  the 
past,  an  ox  'Jf  knoweth  his  owner ,  oxen  always  have 
done  so,  and  always  will. 

4.  The  future,  when  described  by  the  prophets  as 
though  it  had  already  taken  place,  Babylon  nbss  has 

fallen. 


j  •  8  78.  The  Future. ,  /'1 

4p  .<). 

The  future  tense  is  used  in  speaking  of, 

1.  The  future,  whether  it  be, 

a.  Absolute,  nto’yx  I  will  make. 

b.  Relative  to  a  past,  Elisha  was  fallen  sick  of  his 
sickness,  whereof  he  was  to  die. 

c.  Conditional,  but  (if  it  were  my  case)  Tzn'is  I  would 
seek  unto  God. 

d.  Optative,  expressing  desire,  determination,  permis¬ 
sion,  or  command,  so  ViSiO  may  all  thine  enemies  perish ; 
all  that  thou  coznmandest  us,  rfr?3  we  will  do;  of  the  fruit 
bis3  we  may  eat;  mine  ordinances  TnatiR  ye  shall  keep. 

e.  Subjunctive,  h?’?'?  in  order  that  my  soul  may 

bless  thee. 

2.  The  present,  when  it  is  conceived  of  as  extending  into 
the  future,  why  “>32n  weepest  thou  ?  lit.  why  wilt  thou  go 

on  to  weep  t 

3.  General  truths,  which  are  valid  for  all  time  to  come, 
righteousness  niai"iri  exalteth  a  nation,  it  does  so  now  and 
always  will. 

4.  Habitual  acts  or  states  continuing  for  an  indefinite 
period  from  the  time  spoken  of,  thus  Job  n't?'  did  con¬ 
tinually,  uot  only  that  once,  but  thenceforward. 


88  79, 80. 


PARTICIPLES. 


77 


5.  The  past,  in  animated  description,  as  we  use  the  pre¬ 
sent,  then  sings  Moses. 

6.  The  future  is  idiomatically  used  with  and  D’noa 
not  yet ,  before ,  whether  the  period  referred  to  is  past  or 
future. 

7.  The  apocopated  and  paragogic  forms  of  the  future 
mostly  have  a  conditional,  optative,  or  subjunctive  sense. 

8.  The  negative  imperative  is  made  by  prefixing  not 
to  the  apocopated  future,  wirrbs*  harm  not. 

\ 

§  79.  The  Secondary  Tenses. 

1.  When  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  preceded  by 
a  preterite,  or  by  any  expression  referring  to  past  time,  it 
becomes  a  secondary  preterite.  And  a  preterite  with 
Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future,  an  imperative,  or 
any  expression  indicating  future  time,  becomes  a  secondary 
future. 

2.  A  narrative  or  a  paragraph,  which  begins  with  one 
of  the  primary  tenses,  is  mostly  continued  by  means  of 
the  corresponding  secondary  tense,  provided  the  verb 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause.  If  for  any  reason 
this  order  of  the  words  is  interrupted  or  prevented,  the 
primary  tense  must  again  be  used. 


§  80.  Participles. 

1.  Participles  may  express  what  is  permanent  or 
habitual,  (the  Lord)  ana  loveth  righteousness.  Passive 
participles,  so  used,  suggest  not  only  a  constant  experience, 
but  a  fixed  quality  as  the  ground  of  it,  aais  not  only 
feared ,  but  worthy  to  be  feared. 

2.  Active  participles  most  commonly  relate  to  the  pres- 


73 


SYNTAX. 


81,  82 

ent  or  to  the  proximate  future,  and  passive  participles  to 
the  past. 

3.  In  narratives  and  predictions  the  time  of  the  parti¬ 
ciples  is  reckoned,  not  from  the  moment  of  speaking,  but 
from  the  period  spoken  of,  the  two  angels  came,  and  Lot 
3  Ep  was  sitting  in  the  gate  of  Sodom. 

§  81.  The  Infinitive. 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  may  be  used  for, 

(1)  The  preterite  or  the  future,  when  one  of  those 

tenses  immediately  precedes. 

(2)  The  imperative,  when  it  stands  at  the  beginning 

of  a  sentence. 

2.  The  infinitive,  which  is  a  verbal  noun,  may  be  put 
in  the  construct  state  before  a  following  noun,  whether 
this  be  its  subject  or  its  object.  The  construct  state  is 
also  used  after  nouns  or  prepositions,  and  sometimes  after 

verbs.  fan'll*  Tkf) *** }\ )> 3 , 

3.  When  one  verb  is  dependent  upon  another,  it  is 

sometimes  put,  not  in  the  infinitive,  but  in  the  same  tense 
with  the  governing  verb,  rjbn  V<spn  he  was  willing ,  he 
walked,  for  he  was  willing  to  walk,  or  walked  willingly. 

§  82.  Object  of  Verbs. 

1.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb,  if  a  definite  noun,  or 
a  pronoun,  may  be  preceded  by  the  particle  rs . 

2.  The  subject  of  passive  verbs,  which  is  really  the  ob- 
r  ject  of  their  action,  and  nouns  placed  absolutely,  oceasion- 

i4.ly  receive  F.8  • 

3.  Some  verbs,  not  properly  transitive,  are  capable  oi 

a  transitive  construction  ;  thus, 

^ ]  )  Verbs  signifying  plenty  and  want,  or  motion,  the 


NEGLECT  OF  AGREEMENT. 


70 


o  o 

house  d-'tBdsh  was  full  of  men,  ‘T’yrrns  they 
went  out  (of)  the  city. 

(2)  Any  verb  may  govern  its  cognate  noun,  or  a  noun 
which  defines  the  extent  of  its  application,  -pbrn-nx  “'in 

he  was  diseased  in  his  feet. 

4.  The  verb  usually  stands  first,  its  subject  next,  and 
its  object  last,  unless  the  emphasis  requires  a  different 
order. 


§  83.  Verbs  with  more  than  one  Object. 

1.  Some  verbs  have  .more  than  one  object,  viz. : 

(1)  The  causatives  of  transitive  verbs. 

(2)  Verbs  whose  action  may  be  regarded  under  differ¬ 
ent  aspects  as  terminating  upon  different  objects. 

(3)  The  instrument  of  an  action,  the  material  used  in 
its  performance,  its  design,  or  its  result,  may  be  its 
secondary  or  remote  object,  iss  ins  I’eS’VH  an'^  they  over¬ 
whelmed  him  with  stones ,  ns?  □“xrr~x  nap*]  and  he 

/  TT  »TTT  •  • 

formed  the  man  of  dust. 

2.  If  an  active  verb  is  capable  of  governing  a  double 
object,  its  passive  may  govern  the  more  remote  of  them. 


§  84.  Adverbial  Expressions. 

1.  Adverbs  commonly  stand  after  the  words  to  which 
they  belong. 

2.  Nouns  may  be  placed  absolutely  to  express  the  rela¬ 
tions  of  time,  place,  measure,  number,  or  manner. 

§  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement. 

1.  When  a  predicate  adjective  or  verb  precedes  its 
noun,  it  often  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 


SYNTAX. 


is  to  say,  the  masculine  may  be  used  instead  of  the 
feminine,  and  the  singular  instead  of  the  plural. 

2.  Collective  nouns  may  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

3.  Nouns  plural  in  form,  but  singular  in  signification, 
commonly  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  agreeiug 
with  them  in  the  singular. 

4.  Plural  names  of  inanimate  or  irrational  objects  of 
either  gender  are  occasionally  joined  with  the  feminine 
singular. 

5.  The  masculine  is  sometimes  used,  when  females  are 
spoken  of,  from  a  neglect  to  note  the  gender,  if  no  stress 
is  laid  upon  it. 

6.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  are  sometimes 
employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural  subjects. 

7.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pro¬ 
nouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 


§  86.  Compound  Subject. 

1.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  words  con¬ 
nected  by  the  conjunction  and,  the  predicate,  if  it  precedes 
its  subject,  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  singular  as  its 
primary  form,  or  it  may  be  put  in  the  plural,  referring  to 
them  all,  or  it  may  agree  with  the  nearest  word. 

2.  If  the  predicate  follows  a  compound  subject,  it  is 
commonly  put  in  the  plural,  though  it  may  agree  with 
the  principal  word  to  which  the  others  are  subordinate. 

3.  If  a  predicate  refers  equally  to  two  words  of  dif¬ 
ferent  genders,  it  will  be  put  in  the  masculine  in  prefer¬ 
ence  to  the  feminine ;  if  they  are  of  different  jiersons, 
the  predicate  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to 
the  third,  and  in  the  first  in  preference  to  either  of  the 
others. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


SI 


87-89. 


§  87.  Repetition  of  Words. 

1.  Repetition  may  denote  distribution,  n:©  fii©  year 
by  year ,  plurality,  “ni"Tj  generation  and  generation ,  i.  e. 
many  generations ,  or  emphasis  and  intensity,  pas 
exceeding  deep. 

2.  In  verbs  the  absolute  infinitive  is  joined  with  the 
finite  forms  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  intensity,  rria 
man  thou  shalt  surely  die. 

§  88.  Relative  Pronouns. 

1.  When  the  relative  is  governed  by  a  verb,  noun, 
or  preposition,  this  is  shown  by  appending  the  appro* 
priate  pronominal  suffix  to  the  governing  word,  thou 
Tprnna  whom  I  have  chosen.  iinT  *i©k  whose  seed. 

2.  When  the  relative  is  preceded  by  nk  the  sign  of 
the  definite  object,  or  by  a  preposition,  these  pertain 
not  to  the  relative,  but  to  its  antecedent,  which  is  to  be 
supplied. 

3.  The  relative  is  frequently  omitted,  not  only,  as  in 
English,  when  it  is  the  object  of  its  clause,  but  also  when 
it  is  the  subject,  andhe  forsooh  God  vtiriy  (who)  made  him. 

4.  The  demonstrative  stT  or  is  frequently  used  in 
poetry  with  the  force  of  a  relative,  in  which  case  it 
suffers  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

§  89.  Conjunctions. 

1.  The  simple  copulative  )  is  used  in  Hebrew,  where 
our  idiom  requires  different  conjunctions ;  the  relation  be¬ 
tween  clauses  so  connected  must  often  be  inferred  from 
their  signification. 

2.  Vav  also  serves, 

4* 


82 


SYNTAX. 


89 


(1)  To  introduce  the  apodosis  or  second  member  of  a 
conditional  sentence,  if  God  will  be  with  me  and  keep  me 
ry-i  then  shall  Jehovah  be  my  God. 

(2)  To  connect  a  statement  of  time  or  a  noun  placed 
absolutely  with  the  clause  to  which  it  relates,  on  the  third 
day  annas  xiy*  Abraham  lifted  up  his  eyes. 


GRAMMATICAL  TABLES. 


I.  The  Letters,  §1. 

Order. 

Forms  and  Equivalents. 

Names. 

Rabbinical 

Alphabet. 

Numerical 

values. 

1 

1 

pbfc 

»*.*  T 

Alepk 

f> 

1 

2 

a 

Bh,  B 

rro 

Betk 

3 

2 

3 

Gh,  G 

••  • 

• 

Gl'-mel 

a 

3 

4 

Dli,  D 

pb* 

V  T 

Da'-leth 

7 

4 

5 

n 

H 

an 

•• 

He 

t> 

5 

6 

CUk^ 

y 

Yi 

T 

Vav 

6 

7 

t 

z 

rt 

Zayin 

t 

7 

8 

n 

Hk 

mn 

•• 

Hketk  1 

r 

8 

9 

TD 

T 

mo 

— 

Tetk  1 

r 

9 

10 

Y 

*rb 

Yodk  ! 

> 

10 

11 

Kh,  K 

f|? 

Kapk 

20 

12 

<5 

L 

‘Tab* 

V  T 

La'-medk 

i 

30 

13 

Q 

M 

m 

•• 

Mem 

cr 

40 

14 

3  1 

N 

TO 

Nun 

i5 

50 

15 

D 

S 

=P?9 

Sa'-mekk 

P 

60 

16 

* 

Ayin 

70 

17 

B  Cl 

Ph,  P 

Pe 

80 

18 

2  7 

Ts 

■Hi 

••  T 

Tsa'-dke 

90 

19 

p 

K 

PV 

Kopk 

? 

100 

20 

n 

R 

urn 

i  •• 

Resk 

|  7 

200 

21 

■» 

Sk,  S 

1  ’J-'C 

Slim 

C 

300 

22 

n 

Tk,  T 

np 

Tav 

P 

1  400 

• 

II.  Classification  of 

i.  r 


Gutturals,  R  n  n  y 

Palatals,  3  i  d  p 

Linguals,  “7  a  b  3  n 

Dentals,  T  c  33  © 

Labials,  n  1  a  b 


Weak, 

Medium, 


1  shares  the  peculiarities 

of  the  Gutturals.yc 

3. 


Strong, 


the  Letters,  §2. 

2. 

( ^  n  i  1  Vowel-Letters. 
]  x  n  n  y  Gutturals. 

^  b  a  d  "i  Liquids. 

(  r  c  s  O  Sibilants. 

a  B 

3  D  p  J- 


■s 


L  ^  n  'J  j 


Aspirates  and 
Mutes. 


3. 

Serviles  nbai  rma  pv«.  Radicals  the  rest  of  the  Alphabet. 


The  Points,  §  4. 


Zorn?  Vowels , 

Ka'mets  a  — 
Tse're  — 
Hhb'lem  b 


Short  Vowels . 

Pattahh  b 

Seghol  g 

Ka'mets-Hhatuph  b 


Doubtful  Vowels . 


Hhi'rik  — 
Shu'rek  — 
Kib  buts  — 


tor  t 


u  or  u 


Pronounce  a  as  in  father ,  a  as  in  /««,  e  as  in  there ,  e  as  in  met,  l  as  in 
machine,  1  as  in  pin,  0  as  in  note,  6  as  in  not,  u  as  in  rule ,  u  as  in  full. 

§  ?.  Simple  Sh’va  —  silent  or  vocal. 

-7A,  /  «  S  A  >7  3  * 

Com  non  nVl  (  Hnfiteph-Pattahh  -  ;  thus  nby  amddh. 
Sh’vas  I  ^  riititeph-Segh°l  — ;  thus  lbs  emor. 

(  Hhateph-Kamets  — ;  thus  “'3S  °nl. 

h  8-  Pattahh-furtive  —  with  y,  n  or  ft  at  the  end  of 
words. 


§  12.  Daghesh-lene  in  S  ^  3  B  v\  removes  aspiration. 

$  13.  Dagliesh-forte  doubles;  not  found  in  n  n  ? 
rarely  in  . 

§  14.  Mappik  in  final  ft  when  a  consonant. 

§  13.  Raphe  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh* 
forte,  or  Mappik. 

§  21.  Makkeph  (")  connects  words. 

$  22.  Methegh  —  second  syllable  before  the  accent. 

84-  ^  »— _ _ 


III.  The 

Accents, 

H6.  \  ;  0 

DISJUNCTIVES. 

rr"'  » 

Class  I. 

Emperors. 

r  J 

1.  Silluk 

(,P 

jp&O 

2,  Athnahh 

(a) 

run* 

At  *  “ 

Class  II.  Kings. 

8.  S’gholta 

(•••) 

KPiVip  postp. 

4.  Z&keph  Kai On 

O 

Ti»3  C|BT 

5.  Zakeph  GaJhol 

(,:) 

^■na  BBJ 

6.  Tiphhha 

O 

ansa 

vr  a  • 

Class  III.  Dukes. 

7.  R’bhr 

n 

•  : 

8.  Shalsheleth 

(*) 

••  ••  •  — 

•  •  « 

9.  Zarka 

o 

KR-}?  postp. 

10.  Pashta 

o 

pos^p. 

11.  Y’thlbh 

u 

prep. 

12.  T’bhlr 

( ) 

V 

IT 

ri>% 

r 

r 

Class  IY.  Counts. 

13.  Pazer 

o 

-its 

••  V 

14.  Karne  Phara 

C) 

t  t  ••  : 

15.  T’llsha  Gh’dhola 

C) 

rfjtii  swj"4in  prep. 

16.  Geresh 

o 

tin  a 
••  •• 

•  . 

17.  G’rashayim 

(") 

d"»Sha 

•  -  t  : 

18.  P’slk 

(0 

ip*V0B 

conjunctives.  Servants. 

19.  Merka 

(.) 

ir  :  V 

20.  M&nahh 

u 

H  5*133 

JT 

21  >  Merka  Kh’phfila 

o 

22.  Malipakh 

(<) 

23.  Darga 

(,) 

at  :  * 

24.  Kadhma 

o 

“PTB 

25.  Yerahh  ben  YomC 

►  (v) 

iai-'-p  rn; 

26.  T’llsha  K’tanna 

(') 

postp. 

8ft 


IV.  Inseparable  Prepositions  and  Vav 

g  V  jy 

Conjunctive,  §§  27,  28. 

Primary  form,  S  3  b  1 

I >  :  u-  :  !  * 

Before  vowelless  Consonants,  ^  •  v  S  '  1  S  b  *  ** 

7  /  >  *  i »  •  •  1 

Before  Gutturals  with  Compound  Sh’va,  the  corresponding  short  vowel. 

Before  monosyllables  and  accented  syllables, 7)  3  £  b  ^ 

With  the  contracted  article'  qjx  /jU  <  v;v  fit  the  vowel  of  the  article. 

*  Also  before  the  labials  Z ,  and  £ .  but  }  before  vowelless  Yodh. 
t  With  the  interrogative  11522,  H522  .  1152^  or  nib 

’  “  7  T-?  TT  XT* 


<1 


Vs 


§ 


0  A' 


and  the  Interrogative  rva. 


Before  strong  consonants,  •  a 

Before  vowelless  consonants  and  strong  ) 
gutturals,  •)(;  f'  •  ^  /  /7  i  ^ 

Before  weak  gutturals,  a 

Before  gutturals  with  Kamets,  a 

*  »• 


n 

•• 

n 

n 


n 


<  i 


n 

T 

n 


But  with  a  disjunctive  accent  commonly  H52. 


\  \ 


vV* 


4  <J 

«! 

•sna* 

rra 

u 

/v 

rra 

T 

na  n 

T  X 

r 

\\f 

1 

•  •  ► 


*  -» 

r  » 

'■ 


r%.  .  3^  v  \ 


Inseparable  Prepositions  with  Suffixes. 

7  e  .  ^ 

Singula  e . 


1  e. 

2  m. 

2/ 

3  m. 

3/.  Rll 

y  r 


i'vOL  .  /  \ 


"5  ^ 

■aS>» 


*  • 

*3 


miOS  '3*2,  *2‘3,  *:33*3 


13  •  13 


.L- 


-  Mr 

I  »!f 


.  i 


mas 

t  r 


V  * 


1  C. 


i:h 

T 


ve 

Plural. 

'  V .  d  -  2 


2  m.  E33, 


Oy-<r 

.  4.  4 

V-T*4*-  I 


OT3B 

r 

Dob  .033 ,  031*33 

v  r  '  v  r  1  v  i 


1  •,?> 


2*^  iv^ "  , 

3 «.  do  ,  oho  ibb ,  Drib  oris ,  Ohio? 

x  7  r  t  v  t  j:  .t  _  v  :  • 

-8/1  )'.!?»  I'v1-? 


inb 

1  VT 


80 


> 


if?. 

nab ,  inso, 

:  v  7  ...» 

V  • 

mo*3 

T  V  • 

4  *  vN 

v  *  • 

1:12*3 

N  Os/ 

V  • 

03*3 

V  • 

^  • 

1313 

1  v  • 

tSTStt , 

Dm‘3 

V  ;  . 

•  •  •  • 

• 

• 

•  •  •  »  m 

•  '••A 

A  lw 

1  y  « 

1 

2. 

3. 


V.  Personal  Pronouns, 

$  29. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

I 

■aba* ,  ib  x 

We 

anbaa,  anb,  i:a* 

•  •  •  *  • 

Thou 

m. 

nriaa,  ria* 

Ye  m. 

CPS? 

Thou  / 

ns, 

Ye/. 

■jns,  n;r}N 

He 

a?  in 

They  m. 

nr.  nan 

••7  T  •• 

She 

arn,  sin  §  23.  3. 

They  /. 

in,  nan 

/  7  t  •• 

Suffixes. 

Simple. 

With  union  Vowels  of  Verbs. 

With  Sing.  Nouns.  With  Dual  anil 

r 


-\  r~ 


Plur.  Noui»» 


1  c. 

■0 ,  “> 

^3 
•  •• 

^3 

•  •.* 

cu 

pi. 

^3 

T 

}3 

•• 

}3 

•• 

• 

2  m. 

*5  (n?) 

OF.) 

CO 

b. 

(5? ,) 

pi. 

DD 

•• 

• 

2/. 

nc*) 

b  ,b 

9. 

pi. 

i? 

• 

3  m. 

in 

mr  ,i 

in 

•• 

13 

•  • 

• 

0nb) 

pi. 

n  (ia) 

a.  ,B. 

□ 

•• 

«/• 

n 

T 

n 

T 

n 

T 

H3 

T  ? 

pi. 

1  (n?) 

b 

b 

• 

Ob) 

•4 

*  :  OO 

T, 

nn 

v  : 

nn11 

••  M 

b 

r. 

1?, 

m. 

i  Zb  w.) 

ib  (**.,  bb 

D 

T 

°0b  C™b) 

T 

ni 

T  V 

V 

10b 

Maze. 

Sing,  nt  (it) 


Demonstrative.  5 :  f 

Fem.  Common. 

nxr  (it,  nr)  this.  Plur.  bs,  r,bi$  these. 


Relative.  '  ‘  ■ 

or  which;  abbreviated  form  •©  (•©,  ffi,  ©) 

Interrogative  and  Indefinite. 
v  *’,p  who  ?  or  whoever,  na  ivhat  ?  or  'whatever. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7 


Verbs. — Their  Species,  §§  31,  32. 


Simple  act. 

Kal 

bnp  to  hill. 

“  pass. 

Niphal 

bap?  to  be  hilled. 

Intensive  act. 

Piel 

bnp  to  kill  many  or  to  massacre. 

“  pass. 

Pual 

bnp  to  be  massacred. 

Causative  act.  Hiphil  b^bpn  to  cause  to  hill. 

“  pass.  Hophal  bnjpn  to  be  caused  to  hill. 

Reflexive  Hithpael  btpprn  to  hill  one's  self.  . 

ST 


.  ‘  ?  M 

-  ■;  /? 

i  /*>'<■  o. . 

///; . 

r  #  * 

vl.  Paradigm  of 

* 

KAL. 

NIPIIAL. 

,«u 

P  U  A  L.  ’ 

. 

Fret.  3  ??i. 

btop3  °r^' 

itsp 

btop 

3/-  ■' 

nbtop 

t  :  'it 

rfiapa 

nb  top 

r'i^p 

2  m.  '■ 

nbibp 

t  :  -»r 

nbtopt 

nbtop 

FP  top 

2/ 

.  Fbiop 

nbtopt 

nbtop 
:  :  —  *• 

Fib  top 
•  •  *  *, 

1  C.  v  '  •" 

^Tibtop 

•  ;  —It 

'■nbtopt 

■nbtop 
•  ;  —  >  • 

Tibtop 

PZwr.  3  c. 

'-•^t2p 

:  *it 

nbtopt 

^ttp 

tbtop 

2  m. 

ty 

DFibtop  • 

•  •  •  —  1  • 

•  »  • 

EFibtopo 

Qnbtop 

v  :  ->• 

nnbtop 

2  /.  # 

#=i? 

1$9?? 

$?Ep 

l  c/b*- 

tobtop 

:  — *  r 

ttbtopt 

^itbtbp 
:  —  !• 

“b'bp 

Infin.  absol. 

b^pr 

btopn 

It  • 

blip 

btop 

constr. 

bbp  • 

*U[>I  1 
••  It  • 

(M?pj 

Fut.  3  m. 

^p: 

••  lr  • 

btop' 

3  / 

btopn  • 

* :  • 

btopn 

*•  IT  • 

btopn 

••  i—  : 

btopn 

•j 

2  m.' <M"- 

btopn  • 

btopn 
..  |T  • 

btopn 

btopn 
-*••  ; 

2  f.  > 

■btopn  - 

•  •  I  •  • 

■btopn 

•  :  Jrr  • 

■btopn 

^btopn 

•  :  K  : 

if  ' 

1  cj 

btop  a 

> :  v 

bibp  a 

••  It  v 

btopa 

•  •  Immm  — • 

btopx 

»  , 

PZur.  3  m.  l-‘\ 

tbtop* 

tbtOp^ 

:  Jit  • 

tbtop' 

tbtop' 

3  f  - 

ntbtopn  • 

t  :  >:  • 

ntbtopn 

T  :  ••It  • 

nlbtOpP 

T  *  •  •  1—  • 

■  •  • 

Fibtopn 

x  •  —  1*.  • 

2  m.  ’  •'  ' 

tbtopn  • 

•  1  •  • 

6topn 

:  Iit  • 

sfiapn 
:  * —  : 

‘btopn 

2  /•  * 

ntbtopn  • 

t  :  >:  • 

ntbtopn 

r  :  ••It  • 

nrbtopm 

T  *  ••  • 

•  •  • 

nsbtopn 

t  ;  —*%  • 

1  C.  fx 

’blip: 

1 :  • 

btopt 

••  IT  • 

biopt 

• 

Impeh.  2  m. 

$  •  ■ 

bt2pn 

••  It  • 

• 

2  /• 

^top 

*^¥4**  k— 

>U|>|  ! 

•  :  Iit  • 

top 

• 

•  *•'  *  *• 

PZur.  2  m. 

jfitop 

tbtopn 

sibtpp 

4 

wanting 

2  /• 

ntbtop 

't  •  |  • 

ntbtopn 

t  ;  ••  lr  • 

ntbtop 

T  ••  1— 

#  • 

»  m 

Part.  ocZ. 

btop 

btopa 

•  •  l—m  •  * 

9 

pass. 

t  * :  • 

V  • 

*  f 

88 


/ 


Perfect  Verbs,  §§  33 

-38. 

HirniL. 

IIC  PIT  V  L. 

II1THFAEL. 

kal  (m  id.  e). 

kal  (mid.  6)< 

b’tbpn 
^  1  •  • 

bbpn 

btopnn 

“is 

••  r 

bpp: 

T 

nb'bpn 

t  •  >:  • 

P>b2pn 

nbtapnn 

PnPP 

r  ;  IT 

Fbp'P 

T  :  nr 

pbfcpn 

rbton 

t  :  -» ;  r 

nbtopnn 

FHPP 

t  :  —  t 

nbp-p 

t  ;  r 

Fibbpn 
•  •  —  |  •  • 

•  •  • 

pib'Gpn 

•  •  “ ’ '  •  T 

rbapnn 
•  •  • 

mis 

•  •  — »  -r- 

•  •  * 

rbpip 

•  •  -r 

»  •  i 

Tibfcpn 
•  • 

"nbibpn 

•  :  —  *;  r 

Tibtopnn 

Trap 

•  :  —  t 

TbpiP 

•  ;  t 

iib-^pr: 

^bepn 

•  |  •  T 

iibDpnn 
:  *—  :  • 

*TQ3 

:  jt 

^ibPTP 

:  it 

Dfqbtipn 

DFibcpn 

•  •  •  r 

dribtcpnn 

v  :  :  • 

DF“iPP 

•  •  *  M  • 

•  •  • 

(c®5’?) 

T$3?*7 

■irb'Epnn 

r  •  •  • 

-.fppp 

1  ••  •  — i  • 

1  •  •  • 

(tM) 

ttbapn 

^jbbpn 

:  t 

sobEpnn 
•  • 

ip-PP 

;  — T 

w  .1  . 

ppbpia 

:  t 

&I?n 

bbpn 

•■<:  t 

(biopnn) 

Tipp 

T 

y  .  i 

bip-p 

T 

b^pn 

bepn 

-  bbpnr; 

•  •  !«■  •  • 

• 

.  t 

“23 

• 

y 

bpp 

* 

• 

Hi?: 

bbph 

—  • ;  r 

bfcprr 

•  •  Immm  •  • 

ISP*1 

JMk  •  • 

bittr 
—  :  • 

b'bpn 

bbpn 

btoprin 

PPPF 
—  •  • 

bpiPF 

mm  •  • 

b’ipr, 

•  »:  — 

bibpn 

— ■*:  t 

bftpnn 

•  •  L—  •  • 

pppn 
_  •  • 

bb'pn 

■'Wipn 

^btopn 

•  :  r 

,,bi2pnn 

hpppn 

•  :  ;  • 

‘bPTPF 
•  •  • 

b'ibpx 

btbpx 

btopna 

..  .  ... 

ppp^ 

mmm  •  •  • 

bP'PK 
— •  •  •  • 

i|b*’t2p'_ 

iibi2ph 

:  1 :  t 

6t2prr 

iHPP" 

•  •  e 

6p  pi* 

•  •  • 

rri  bt:pn 

r  :  ••  • ;  — 

rribtei 

t  :  —  > :  r 

nbbtapnn 

t  :  :  • 

nniiPF! 

T  *  “■  J  • 

“bptP 

r  :  —  ;  • 

Jib'tipn 

sibtipn 

^brppnFi 
•  • 

^npn 
•  • 

•  • 

iftpirn 

• 

•  • 

Fjbijpn 

r  :  ••  • :  — 

Mwb’LDpFl 

MDb'bpnn 

r  «  ••  1—  •  • 

•  •  • 

mI“23P 

•T-  *  —  *  • 

*  •  • 

n:bi)tn 

r  •  —  • 

•  •  • 

b’tppi  • 

bbpj 

—  'IT 

btopn: 

•  •  i—  •  • 

• 

“PPj 

—  •  • 

• 

bb'Pi 
—  •  • 

btppn 

* 

bfrpnn 

*123 

• 

'  “’b’lbpii 

‘'btopnn 

•  • 

^PP3 
•  • 

•  • 

Jib^pn 
•  *:  — 

wanting’ 

^ibEpnn 

JibPP 
•  • 

• 

nibcpn 

t  :  — 

% 

rirbropriu 

t  •  •  1  —  •  • 

n;ppp 

T  *  —  * 

■  •  • 

b*£ppp 

btbprrp 
•  •  1—  •  • 

> 

• 

■  htp’2  ■ 

T  1 :  r 

• 

• 

— ■  - 1 

VII.  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect 


Singular. 

1  com .  2  masc.  2  fem .  3  masc.  Zfem . 


Verbs  with 

Suffixes, 

§  42. 

Plural. 

* 

1  COW. . 

2  masc . 

2  fem. 

3  masc. 

3  fem. 

*D  J3 

dibdp 
•  •  r  • 

dbnbdp 

v  :  —  it*: 

■jbb^p 

Dbtip 

t  t»: 

1^1? 

lonbdp 

:  "  t *: 

■pnbt© 

1  v  it*: 

onbt:p 

—  t  t  » ; 

*nnbt>p 

T  •  —m  h  • 

T  •  '• 

dhbdp 

Tsrb'xp 

•  :  -l; 

OTibtjp 

r$m 

DDTibttp 

d'nbdp 

T^bdp 

sa^tjp 

DD'btip 

v  it  * : 

T?*a? 

dibdp 

JMrbtm 
:  — 

n^nbtop 

■pubdp 

drrtDbdp 

•  •  •  MM  |  • 

•  •  • 

D^bbtop 

:  — J; 

l^p 

*obdp 

••  ’T 

dobdp 

•  •  T  w  • 

pbdp 

!  v  :  t  » : 

dbtip 

t  ;  Jr 

dbbdp* 

•  •  •  T  1  •  • 

pbap*’ 

1  v  :  r  J;  • 

dbdp’1 

lbdp“' 

5|36t3p“> 

nb^btDp'' 

•  •  • 

ib^btop" 

)  v  :  * :  • 

d^ibdp^ 

i^dp: 

■r.ycp 

dbdp 

ttbdp 

t  :  *• 

nbbtop 

pbdp 
•  •  •  • 

dbtop 

l^p 

soS^pn 

r  •  *:  • 

dbb'dpn 

••  •  (•  | •  • 

•  •  1  • 

pb'ttpn 

1  v  :  i* » :  • 

db^dpn 

t  •  1;  • 

FPp“ 

91 


VIII.  Paradigm  or  J 

?e  Guttural  Verbs,  §53. 

-  - 

KAL.  NIPHAL.  HIPHIL.  HOPHAL. 

FUT. 

Pret.  3  m. 

rey 

—  r 

1/— ✓  J 

•  »l  • 

3  /• 

“1725 

t  :  it 

51172  53 
•  •  •  |  • 

2  m 

571725 

mays 

t  :  —  t 


2  /• 

1  c. 

Plur.  3  c. 

2  m. 

2/ 
1  c. 


ma? 

•  •  —  t 

•  •  • 

■mss 


T  •  ■■  ••••*• 

■  •  •  • 1  • 

mass 

•  •  _  •  • 
•  •  •  • 

•  :  —  y:iv 

51*17253 

•  •  I  • 

arnays 

•  •  •  M  »•*■•• 
•  •  •  •!  • 

*5511353 

1  ••  •  —  •••!•• 
I  •  •  •  •  I  • 


5)313y  51317253 


5)1 3> 


:y 

:  it 


amay 

•  •  •  M  —  • 
•  •  • 

■may 

I  ••  •  aa  —  • 

t  •  •  • 


—  r 


—  v:r: 


I  W>  I 

•  v:  iv 

i 

I  »  i  'Jjs  1 

r  •  v:  |V 

ntbyn 

T*  «  •  ••  I •  • 

•  •  •  I  • 

mayn 

•  •  M  •  •  •  i  •  • 

•  •  •  •  I  • 

Trnkn 

•  •  —  •••  IM 

•  •  •  I  • 

511125“ 

•  V  iv 

amayn 

•  •  •  v  • 

•  •  •  •  I  • 

i 

i  ••  •  « •*« 

I  •  •  •  •  i  • 

mayn 

i  —  v:  iv 


ikyn 

—  t:  it 

{1172551 

t  :  t  it 

may  n 

t  :  —  t:  it 

may  n 

•  •  ...  -r  •  i-r 

•  •  i  •  11 

Tnb  n 

•  :  —  t:  it 

5iiay“ 

:  t  it 

cmay  “ 

•••5  —  t:  it 

■■  — 

li*  I  I  I  I 

1  v  :  —  t:  it 

5)3172551 

:  —  t:  it 


bba" 

biitn 

bian 

•birin 

•  S  I 

bhis 

:  I 

mbuKP 


t  :  — 


5i»»n 

•  I 

“sbyxri 
bias 


Infin.  Absol. 
Consir. 


'Trey 

iay 


•  i 

ia 


^  i 


layn 


172551 

..  I- 

Tasn 

•  r 


172551 

••  t:  it 

iay  5i 

—  T  IT 


Fut.  3  m. 

3  /• 

2  m. 

2/. 

1  c. 

Plur.  3  m. 

3/ 

2  m, 

2/ 

1  c. 


iay: 

iayn 

i- 

iayn 

"iayn 

•  :  —  r 

iay  a 

••• 

•  •  I  • 

51135" 

:  —i- 

nriayn 

t  :  i- 

511725F1 

:  —  i- 

“siayn 

t  :  i- 

17253 


1725“* 


Tl- 


r 

~:r 


i 


172  5D 


t  r 


iayn 


T  |* 


"172557 


:  it 


)  »-  )/— 

r  :  ••  t  r 


172 5 X 

..  f  r. 

5)135" 

:  it** 

•iyn 
5)iayn 

:  it  •• 

“2172557 

t  ;  ••  t  i** 

T253 

..  T|M 


1"725 
1"72557 

•  i- 

1"72557 

•  i- 

"112511 

•  •  i- 

T725R 

•  r 

5)T725" 

•  -;i- 

513172557 

t  :  i- 

51112557  5)172557 

•  r  :  t  it 

513172551 

t  :  i- 


Tey* 

—  n  it 

172557 

—  i;  it 

1725  57 

—  n  it 

"172557 

•  :  t  it 

1725^ 

—  t;  it 

*1  )  -✓ 

:  tit 

I 

t  :  —  t:  it 


11252 

•  -3- 


“31725  57 

r  :  —  t:  it 

17253 

—  t;it 


I  i 

:tv 


Kal  (fut.  a.) 

pi 

pT  HP 

|  —  •••  IM 

•  •  I  • 

p7”57 

**  •  •  I  •* 

KpTPP 

1  •:  v  iv 

pirn 

5)p75!" 

•  •  I  • 

2pT!F, 

r^:  -  v:  iv 

i 

•lpTnp 

F  •  •  I  • 

f 

nip  T  np 

t>  .  —  v:  iv 


I  i 


pT*  u 

1  —  V.1V 


Imper.  2  nv 

iay 

• 

*■■'<**»  bn 

1  i 

..  T 

172551 

.. 

PL*J 

• 

2/ 

"135 

•  •  • 

• 

"13551 

•  :  it  •• 

"112551 

•  •  i_ 

wanting 

tepTH 
»•  :  • 

Plur.  2  rrv 

5)1725 
;  • 

•  1 

5)13551 

:  it  •• 

• 

51112551 

•  i- 

_  i 

!)PT“ 

• 

4 

CM 

nnoy 

r  : 

reiE*.  i 

t  :  ••  t  r* 

I  iJ  MmmJS  1 

t  :  ••  - :  r 

! 

niptn 

Part.  Act. 

Tzy 

1 

Tmey'2 

Pass. 

15)725 

T 

1 

;  j 

T  V.1V 

1353 

T  K  1  T 

92 


IX.  Paradigm 

OF  A YIN 

Guttural  V  erbs 

4  54. 

KAL. 

N1PHAL. 

PIEL. 

PLTAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

Pret.  3  m. 

—  r 

bikaa 
—  •  • 

b^a 

•  •  •  • 

bita 

bitarn 

••  r  :  • 

3/ 

nbsa 

T  -JIT 

nbaaa 

t  • 

nbNa 

t  -:r* 

nbtta 

t  i 

T  ~:;t  ; 

2  m. 

nbxa 

t  ;  —  t 

nbfcaa 

t  i  ’ —  :  • 

nbtsa 

t  ;  — 

nbita 

T  :  — 

nbitann 

t  ;  —  t  :  • 

2/ 

nbaa 

•  •  —  -j- 

nbikaa 

•  •  —  •  • 

nbisa 
•  •  «■  •• 

nbita 

•  • 

nbitann 

•  •  «  T  *  • 

1  c. 

Tibka 

•  ;  —  r 

Tsbfcaa 
•  •  —  •  • 

*nb^a 

•  •  —  M 

“'nbita 
•  •  — 

■nbitann 

•  :  —  r  :  • 

Plur.  3  c. 

^ibaa 

— •  it 

^ibsaa 

— •  •  • 

ab^a 

abNa 

i 

*ib*tann 

-:it  :  • 

2  m. 

0FDK3 
•  •  •  _  • 

ahbaaa 

•  •  •  M.  •  • 

nnbaa 

v  :  — 

nnbtta 

V  ;  —  i 

cnbttann 

•  •  •  _  i  -r  •  • 

2/ 

■mbs*  a 

1  •  •  • 

inbxaa 

I  v  :  —  :  • 

’inbfcts 

1  v  :  — r* 

tnb»'r* 

1  V  :  —  1 

nbaann 

1  v :  -it  :  • 

1  C. 

ttbka 

;  —  r 

iiabkaa 
•  —  •  • 

•  • 

siabsa 

•  MB  •  • 

• 

kbit's 

- 

• 

nbitann 

•  —  T  *  • 

Infin.  Absol. 

bifca 

T 

bxan 

T  • 

bN3 

••  T 

Constr. 

baa 

• 

baan 

..  T  • 

baa 

”  T 

bitann 

•  •  1*  •  • 

Fur.  3  m. 

bfca- 
•  •  • 

bxah 

••  T  * 

b^ah 

••  t  : 

bita* 

OE  • 

bkarr 

••  t  :  • 

of. 

baan 
—  •  • 

bfcan 

••  T  • 

bitan 

••  t  ; 

bit  an 

M  • 

bitann 

••  t  ;  • 

2  m. 

bxan 
—  •  • 

bs^sra 

•*  T  • 

bitan 

••  t  : 

bitan 

bitann 
..  T  ;  • 

2/ 

"baan 

•  — •  •  • 

"bisan 

•  -;it  • 

hbNan 

•  -jit  : 

hb«an 

•  -:  i  ; 

■’bttann 

•  -jit  :  • 

1  c. 

bioa 

__  •  ,j» 

bfcaa 

•  •  T  V 

bitatt 

••  t  — : 

bit'aN 

bitantt 

•  •  J*  »  M 

Plur,  3  m. 

—  •  •  • 

abis'a^ 

it* 

abx:r 

— :it  ; 

tbttr 

i  : 

abNan* 

“t  it  ;  • 

3/ 

nabtkan 

T  •  —  •  • 

nab&an 

t  ;  —  r  • 

nabitan 

t  ;  —  t  : 

nabitan 

T  I  — »  • 

nabitann 

t  ;  —  r  ;  • 

2  rn. 

si3»an 
•  • 

abxan 

— :  it  • 

iibaan 

-:it  : 

abxan 

“•i  • 

nbitann 

-jit  :  • 

2/ 

nabfcan 

■p  •  •  • 

nab  Nan 

t  :  —  t  • 

nabitan 

t  :  —  t  ; 

nab  Nan 

T  «  l 

nabNarn 

r  ;  —  t  ;  • 

1  c. 

bfcaa 
—  •  • 

• 

bikaa 

•*  T  • 

bitaa 

••  r ; 

bxaa 

• 

bkana 

••  t  ;  • 

Impek.  2  m. 

baa 

bsan 

••  T  * 

baa 

**  T 

bkann 

•*  t  ;  • 

2/ 

"baa 

•  -:r 

^bwan 

•  -*«T  • 

'5n3 

•  -:it 

wanting 

•bNarn 

•  -jit  :  • 

Plur .  2 

*bxa 

-•  |- 

abxan 

it  • 

abxa 

— :  it 

‘bNann 

it  ;  • 

2/ 

T*  •  —  • 

•  •  • 

nabkan 

r  :  —  r  • 

nab^a 

r  :  — t 

nab^ann 

t  :  —  r  :  • 

Part.  .4c  £. 

bxa 

•  • 

btoa 

••  t  : 

bkarva 
..  T  ;  • 

Pass, 

baisa 

T 

bfcaa 

t  :  • 

bswa 

r  : 

93 


X.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  $  55. 


KAL. 


NIPHAL. 


PI  EL. 


HIPHLL.  HITHPAEI. 


Pret.  3  171. 

3/ 

2  m, 

2/ 

1  c. 

Plur.  3  c. 

2  m. 

2/ 

1  c. 


nbia 

nnbia 

r  :  it 

mnbis 

rnbt 

:  -  -  t 

Tinbio 


nbia 
nnbizi 

T»  •  •  T  •  • 

•  •  •  • 

nnb*ii3  nnbuj 


—  •  • 


“■’bibn 


7* 

i 


mbds 


R 


IT 


cnnbcd 

•  •  •  *  • 

■jnnbib 

I  •  •  • 


Tmcs 

•  •  —  •  • 

•  • 

*nb'i3 

•  •  • 

•  • 

DFnbffl3 

•  •  •  —  •  • 

•  •  • 

;Fnb'i3 

i  ••  •  —  •  • 

I  •  •  • 


|>U J 


Tinba 

•  •  —  • 

tfibuj 

Drrib© 

•  •  •  M  • 

•  • 

itinVvO 

I  •  •  •  mm  • 

I  •  • 


scrfta  !)3ribt3  sonlffl 


i  H  > 

T 


rnb-jj- 

t  ;  -  ;  • 

nnbisn 

Tinbirn 

Jin'b^n 

•  • 

ornbiiin 

•  •  •  —  •  • 

•  •  • 

-nribirn 
!)3n  b'ibn 


»  Ji 

T 


nsmon 
' '  :ndn 
nnsnizirt 

t  :  -  -  :  • 

rnbrran 

TiHinicn 

•  •  •  .  •  • 

•  • 

sinbrrin 
•  • 

Dpnbrvojn 

•  •  •  —  ”  •  9 

•  •  • 

■imbFran 

I  v  :  ■  -  •  • 

*)3nbrYajn 


Infix.  Absol. 

rribia 

-  T 

•^1  •  . 

TOTES 
—  •  • 

i*  . 

TOTE 

tm  •• 

nbojn 
•  »•  •  • 

Constr. 

ribizj 
—  • 

• 

nbian 

"  T  . 

tL  • 

iv 

i  1  pu 

7® 

J  1 

• 

nbrra'n 
•  —  • 

• 

Fdt.  3  m. 

3  f 

nbti"' 
—  •  • 

• 

nb'in 

nbi2' 

•  T- 

fibian 

"  T  • 

nb-izr 

• 

nbran 
^  >  • 

ri'b'a-' 

-  •  :  - 

rrSiEn 

r:brnij-' 

—  •  • 

• 

mbmcn 

2  m. 

rfron 

•  •  • 

nbiijn 

~  T  • 

nStin 

■F 1  • 

trb^ri 

-i 

nbny:n 

2  /• 

‘fib'on 
•  •  •  • 

*TibiBn 

•  :  it  • 

‘frb’en 
•  •  —  • 

•  •  •  — 

“nbnirn 

1  c. 

nb’vds 
—  •  •  • 

“bias 

"  T  V 

n|iD$ 

rr3*« 

nbri'iiH 

Plur .  3  m. 

sinb’aa** 

•  •  • 

^ribTzr 

:  it  • 

tbbTir 

•  • 

iirt'b'i1' 

*1! 

•  —  •  • 

s. 

CO 

nsnbtn 

T  *  *■  •  • 

1  •  • 

*  i  . 

TOnb'sn 

T  *  "  —  • 

I  •  • 

Pijinbajp 

t  ;  -  :  - 

1 1  . 

P3H  ^1231*1 

t  :  -  t  • 

» i.i  i^rv^OT 

T  •  “  -  •  • 

1  •  • 

2  m. 

iifibttn 

•  •  • 

nnbu3n 

;  it  • 

sinbtzjn 

^in-’b-cn 
•  • 

^nbrnrn 

2  f. 

nanbizin 

t  :  *  :  • 

TOrrbTBn 

t  :  -  t  • 

^  .. _ 

^  • 

t  ;  •  -  : 

t  111  Jwi-| 

r  :  •  2 

*  "3r, 

r  ;  "  ;  • 

1  c. 

rtbd3 

•  •  • 

• 

nb^3 

"  T  • 

fib®  3 

MB  • 

• 

1  1  vW. 

—  •  •  M 

nbrrx3 

Imper.  2  ra. 

nb’j: 

nbiBrt 

-  T  • 

¥  * 
tots 

nsFiwn 

2/ 

‘’frbiD 
•  :  • 

■’nbion 

•  2  IT  • 

B-V..; 

i 

•  •  — 

rrb'sn 
•  •  — 

^nbFi^r: 

PZw.  2  m. 

Alibis 

• 

*1) 

:  it  • 

*iHbir 

irr’bTsn 
•  •  • 

JinbP'in 

9  mm  m  0 

2/ 

nsHbisn 

t  ;  -  t  • 

_Yi 

v 

t _  j _  ^  _ _  •  i _ 

r  •  •  • 

•  •  • 

I  iml  \  ^  W 
r  :  '  ■ 

1  j  Jl  1  J  W »  l 

t  :  ”  :  ~ 

1  iml  1 

r  •  "  •  •  • 

•  •  • 

Part. 

nbia 
•  •• 

•i  . 

1  ■^ImJmm 

mm  ••  —  • 

V 

n  >u  J 
•  •  •  • 

nbrncs 
—  •  •  • 

Pass. 

rrfiw 

”  T 

nbiD3 

t  :  • 

94 


XI. 

Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun 

Verbs,  §  5 

6. 

KAL. 

NIPUAL. 

hiphil. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

Pket.  3  m . 

tis 

—  r 

tip 

t'in 
•  • 

•  1 

in  •»  ™ 

L J'JSI  \ 

—  \ 

#3 

3/ 

rraro 

t  ;  it 

nizilu 

t  :  • 

nir^n 

T  •  • 

5"I123*3fl 

T  :  \ 

nsns 

t  ;  it 

2  m. 

ntis 

t  ;  — r 

ntis 

t  :  —  • 

p  iii  3  n 

t  :  —  • 

F:w  3P 

T  :  —  \ 

nns 

T  —  T 

2  /• 

ntis 

:  :  — i 

ntis 

•  •  —  • 

•  • 

rntin 
•  • 

P 1233  m 
•  •  % 

nit 

:  —  r 

1  c. 

'ntis 

•  :  -t 

•ntis 
•  •  —  • 

• 

'ntin 
•  •  —  • 

• 

Train 
•  :  ~  % 

'nts 

•  — T 

PZwr.  3  c. 

teas 

:  it 

ifas 
•  • 

• 

*it*in 
•  • 

*1123  sn 

:  \ 

nins 

:  it 

2  m. 

DntSS 
•  •  •  mmm  • 

•  •  • 

ontas 
•  •  —  • 

*  • 

nntan 

v  :  —  • 

nntan 
•••  :  —  ••• 

nnns 

•  •  mm  • 

•  • 

2/ 

intas 

nntan 

1  v  :  —  • 

nntan 

I  •  •  •  —  • 

1  •  •  *• 

inns 

1  •  • 

1  c. 

ntis 

:  — t 

ns  tis 

•  —  e 

• 

ns  tin 
•  —  • 

ns  tin 
• 

•.sr: 

—  T 

Infix.  Absol. 

»  •  i  . 

mas 

T 

tisn 

T  * 

tin 

■  M  B»  Ism 

123  tu  i 
••  •% 

1*3 

Constr. 

ms  is 
•  •  •  • 

•  • 

tisn 

•  •  T  • 

i irsn 

nn 

•  « 

Fut.  3  m. 

tin 
—  • 

tin 

•T  * 

t“i‘ 

ti' 

*% 

1 

I  •«  • 

3/ 

tin 

mmm  • 

tisn 

*  ’  T  * 

t'in 

•  MM, 

tin 

• 

• 

•tin 

2  ra. 

tin 

123  33F1 

••  T  • 

man 

tin 

____  • 

• 

« 

!*«? 

2/ 

'tan 
•  •  • 

• 

't'asn 

•  :  it  • 

“'t^in 
•  •  — 

'tan 
•  :  ••• 

'inn 
•  •  • 

• 

1  c. 

•tis 
— *  • 

tisx 

••T  V 

t'aa 

ti» 

-  • 

• 

• 

ins 

I  ••  V 

Plur .  3  m. 

• 

ita' 

•  • 

• 

ntas' 

;  it  • 

rt'i' 

•  — • 

nts' 

nro 
•  • 

• 

S 

CO 

rot  in 

t  ;  —  • 

rotisn 

t  ;  **r  • 

i~i3l233P 

t  :  — 

nii233P 

-mm  •  • 

T  . 

(^n) 

2  m. 

siicsn 

• 

• 

iitasn 

:  it  • 

nt-an 
•  ■ 

ntan 

•  * 

•  *. 

nnn 
•  • 

2/ 

fiiirBrn 

t  :  —  • 

rotisn 

t  :  -t  • 

f"ij!23  3P 

t  :  ••  — 

rot  in 

-mm  « - • 

T  .  —  % 

(nsnn) 

1  c. 

tis 
—  • 

tiss 

**  T  • 

t'is 

•  mmm 

•  1 

•  “  m 

UJJiJ 

• 

fp. 

Impee.  2  m. 

1233 

tisn 

••  r  • 

123 'IK 
•  •  __ 

t- 

2/ 

•’is'a 

• 

• 

'fasn 

•  :  it  • 

't'in 
•  — 

wanting 

'in 

•  • 

Plur.  2 

*ita 

• 

• 

iitasn 

:  it  • 

nt'an 

tn 

2/ 

rota 

t  :  — 

r  :  **t  • 

rot  in 

t  :  — 

(nsni 

\  T  **  / 

Part. 

•  1  • 

mas 

•  • 

t'in 
•  — • 

fP 

Pass. 

tnis 

T 

tis 

T  • 

tin 

T  \ 

1 

XII. 

Paradigm 

of  Ayin 

KAL. 

XIPHAL. 

PIES* 

Peet.  3  m. 

r 

—  T 

1 

no 

nos 

— T 

1  • 

MM.  |2 

•  • 

3/ 

i 

nnos 

T  — r 

. .  _ lb- 

»  u.D 

t  :  it 

)  Uiw 

T  — 

1  Iww  W 

T  :  i 

2  m. 

(™?9) 

nine 

T  — 

ninos 

t  — : 

nnnio 

t  :  — 

2/ 

(^;=) 

ni:ng 

nine? 

• 

nsnio 

•  • 

1  <?. 

•nnho 

•  :  —  t 

•ntoo 
•  — 

TfhOS 
•  —  • 

• 

•nnnio 

•  •  — 

P?wr.  3  c . 

ihno 

:  it 

too 

toes 

— T 

iwJ  w 

:  i 

2  771. 

/p-, - A 

ohino 

•  •  MM 
• 

chinos 

•  •  MW  • 

•  • 

chore 

•  •  •  —  | 

•  •  1 

2  /• 

093?) 

in^g 

•nines 

1  ••  —  • 

»  •  • 

■ihnro 

1  v  :  —  i 

1  c. 

isnno 

:  —  t 

isihg 

isihes 

• 

!)snnio 

MM 

• 

Infix.  Absol* 

nine 

T 

.  i 

no 

nion 

• 

1  • 

nnio 

»* 

Constr. 

.i 

223 

• 

• 

.i 

no 

non 
•  •  • 

1  • 

nn*c 

•  • 

Fut.  3  777. 

.  i 

no* 

T 

.i 

23^ 

• 

2tT 

MW  • 

1  • 

•  •  • 

• 

3/. 

non 

T 

.» 

nsn 

• 

23F 
—  • 

onion 
•  •  • 

• 

2  777. 

non 

T 

non 

• 

HOP) 

onion 

: 

2/. 

'non 

•  T 

^isn 
•  :  • 

‘non 

•  MW  • 

•onion 

•  I  • 

1  c. 

Plur.  3  vi. 

3  /• 


SOS 

toC‘ 

T 

nstoo  n 


.i 


nos 
•  • 

toO' 

•  • 

nsnon 


nos 


nsnon 

t  :  —  • 


Mies 


‘U«.  iw 

:  »  : 


:n 


2  777. 

2/ 

1  c. 

•» 

12DP, 

T 

nnhon 

t  v  •.  : 

.i 

nos 

T 

toon 
•  • 

• 

nsnon 

t  ; 

23  j 
• 

133P1 

ronem 

T  ;  —  • 

233 

l22icn 

•  i  • 

mIZ^wFI 

M  •  •  •  • 

■  •  • 

1  . 

nnios 

•  •  • 

• 

ImPEE.  2  777. 

• 

no 

MW  • 

1  • 

3312 

•• 

2/ 

.i. 

•no 

• 

1 

*23»  i 

•  MM  • 

i  • 

*nro 

•  :  i 

Plur.  2  777. 

too 

•Q3H 

MM  • 

*1——  2 
:  i 

2/. 

i 

•—  »-M  M, 

1  )-  «i.w 

T  V 

1  , 

♦  i.mU)  i 
t  :  —  • 

• 

I  l.ww  W 

t  :  •• 

Part.  ^1c£. 

Pass. 

1  • 

n^±c 

T 

• 

M  **  ~ 

rr 

1  • 

•  •  • 

• 

96 


Doubled 

Verbs,  $  57. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPIIAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

PIEL. 

2C“ 

•  •  •  • 

A 

'  nen 

nnnen 

•  •  •  • 

• 

itcnc 

men 

nnem 

i  • 

nssincn 

,  1 

>  ceeo 

■j*  •  •  •  • 

T  — 

t  :  |  :  • 

t  ;  ;  • 

nrnen 

nnnin.cn 

Flw-w 

r  • 

•  —  •  • 
v  •  • 

*  •  • 

trine  n 

•  -j 

nnninen 

•  •  —  •  • 

•  •  • 

nncnc 
•  •  _ _  .  • 

•  •  • 

nrnen 
•  •  — • 

nnnncn 

•  •  »  •  • 

•  • 

nncnc 
•  • 

men 

•  •  •• 

men 

nnnncn 

•  1  •  • 

•  1  • 

iieno 

• 

Dnmen 

•  •  •  •• 

•  • 

ennninen 

•  •  •  —  •  •  • 

•  •  1  • 

qfocso 

« •  •  ___  *  . 

•  *  • 

ihmcn 

nnnncn 

nncnc 

1  ••  •  — • 

F  •  • 

1  *  •  |  • 

1  •  •  •  «■  •  • 

mien 
•  —  • 

• 

nnnncn 
•  —  •  • 

•  • 

.  1 

‘ij.JO-'U 

nen 

•*  T 

nen 

•*  T 

nnnen 

•  •  •  •  • 

••  T 

nen 

nine 

•  •  •  • 

• 

iiene" 

1  ••  :  -  ; 

nen 

••  T 

nen 

nnnen 

•  •  •  • 

• 

iicncn 

I  •  •  •  — •  • 

•  •  • 

nen 

••  r 

nen. 

nnnen 

•  •  • 

• 

riencn 

I  •  •  *  — »  • 

men 

mtbn 

"nninen 

menen 

•  ••  T 

•  — 

•  :  |  :  • 

•  •  •  • 

•  •  • 

nea 

••  r 

ncia 

nninea 

•  •  •  •  • 

•  • 

me-1 

••  r 

men 

none*' 

•  1  • 

incnc" 

nrnen 

nmninen 

ntnenen 

T  •  •  •  • 

-*-•••  •  • 

■  •  • 

T  •  •  •  •  —  • 

■  ■  •  • 

men 

••  T 

men 

nnnncn 

:  1  :  • 

^nenen 

•  •  — .  • 

nrnen 

ntnnincn 

ntnenen 

r  •  •  •  • 

■  •  • 

T  *  •  •  *  • 

•  •  •  •  —  • 

■  •  •  • 

net 

••T 

nen 

nninct 

•  •  •  • 

• 

iicnct 

1  •  •  •  —  • 

1  •  • 

nen 

••  r 

nninen 

•  •  •  • 

• 

k*am 

"nnnen 

"none 

•  ••  T 

1 

wanting 

•  •  1  •  • 

•  1  • 

| 

•  •  — 

•  • 

men 

••  T 

mnnen 

•  1  • 

I  • 

M  — “ ■  — ■  *■— » 

inone 

*  * 

•  • 

rid  sen 

1  lissinen 

t  v  • 

r  *  ••  •  • 

■  •  • 

T  •  ••  •  — 

r  •  • 

non 

•  •  •• 

nninen 

•  •  •  • 

• 

1  •  • 

ncm 

T 

; 

97 


XIII.  Paradigm,  of  Ayin  Vav 


KAL. 

NIPUAL. 

PIEL. 

PLAL. 

Pret.  3  m . 

nip: 

1  T 

oip 

Dip 

3/ 

nap 

T  *T 

naps 

T  >  T 

ri/b"jip 

T  •  *  | 

niap 

T  :  ‘i 

2  771. 

niip3 

naip 

naip 

2  /• 

nitp3 

naip 

riw-ip 
;  :  —  * 

1  c. 

piip? 

• 

Tiaiip 
•  :  —  * 

1  • 

FI/-/-  p 
•  :  —  * 

PZwr.  3  c. 

^1? 

top? 

.  i 

•1/2 /J  :p 

i  *1 

toap 

2  m. 

nnap 

nhiaps 

v  *  i  : 

DltoDp 

v  :  —  'i 

Dnaap 

v  :  —  » i 

2/ 

WE 

ww 

iW? 

1  C. 

• 

i3i?bp3 

• 

*lJWJ  y 

.  i  • 

k.a^ii.na 

*  1  a  — /—  j  ^ 

Infix.  Absol. 

nip 

Dpn 

Constr . 

Dp 

Dpn 

D'bip 

Fut.  3  m. 

dp: 

nip: 

Dip* 

Dip: 

3/ 

Dpn 

Dpn 

| 

i  • 

u/2  ipn 

u/- ipn 

2  m. 

Dpn 

Dpn 

Dapn 

••  1  l 

Dipn 

2/ 

topn 

topn 

*iaipn 
•  1  • 

*iapn 

•  :  ‘i  : 

1  c. 

Dps 

Dips 

Dips 

Dips 

PZ^7\  3  m. 

top* 

^‘P . 

iiap* 

:  >i  : 

•l—  —  .i> 

:  : 

3/ 

nrinpn 

t  v  *  : 

•  i 

»  1-2 

t  :  1 

nsaipn 

t  ;  ••  *  ; 

1  • 

i  I-  — 

t  :  —  •  : 

2  m. 

topn 

toipn 

toapn 

:  f  i  : 

toapn 
•  f  1  • 

2/ 

nsPton 

T  ••  1  * 

*  •  • 

nsaipn 

t  :  J  • 

nsaipn 

t  ;  ••  1  ; 

I  • 

»  iw /-/-"  > FI 

t  :  —  i  : 

1  c. 

®P? 

Dip? 

Dip? 

Dip? 

Imper.  2  m. 

Dp 

D'pn 

Dip 

2/ 

• 

-r\ 

.  » 

/.3pn 

■'■bap 
•  :  1 1 

wanting 

PZwr.  2  m. 

^p 

iiap 

:  h 

2/ 

•  1 

.  i 

1  • 

»  IJ  -  a-  Ip 

»  U  — p 

» i  j- ipn 

t  :  1 

Part. 

Dipa 

Pass. 

Dp 

Dp3 

1  T 

• 

Dipa 

T  *  i 

98 


AND  AYIN 

Yodii  Verbs,  $59. 

HIPHIL. 

nopnAL. 

HITI1PAEL. 

KAL. 

Q'l?“ 

Dp® 

D/biprn 

» 

Dr 

T 

■  — » 

rrrpn 

irbp® 

r  t : 

rtbaipm 

t  :  »,  ;  • 

iiDr 

T  T 

ntb'pn 

(W^~) 

nabipnn 

mr 

t  ;  — 

nin-r 

T  •  • 

r>Ti-iprj 

naa*ipnn 

:  ;  —  >  ;  • 

nnr 

mmm 

•  • 

*’piti,pn 

(trofesin) 

®D/bipr® 

®pr 

• 

®ibrr 
•  • 

^'p“ 

®p® 

' :  i 

®aipr® 

ton 

T 

iD'r 

• 

ohiirpn 

...  j,. 

(Di®p®) 

Dr®Dipnn 
•  •  •  |  * 

DFlD“l 

•  •  •  mM 

•  • 

■Ri-’l-q 

•nDDipr® 

1 

ictrpn 

( ®pp® ) 

iiDD/bipnn 

i3pr 

• 

Qpn 

Dir 

D® 

• 

Q'Pv 

D’bipnn 

• 

in 

• 

D'p’’ 

DpV 

obiprv' 

• 

:rr 

•  T 

.  Q'pn 

*  •  T 

Dp® 

D'biprn 

• 

D*nn 

•  T 

trpr) 

Dp® 

D’biprn 

• 

D‘rn 

•  T 

rirpn 

"’/bp® 

•  1 

rbDiprn 

®®n 

*  *  T 

D'PN 

Dpitf 

D/bipn^ 

..  i  .  ... 

D“n» 

•  r 

^“'Pr 

^■bpv 

> :  i 

®Diprr 

iD®*’ 

•  r 

reafcn 

t  :  !••  t 

(rpap®) 

n®*bipr® 

t  :  ••  i  :  • 

n:Drn 

T  ;  t 

®'pn 

!)5Dp® 

1 :  i 

i'b’piprn 

iD'^n 

•  T 

reapn 

T  J  1 •*  T 

(“PrP®) 

n®/bipr® 

1 

» i.-inn 

t  ;  r 

Q'P? 

Dp>D 

D/biprij 

•  •I  •  • 

•  T 

Qpn 

D/bipnn 

1 

zrn 

• 

^'r*PP* 

wanting 

rhaipr® 

■D® 

•  • 

^'PO 

®Diprn 

i]D‘r 

• 

1 

» impn 

t  ;  t 

riS/j/biprfi 

(ratfj 

dt® 

1  •  •• 

D/bipnD 

nn 

r 

D]b® 

D^r 

99 


XIV 

Paradigji  of 

Pe  Yodii 

Veres,  §  58. 

KAL. 

NIPIIAL. 

HipniL. 

no  petal. 

K  A I.. 

Pbet.  3  m. 

f  • 

_  w 

—  r 

awt 

1  •  . 

a"wm 

• 

awin 

nii-’ 

**  T 

3  f. 

♦  >  —  wU 
r  :  IT 

t  :  i 

na-win 

T  • 

nawin 

T  :  1 

•  . 

BBi  KB.  BM  m 

S  *  U-  — 

t  :  it 

2  771. 

.  1  • 

m 

1’  —  UJ 
t  ;  —  r 

naira 

t  ;  — 

nawin 

t  ;  — 

nawin 

t  ;  — 

•  i 

■( 

l-iu„ 
t  :  — t 

2/ 

raw" 

•  •  —  T 

nawiD 

•  •  mm 

•  • 

nawin 
•  • 

nawin 

•  •  .MB 

•  • 

nwa' 

•  •  —  r 

•  •  » 

1  c. 

"naw" 

•  :  —  r 

"nawiD 

0 

• 

"nawin 

• 

• 

"nawin 
•  — • 

• 

"nwa" 

•  :  —  t 

Plur.  3  c. 

law" 

:  it 

idwiD 
*  1 

to"win 

• 

1  • 

iioii  i 

:  i 

*\99%  *  * 

•IvE— 

:  it 

2  m. 

anaw" 

•  •  •  — ■  • 

•  •  • 

anawiD 

V  :  -  1 

□nawin 

••  •  MB  | 

•  •  1 

□nawin 

•  •  —  a 

•  •  1 

onwa" 

•  •  •  MB  • 

•  •  • 

2  /• 

inaw" 

1  •  •  •  —  • 

/  •  •  • 

inawiD 

)  v  :  —  i 

inawin 

)  v  :  —  | 

inawin 

1  v  :  —  | 

1 

iPIwm. 

1  ••  •  mmm  • 

1  •  •  • 

1  c. 

ItoW" 

:  —  t 

iDawiD 

• 

aawin 

MM 

• 

itowin 

•  sm* 

• 

nwa* 

:  — t 

1  ^ 

Infix.  Absol. 

•  1  • 
aiw" 

T 

1  •  • 

awin 

•  • 

.  .  i 

xn*\T 

r 

Constr. 

raw 

•  •  •  • 

•  • 

awin 

••T  * 

a-win 

• 

awin 

• 

• 

Fut.  3  m. 

nizr 
•  •  •  • 

awi" 

•*T  • 

a"wi" 

• 

awi" 

—  • 

3/ 

awn 

•  •  •  • 

awin 

•*T  • 

\ .  . 

*■)  maiB, <BB 

J>  PI 

• 

awin 

wa'n 

MM  • 

2  771. 

awn 

•  •  •  • 

2Win 

••T  • 

a-win 

• 

awin 

wa'n 

2/. 

"dwn 

•  •  1 

"dwin 

•  ;it  • 

to'win 

• 

-awin 
•  :  1 

"wa'n 

•  :  I* 

1  0. 

ZWK 

•  •  •  • 

awix 

•*T  • 

a-wiix 

• 

awis 

xchrtu 
—  • 

Plur.  3  77i. 

toW" 

:  i** 

idwi" 

:it  • 

to"wi" 

• 

idwi" 

:  1 

n:awin 

t  :  — 

* . 

BB 

*1^— 

:  i* 

3/ 

n:awn 

t  :  — 

nann 

t  ;  **t  • 

n :::  win 

t  :  •• 

n:  wa'n 

t  :  — 

town 

:  r* 

i  « 

law® 

:>t  • 

i 

la-win 

• 

» .  . 

law  in 
:  1 

1  • 

kid  — B  B  MM 

2  771. 

2/ 

TO-  Pi 

:  i* 

•  1 

r  ;  — 

riL— 

t  :  «t  • 

n:aw® 

t  :  •• 

mI— 125*11*1 

t  :  - 

»  iTOi'P 

t  :  — 

1  c. 

i  • 

ninD 

•  •  •  • 

airiD 

•*T  • 

•  •  • 

Z'WlD 

• 

awiD 

wd"3 
—  • 

Impee.  2  ra. 

1  • 

•  • 

awin 

•*T  • 

i.  . 

awin 

•  • 

•  r 

wa* 

M  • 

• 

2/ 

Plur .  2  m. 

“’2125 
•  • 

law 

• 

•  . 

1 

JiDm  i 

•  :it  • 

lawin 

:it  • 

• . 

»  iL-im 

t  :  »*t  • 

"a-win 

•  • 

to"Win 

• 

.  .  1  •  • 

wanting 

1  . 

TO-"' 

•  •  • 

• 

lira" 

•  • 

• 

•  1 

2/ 

»  t.— >3 

t  :  •• 

nDawm 

r  :  *• 

n:wa- 

r  :  — : 

Part.  ^4c^. 

1  • 

HUT 

•  • 

a-wia 

• 

•  i  • 

wa" 

•  • 

Pass. 

aiw" 

r 

».  . 

awa 

T 

awiw 

T 

.  i 

■ 

ObTO 

T 

100 


I  XV. 

Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs 

§  60. 

- 

KAL. 

KIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

niPHiL. 

II1TIIPAEL.  j 

Pret.  3  m . 

Naa 

T  T 

% 

Naa: 

t  ;  • 

Naa 

•  •  • 

N*aan 
•  • 

• 

* 

Naann  ' 

••  MM  •  • 

• 

if 

naiaa 

t  :  it 

~Naa: 

T  •  • 

•  •  • 

nNaa 

t  :  • 

l 

nNnaan 

t  •  :  • 

nNaann 
■  •  * 

2  m. 

nNaa 

t  t  r 

nNaa: 

t  • 

rasa 

T  • 

nNaan 

t  • 

nNaann 

r  —  ;  • 

2  /. 

nNaa 

T  T 

nNaa: 

•  •  •  * 

• 

r.Naa 
•  •  • 

nNaan 
•  •  •  • 

• 

nNaann 

♦  •  — •  9 

• 

1  c. 

•nNaa 

•  T  T 

•nNaa: 

•  ••  •  9 

• 

•nNaa 
•  ••  • 

•nNaan 

•  ••  •  • 

•nNaann 
•  •  •  —  •  • 

• 

Plur ,  3  0. 

*iNaa 

:  it 

nNaa: 

•  •  • 

•  • 

nNaa 
•  • 

• 

nN-aan 

•  :  * 

NNaann 

2  w. 

ansaa 

•  •  T  * 

•  1  • 

an Naa: 

V  ••  j  • 

ariNaa 

an Naan 

•  •  «•  •  • 

•  • 

oh Naann 

#  •  •  •  —  •  • 

•  • 

2/. 

linxaa 

!  V  t  ; 

nnNaa: 

i  •  •  •  •  •  • 

i  •  • 

nhNaa 

r  v  ••  • 

in Naan 

•nNaann 

}  v  ••  —  :  • 

1 

aNaa 

T  T 

a  Naa: 

•  •  •  • 

• 

a  Naa 
•  •  • 

a  Naan 

*•  :  • 

NNaann 
•  •  — —  •  • 

• 

Infin.  Absol. 

r 

Naa: 

• 

Naa 

Naan 

•  ♦  •  mm 
• 

Constr, 

Naa 

• 

Naan 

••  T  • 

Naa 

• » 

N-aan 

Naann 

*•  —  *  9 
• 

Fut.  3  m. 

Naa“ 

t  :  • 

Naa'’ 

..  T . 

Naa11 
•  •  —  • 

• 

N-anr 

• 

Naan“ 

••  —  ;  • 

3/ 

Naan 

t  ;  • 

Naan 

••  T  • 

Naan 

•  •  —  • 

• 

N-aan 
•  — ■ 

• 

Naann 

•  •  M—  •  « 

• 

2  m. 

Naan 

t  :  • 

Naan 

••  T  • 

Naan 
•  •  —  • 

• 

N^aan 
•  <— 

• 

Naann 

•  •  M  •  9 
• 

2/ 

*Naan 
•  •  •  • 

•  • 

■’Naan 

•  :  it  • 

•  Naan 

-N^aan 
•  •  •— 

• 

•Naann 
•  :  —  :  • 

1  £. 

NaaN 

T  •  •• 

T  •  • 

NaaN 

••  T  V 

NaaN 
•  •  —  —  • 

N-aaN 
•  •  — 

NkanN 

.  v 

Plur .  3  wi. 

siNaa^ 

•  •  • 

•  • 

nNaa“ 

:  it  • 

nkaa“ 

•  _  • 

•  9 

iiN'aa: 

• 

nNaan  • 

—  •  9 

•  • 

3  /• 

niNaan 

r  v  :  • 

n*Naan 

T  V  t  • 

n:Naan 

T*  •  •  —  • 

»  •  * 

n:Naan 

T  •  •  •  — 

*  •  • 

n:Naann 

r  v  —  :  • 

2  772. 

^aan 

:  :  • 

nNaan 

:  it  • 

nNaan 

•  __  • 

•  • 

nN*aan 
•  — 

• 

nNaann 

2/. 

n:Naan 

t  v  :  • 

n:Naan 

T  V  T  • 

n:Naan 

T"  •  •  — i  • 

'  •  • 

n:Naan 

-p  •  •  •  — • 

•  *  « 

nrNaann 

t  v  —  :  • 

1  c. 

Naa3 

t  :  • 

Naa: 

•'  T  • 

Naa: 

•  •  —  • 

• 

N*aa: 

•  •  — 

• 

Naan: 

•  •  MM  •  t 

I MPEE.  2  m. 

Naa 

t  : 

N^an 
..  T  . 

Naa 

•  •  mm 

Naan 

•  •  •  — 

• 

Naann 

• 

2/. 

•’Naa 
•  •  • 

• 

■’Naan 

•  :  it  • 

■’Naa 

•  MM 
• 

•Nraan 
•  •  •  — 

• 

•Naann 

Plur.  2  m. 

nNaa 
•  • 

• 

nNaan 

:  it  • 

ntkaa 

nN“aan 
•  •  — 

• 

NNaann 

2/ 

n:  Naa 

-»■  •  •  • 

•  •  • 

n:Naan 

T  V  T  • 

n:Naa 

T  V  “ 

n:Naan 

T  • •  •  MM 

i  •  • 

n:Naann 1 

t  v  —  ;  • 

Part. 

Naa 

•  • 

Naaa 

• 

N*aaa 

•  •  MM 
• 

Naana 
••  —  :  • 

Pass. 

N*IS<3 

r 

Naa: 

r  :  • 

101 


XVI. 

Paradigm 

op  Lamedh 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

Pjset.  3  m. 

ro3 

t  r 

)  0-0 

t  :  • 

nba 

T  • 

3/ 

nr.ba 

t  ;  it 

nr.':  an 

T  *  *  • 

nhba 

T  S  • 

2  m. 

T  •  T 

r*ba: 

r  ••  •  • 

■  • 

r-'ba 

T  *  • 

2/ 

rrba 

•  T 

rrbas 
•  •  •  • 

T 1 

r,6a 

• 

1  c. 

'nvj 

•  •  r 

*r*bbo 
•  ••  •  • 

vr:a 
•  •  • 

Plur.  3  c , 

6a 

T 

6a: 

•  • 

» i 

6a 

• 

2  m. 

Crr:  a 
•  •  •  • 

•  • 

on  6a: 

••  ••  •  • 

•  • 

errba 
...  .  . 

2/ 

*th*?a 

Iv  •  : 

■,r6a: 

1  v  ••  :  • 

\i\ 

j  ...  .  . 

1  c. 

*irba 

•  r 

iirba: 

•  •  •  • 

• 

n-'ba 
•  • 

Infix.  Absol. 

nba 

r 

t  Jl  ) 

»  03D 
•  • 

t— ’V'» 
i  Oil 

Constr. 

rrib'a 

• 

• 

n6an 

r  • 

mba 

Fut.  3  m . 

»• 

n:a* 

v  :  • 

» 

V  T  • 

M 

roro 

•  •  -M  • 

3/ 

v  :  • 

nb3n 

V  T  • 

w_V - 1 

•  *  — »  • 

•  • 

2  m. 

nb  an 

v  :  • 

nb'an 

V  T  • 

i-V — 1 

1  li-'F 

H  —  • 

• 

2/. 

6  an 
•  •  • 

• 

*b'an 

•  T  • 

•'ban 
•  — .  • 

• 

1  c. 

—i:-* 

•  •  •  •• 

•  •  • 

nb'aa 

•  •  r  •  • 

•  •  • 

nbaa 
•  •  —  —  • 

• 

Pfor.  3  w. 

6a* 

•  • 

• 

6a"1 

T  • 

.it 

6a* 

S 

CO 

nrban 

tv:* 

nrb'an 

T  V  T  • 

nrban 

T  V  <a~  * 

2  w. 

6an 
•  • 

6an 

T  • 

6an 

2/ 

»  1-  JjD 

TVS  • 

nrbsn 

T  V  T  • 

i  i 

ta-i  — — 

t  v  —  ; 

1  c. 

-U-h 

» 

v  :  • 

nbaa 

V  T  • 

ro:o 

•  •  —  • 

•  • 

Imper.  2  m. 

si 

»  03 

•  •  • 

!rib3t"! 

••  t  * 

•  i 

ro3 

2/ 

*:a 

• 

• 

hlUb- 

•  T  * 

•  1 

h>3 

PJwr.  2  ra. 

.u- 

•Uil 

hH-b- 

*12in  i 

T  * 

6  a 

2/ 

»  1-  s  'J 

T  ••  • 

■  •  • 

n- 

T  V  T  • 

nrba 

T  V  — 

Part.  ^4c£. 

nba 

»  1 

1  O-vJ 

v  —  i 

Pass, 

*6a 

r 

»  l>-lj 

v  :  • 

102 


He  Verbs,  §  61 


PUAL. 

IIIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

7  1 

•**  ~ 

1  \*i.\ 

T  *. 

nbsn 

t  :  • 

nbsn 

t  :  t 

msspm 

i  —  •  • 

nnba 

-r>  •  • 

nnbsn 

T  j  j  • 

nrban 

r  ;  ;  t 

nnbsnn 

r  *  —  •  • 

n-'ba 

T  ••  \ 

n*  ssm 

t  •  :  • 

n-ban 

r  ••  :  r 

■  •  , 
p^sru  > 

T  •  —  ;  • 

7  i 

n 

••  *. 

^•L* - . 

i  Jjl  i 
•  •  • 

rrban 

••  ;  t 

r-b'ann 
•  —  -  • 

Tr'b'a 
•  ••  •. 

-n-ban 

•  •  •  • 

-rrban 

•  ••  ;  t 

-n-ban  n 
•  •  —  • 

6a 

*• 

6an 
•  • 

6an 

:  *' 

6ann 

on-ba 

v  •  •  •• 

on-ban 

M  •  •  • 

on-ban 

v  :  t 

oirbann 

••  •  — i  •  • 

lil 

IV  ••  \ 

7  1 

tall  m  a=n  m 

*]J 

in-ban 

iv  •  ; 

rrban 

irrbann 

v  •  —  :  • 

ta-toU'-tan 

I-  1 

irbbn 

n-bann 

••  % 

•  •  • 

• 

*• :  t 

i  «.  •  • 

• 

(rfk) 

tonL'-n- 

»  JtaW*  i 
•  •  • 

ta-U'-ta- 

1  \JmW  i 
••  ;  r 

(nbann) 

nibs 

n6an 

• 

• 

(rfe) 

nibann 
—  :  • 

*  i 

tan  «■».  b.  « 

♦  1 

*  1 

ns:n 

nb'a- 

ta™  V*i»  m  i. 

♦ 

V  \  : 

•  *  •  mm 

•  • 

••  •  -r 
•  •  * 

v  —  :  • 

“Van 

v  ••  : 

“ban 

v  ;  — 

nban 

v  :  v 

nbann 

V  —  ;  • 

nssti 
•  • 

“ban 

•  •  »  mmrn 

nban 

V  ;  r 

nbann 

*.  —  ;  • 

-ban 
•  ••  : 

-ban 

-ban 

•  ;  t 

-bann 
•  —  •  • 

nbss 

V  •• 

nb'aa 
••  •  — 

nb'ax 

v  ;  t 

nbanss, 

•  •  ■*  •  •• 

6a- 

*  - 

6a- 

:  T 

6an- 

mmm  •  • 

nrbsn 

t  v  v  : 

nr  b'an 

-T-  »*  •  — 

♦  u  v^i7! 

t  v  :  t 

nrb'ann 

r  *.•  —  ;  • 

6an 

6an 

6an 

:  t 

6ann 
—  • 

nrban 

t  v  •  : 

nr  ban 

t  v  ;  — 

nrban 

r  VS  T 

nrb'ann 

r  •  •  '  • 

*  j 

— V-. 

♦  1 

nb'a: 

nb'an: 

v  \  : 

••  •  - 

•  • 

•  •  •  T~ 

•  •  1 

v  —  :  • 

n  >sri 
•  •  •  — 

• 

nbann 
••  •  • 

• 

wanting 

-ban 
•  •  — 

• 

wanting 

'SSPPl 

*  •-  • 

• 

, taU-ta- 

6'ann 

—  •  • 

nrban 

nrb'ann 

T  ••  •  — 

r  v  —  ;  • 

*  UJ/J 

nban  o 

« i 

ton  "  ■  ■*, 

♦  1  'J 

•  • 

♦  \JJU 

•  •  • 

V  \  : 

v  :  t 

_ i 

103 


r 


XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47. 


0^7, 


:  i 


•  •  • 


I.  Nouns  which  suffer  a  change  in  the  vowels  only. 

i.  With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 

.  '  I  I  I 

.Sing  Abs*  “pIN*  master  Const .  1-jl^  Pl.  Abs.  Const. 

'  ,  T  I  .  ‘  *:  '•  L: 

•  .  '  '  ' 
*11*127  memorial  "p-pT 

J  „  • 

Y”1  1  *2  interpreter  ^  Jp 

i 

Hasc  great  Fern.  Sibil  3 

▼  T 

„ 

D*t3p  Kal.  pass.  part.  HVtJp 

ii.  With  Tsere  in  the  ultimate. 
a.  Monosyllables 

1  1  .  ' 

Sing.  Abs .  yy  tree.  Const.  yy  Pl.  Abs.  Const. 

J  ••  |  •  ••  ..  -  • 

h.  Polysyllables  having  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  penult. 

.  i  ill 

Sing.  Abs:  135  heavy  Const.  *1215  or  “155  Pl.  Abs.  3n135  Const.  “'*135 


5*0157 

•  •  • 

tPtrbia 

Masc.  Q'V“3  Fem-  iTiMlS 

•  • 
i  • 


■j-itSt) 


m'Vtip 

i : 


.i  i . 

Masc.  35  3 1  thy  Fein.  ritI53n 


Masc.  L^tDZP  Fem.  trios-1 


c.  Polysyllables  having  any  other  vowel  than  Kamets  in  the 
penult. 


Sing.  Abs.  EJliffl  judge. 


Const.  ^ Si”)  Pl.  Abs.  tPt>5ir  Const.  “33  *5 


Masc.  231  KaL  Act.  part.  Fein.  7ll3l°rjri3l  Masc.  3*1 3 1 

••I  t  :  1 1  v  v  1  •  :  1 1 


natar'aorj-iatoptt  D’otapJa 

•  f.  •  •  }  •  •  f  • 


-  t^P  la  Piel  part. 

iii.  With  Kamets  in  the  ultimate. 


Fem.  niatip 
:  1 1 

nibopft 


Sing.  Abb 


j“  fish 

T 

Const. 

Pl.  Abs.  5*11 

•  T 

Const.  "11 
•  • 

i 

• 

3“1’0  sanctuary 

t  J:  • 

12%/? 

cibi-p?a 

•  t  j :  • 

i 

■‘ttflptt 

l 

13^J  word 

T  ▼ 

131 

*  • 

• 

ta-nm 

•  ’  : 

■nm 

•  •  •  • 
• 

“j53?  cloud 

T  T 

i 

V?: 

eos* 

•  T  -• 

1 

’’MS 
•  •  •  • 
• 

• 

3 lb  heart 

T  *• 

331 

3^331 

•  t  : 

ranb 

•  •  •  • 

• 

55H  wise 

T  T 

Fem,  71*0  OH 

t  r 

i 

Masc.  tr’aan 

•  t  r#. 

i  i 

Fem.  nraan 

t 

i 

1 

1311  Kiph.  part. 

t  )  :  • 

natopaorna 

t  t  J :  • 

apt)  srbopD 

EYibtJpD 

t)  :  • 

XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47. 


iv,  With  final 


i  i 


Sing.  Abs. 

MSS  172  appearance 

•  r 

Const,  nsot 
•  •  •  — 

■ 

Pl.  Abs.  D^-ia 

•  am 

• 

Const  “>£0/2 
•  •  •  — 

• 

1 

kra9  ea  brw 

1  ‘vl i  reed 

n-’i? 

^?T 

n'?i? 

■ 

Masc 

1 

"r  fair 

V  T 

1 

Fem.  HS"1 

T  T 

l 

Misc.  Qigi 

*  T 

i 

Fem.  nlS'1 

T 

v.  Segliolates. 

Sin  a.  Abs. 

1 

!jb'p  king 

i 

Const.  *nb/0 

* ;  v  v 

Pl.  Abs.  CrDb‘0 

•  t  ; 

Const.  “>2b?2 
•  •  •  — 

• 

1 

"IpO  covert 

nno 

• «  • 

• 

fntit 

•  t  : 

•nno 
•  •  •  • 

• 

i 

• 

pi  strength 

t^3> 

— 

m 

•  t  i : 

■>  73122 

••  :  t 

bp2  lord 

bP2 

-■'ZVZ 

4  T  4 

4  '■’322 
..  _;|_ 

1 

J^VO  death 

V  T 

irifr 

C1  Sri  72 

■art 

1 

yj  eye 

r? 

1 

Dual. 

•  —  •« 

•  •  •  • 

b:n  foci 

•• 

• 

b:n 
•  •  •  • 

•  i 

fbn 

•  —  •  «■» 

• 

am 
•  •  •  — 
• 

1 

PT55  ear 

COTS 

"•5t» 

••  :  t 

II.  Nouns  which  double  their  fined  consonant. 

Sing.  Abs. 

i 

camel 

T  T 

Const.  3*^3 

Pl.  Abs.  Z'Z'Z", 

•  -  ( 

• 

i 

Const.  1^735 
•  •  —  • 

• 

1 

“3  garden 

D 

t"i. 

i 

pH  statute 

PH 

fjpn 

■’pn 

1  ••  **. 

i 

VJ)  tooth 

1® 

i 

Dual. 

•  —  • 

at) 

•  •  • 

Masc . 

1 

"1^5^  small 

’  t  |r 

1 

Fem.  “Spp 

1 

Pl.  Masc. 

1 

Fem.  niSt?p. 

l 

p£2  deep 

npp” 

It-.. 

fa  722 

1  ■  \  -: 

nip  732 

r 

Abs.  i-QS*  Hebrew  Const.  i“Q3>  Pl.  Abs.  orfi"Q37  Consul 

•  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •••  •  •  *  •  • 

»  •  •  •  • 

i  III 

Masc  "i1l3  fresh  Fein.  F^Z^fase.  QV'H'E  Fem.  £yj*r|t5 

*  t  t  *  :  •  :  •  : 

III.  Other  nouns  suffer  no  change. 

i  i  i  m  i 

Sing  Jhs.  tD^Qbfa  garment  Const  ffifiSb'O  ^L-  dbs.  Q^HnSlbTS  Const  v£ri2lb)3 

•  ■  •  •  •  •  —  ••  •  — 

•  •  •  • 

i  i  i 

Masc.  nit:  good  Fem.  Masc.  trait)  Fem.  fiiiit) 

T 

b^EPE  Hiph.  part.  nDOp’t  or  f-)bt?72  t^tOt  m'b^tpt 

t  •  J :  -  v  v  I :  -  *  *  I  :  - 


T:‘ - 


v  I 


•  • 


*11'* 


1 05 


XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47 

Nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  “T- 

i.  With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 

1  '  •  '  _  .' 
Sing.  Abs.  nrr  fish  Const.  Pl.  Abs.  mai  Const. 

t  t  •  :  T  • 


HttpD  vengeance 

t  1  t  : 

nispD 

tri^p? 

i 

counsel 

T  ** 

ns* 

nii? 

•  • 

n  s? 

jQt 

Q 
-  t»v 

i: 

Dual. 

CPlStt 

•  -  t  : 

•nsir 

•  •  •  • 

• 

* • 

li. 

From  Seo’liolates. 

O 

i 

Sing.  Abs.  H3D72  queen  Const.  CllobJO  PL-  Abs. 

r  :  -  '  :  ' 

Di'Db« 

t  : 

-  i 

co»wt.  ninba 

•  •— 

• 

i 

mW  covert 

t  :  • 

i 

rninp 

• 

niins 

t  : 

rrhno 
•  • 

• 

nttES  strength 

t  :  t 

PIES* 

-  :  t 

t  t: 

•  T 

iii.  All  others. 

i 

Sing,  Abs.  HSn  garden 

t  - 

i 

Const.  ^33  Pl.  Abs. 

niaa 

i 

Const.  fn33 

i 

nS*!1©"1  salvation 

t  : 

rw'iEP. 

niimir 

• 

• 

rrii^np 

• 

• 

Nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  n. 

•  '  1  . 

Sing.  J&s-J“n)0 155* /0  observance  Co  ns  t.  fTPO 12)0  Pl-  Abs.  flYITOtp? 0 

v  v  :  •  ... 

const, 

•  • 

•  • 

i 

STPOV  sucker 
|  •  •  • 

nprn 

p  •  • 

jripb’P 

nipav 

1  :  ■ 

nbaba  stun 
•  *  •  • 

nbaba 

•  •  •  *, 

•  •  • 

i 

nibaba 

:  :  *. 

nibaba 

:  s  \ 

i  i 

J"p-Q3?  Hebrew- woman  S7p*"Q5 

...  *  i  * 

•  •  • 

• 

n  W  n  a* 

•  •  • 

i 

flWba  kingdom 

n'“)b73 

• 

i 

ni’oba 

\  :  * 

m'*Db» 

•. :  - 

XVIII.  PiRADIGM  OF 

Nouns  with 

Suffixes, 

$49. 

Singula  e. 

heart  1 2^h 

r  •• 

king 

Tibi) 

IV  V 

queen  !"]2b"3 

hand  1 

T 

Const. 

sib 

• 

Tibi 

1  •  •  •  • 

1  •  • 

rPba 

m  *  mmm 
• 

T 

Sing .  1  c.  my 

cc 

"isb 

•  t  ; 

CC 

hiba 
•  •  — » 

• 

cc 

h:roba 

•  t  ;  — 

CC 

h-p 
•  r 

2  m.  thy 

cc 

ipsb 

1  :  it: 

cc 

cc 

irfnsba 

cc 

ft 

2/.  thy 

cc 

Tiisb 

1  ••  r  ; 

cc 

cc 

Tinsba 

J  ••  v  :  — 

cc 

ft 

3  m.  his 

cc 

'iisb 

r  : 

cc 

iisba 

cc 

ihaba 

t  ;  — 

cc 

1  T 

T 

3/.  her 

cc 

nisb 

t  t  : 

a 

ttsbij 

t  :  — 

cc 

ni-oba 

r  T  :  — 

cc 

hill* 

>•!  1 

TT 

riur,  1  c.'  our 

cc 

aisb 

••  t  : 

a 

riba 
•  •  •  «■ 

cc 

rnrba 

••  r  :  — 

cc 

rP 

••T 

2  m .  your 

cc 

abash 

•  •  •  —  • 

a 

sbsba 

i^i  •  •  MB 

cc 

abnsba 

•  •  •  •  Mi 

cc 

ail' 

•  •  •  •  • 

2/.  your 

cc 

■jissb 

J  -  • 

a 

psba 

1  ••  •  •  — • 

1  •  •  • 

cc 

proba 

1  •  •  •  —  •  M« 

1  •  •  • 

cc 

rn  mx  ■■ 

p  i 

1  «»  •  •  • 
r  •  •  • 

3  m.  their 

cc 

assb 

t  t  : 

a 

Dibs 

t  ;  — 

cc 

arab  a 

t  t  :  — 

cc 

aV 

TT 

3  /.  their 

cc 

■jssb 

)  t  t  ; 

a 

pba 

1  r  ;  — 

cc 

"ihsba 

J  r  t  :  - 

*c 

TT 

)  TT 

P  L  U  E  A  L. 

Dual. 

hearts  b  kings  Qhbb/J 

*  T  *  *  T  • 

queens  fYDb*« 

hands 

Const. 

^ssb 
••  :  • 

Pba 

•  •  •  -C* 

• 

rrihba 

• 

“'T 
#*  • 

• 

Sing.  1  c.  my 

cc 

■usb 

—  r  : 

cc 

Pba 

—  r  ; 

cc 

PPba 

cc 

—  r 

2  m .  thy 

cc 

trssb 

J  V  T  ; 

a 

?riba 

J  vr  ; 

cc 

Tj'nirba 

tC 

ft: 

2/.  thy 

cc 

Trssb 

I*  —  t  ; 

cc 

TiPba 

1*  —  t  ; 

cc 

TpnPba 

cc 

ft: 

3  m.  his 

cc 

rssb 

t  r  : 

cc 

riba 

t  t  ; 

cc 

vnPba 

r  ;  — 

cc 

ri“ 

T  r 

3  /.  her 

cc 

k—  h,— ,S 

»  1  ^ 
t  v  t  ; 

cc 

♦  J  »vj 

T  v  t  ; 

cc 

rrhPba 

T  •  •  •  Mi 

cc 

T  VT 

Plur.  1  c.  our 

cc 

sirssb 

••  t  : 

cc 

rpba 

••  t  ; 

cc 

r'nPba 

•  •  •  — O 

cc 

^rv 

•*T 

2  m.  your 

cc 

si'ssb 

cc 

ah  aba 

•  •  •  •  •  mmm 

cc 

abrPba 
•  •  •  •  |  •  — 

cc 

ai'T 

A  •  •  • 

2/.  your 

cc 

■p'ssb 

cc 

paba 

1  v  ••  :  — 

cc 

P'nPba 

1  •  •  •  •  ■  *  — — 

cc 

p"“P 

1  v 

3  m.  their 

cc 

D  irrssb 

cc 

arraba 

•  •  •  •  •  — 

cc 

arrrPba 

V  •  •  (  •  — 

cc 

D!TT 
••  • 

3  f.  their 

cc 

\ *  v 

cc 

Prsba 

l  • •  • •  •  — 

1  •  • 

cc 

prtvisba 

l  •  |  . 

cc 

Trr'T' 

J  v  •• : 

107 


XIX 

Numerals, 

Cardinals. 

$  65. 

Masculine. 

Feminine 

Absol. 

Constr. 

Absol. 

Constr. 

One 

“nx 

T  V 

7I7K 

nha 

nns 

Two 

D‘20 

■’iir 
••  • 

chia 

•  MB  • 

••  • 

Three 

• 

. _ i  •? 

S  J 

r  : 

nisSia 
•  •  • 

•  • 

•V 

020 

r 

020 

• 

F  nr 

nj?2p« 

t  t  :  — 

r\'j±r& 

• 

fins 

Ml  • 

• 

7ira 

• 

Five 

i  • 

>  i 

r  • 

nn i/in 

v  ••  -? 

wan 

••  T 

•  l 

w  *  1 

•  •  —  • 

Six 

170115 

T  • 

r,00 

V  *• 

•  i  • 

00 

•  • 

•  i  • 

■■•mat 

w  W 

•  • 

Seven 

• 

has  *lui» 

\  iS  —  lJ 
t  :  • 

nfi0 
—  •  • 

• 

1  • 

*»■»  mat 

✓  —  uJ 

a  • 

• 

r'i'ii 

Eight 

fib  bin 

r  : 

n:00 
— ~  • 

1  •  • 

har  a  O^.at 

»  i^U^J 
•  •  • 

•  • 

7200 

•  •  • 

•  • 

Nine 

i  • 

ha  »a*a«« 

»  is  wi7) 

riniin 

•  1 

✓ 

1  • 

^  Ui*! 

r  :  • 


Ten 


)  i 


nwy 

t  t 


mw 

•  V  "• 


i 


V 


Eleven 

Twelve 

Thirteen 

Fourteen 

Fifteen 

Sixteen 

Seventeen 

Eighteen 

Nineteen 

T  wen  tv 

J 

Thirty 

Forty 

Fifty 


% 


7iry 

7na 

t  r 

*■ 

•  1 

'll us> 

"707 

T  T 

M  • 

• 

.  1 

1  • 

■Mf*  «* 

0*20 

T  T 

•  •  • 

• 

.  1 

1  • 

B*b  am 

■ 

■  tom  ^ 

a  W 

r  r 

•  •  • 

• 

.  i 

b*  > 

i  .*  . 

^aa.s^a* 

*  iu 'JJUJ 

T  T 

t  : 

“10" 

T  T 

t  t  ;  — 

.  1 

M»»a»  *1 

“007 

t  •  l 


m0? 

••  •  •• 

irViry 
•  •  •  •• 

•  • 

rrx 

1 

Flu,  3? 

•  a  a  M9 

• 

»  i 

•  •  •  • 

•  • 

D'F,0 

rn®y 

•  •  a  •  • 

•  • 

*F0 

•  a  • 

rhw 

•  •  •  a  • 

•  • 

0*0 

rnizjs 
•  •  •  •• 

“niry 
•  •  •  •  • 

1 

■  ayk 

s3,  A 

a  m 

a 

•  1 

a  aiiAH 

W  .  1 

•  a  —  a 

me? 


t  r 


fills  TD 

T  * 


-707 


•  i  • 

■  MAM 

W  UJ 


.  i 

h»«a»* 

IWS 

t  r 

7200 

t  :  • 

7  “02 

•  a  a  •  • 

•  • 

200 

^■a 

• 

“0" 
t  r 

7  ban: 

t  : 

rnir? 

a  •  a  a  a 
•  • 

7  200 

•  •  a 

•  a 

“107 

T  T 

i  • 

»  is  wiT 

r  ;  • 

7707 

•  •  •  a  • 

•  • 

7017 

_  a 
• 

B“n©y 

a  a  aa 

Sixty 

Q1  iz?© 

a  • 

One  hundred 

PltfE 

T  •* 

a^cb© 

Seventy 

aiyaiB 

Two  hundred 

a‘rxi2 

•  “  T 

a^ya-ix 

•  t  :  - 

Eighty 

abb© 

One  thousand 

C|bx 

©■’©an 

Ninety 

Biy©n 

•  a  # 

Ten  thousand 

S1'27 

• 

Ordinals. 


First 

•pirn 

Fifth 

. 

Eighth 

“073© 

•  a 
a 

Becond 

“tit? 

Sixth 

a  a 

Ninth 

*i2“i©n 

•  •  < 

Third 

•  1 

Seventh  “Ona© 

•  •  I 

Tenth 

■n*nw 

•  •  i 

Fourth 

•  •  t 

108 

XX.  Consecution  of  Accents,  §20. 


Disjunctives. 
Class  I. 

• 

w 

> 

H 

O 

S5 

fc> 

55 

O 

O 

Disjunctives. 
Class  II. 

Conjunctives. 

Disjunctives. 

Class  111. 

Conjunctives. 

Disjunctives. 

Class  IV. 

Conjunctives. 

* 

Primary 

• 

• 

1 

J 

.00 

> 

Sections. 

A 

j 

> 

• 

•• 

.X) 

OO 

jSl) 

X) 

\ 

b(X 

• 

• 

j  j 

b 

<o\b 

Secondary 

a 

Sections. 

• 

j  jj  )  \Jj ) 

J 

A 

► 

? 

1 

J 

j  j  j  j 

Unusual 

• 

> 

« 

i 

Sections. 

y  j  j  J  j  j 

—  -  w4 

The  accents  in  parenthesis  are  liable  to  he  substituted  for  those  that  pre¬ 
cede  them.  Thus  in  the  train  of  Silluk  or  Athnahh  occupying  the  upper 
horizontal  line  of  the  table,  if  T’bhir  is  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
be  Darga  or  Merka;  if  by  two,  the  second  will  be  Kadhma  or  Munahh  ;  if 
by  three,  the  third  will  be  T’lisha  K’tanna. 

109 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW 


1.  The  Prefixed  Particles,  §§  24-28. 


In  the  earlier  reading  lessons  the  accents  will  be  but  sparingly  employed.  The 
tone  syllable  will  be  marked  when  it  is  not  the  ultimate  ;  and  an  occasional  disjunc¬ 
tive  will  be  inserted  when  it  is  needed  as  a  sign  of  interpunction  or  to  account  for 
a  pausal  form,  §  19. 


:  rranm  ona  :  rvana  a  :  era  :  mtem  ms 

T  :  TT  T  :  -  T  T  ••  T  -  T  V  T  -  •- 

:  nanism  trim  Bain  snpaBrria  Dnb  *  sbi  ptl. 

•  t  -  :  -  ~  t  -  :  v  v  —  •  it  t  -  >  •  vv  :  '  ••• 

ppaa  :  anya  ptoai  nnSi  -ipaa  ptoai  DnS  !  ppa  py  apya 

hr  •  v  it  t  t  r  v  v  :  »v  -  t  t  v  ••  h  -  v  v  •• 

•  nb^ba  piab  n^aaiai  tun  oi^a  piab  ©a©  s  aiyb 


t  :  it  - 


—  ••  T 


2.  The  Personal  Pronouns,  §  29. 

Remark  1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence  may  be  directly 
connected  with  its  subject  without  the  verb  to  be,  which 
must  be  supplied  in  English,  nirn  “pr  thou  (art)  Jeho¬ 
vah  /  or  the  pronoun  an  of  the  third  person  may  be  used 
as  a  copula  instead  of  the  verb  to  be,  which  must  be  sub¬ 
stituted  for  it  in  translating,  an'ba  ton  nra  thou  art  God, 
see  §  67. 

2.  Property  or  possession  is  denoted  by  the  prep,  b  to, 
belonging  to,  e.  g.  ppan  nimb  ,he  earth  (belongs)  to  Jeho¬ 
vah,  is  Jehovah' s,  poyn  ■’b  the  silver  is  mine. 

3.  The  preposition  pa  is  repeated  before  both  the  ob» 
jects,  between  which  the  interval  is  indicated  Tjpai  apa 
between  me  and  thee. 


112 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


:  nbyb  ■oix  *>n  :  iray  n^n'bx  pxi  xti  ax  ax  :  niru  ax 

t  :  •  t  -  *  t  •  •  vs  •  ••  :  j  >  /•  •;  •  •:  t  :  •  -• 

W~f  1  •• 

nm’bxn  :  inxai  n^a  ©a  nvt'bx  fliaa  px  :  ax  n-inbxn 
“iyn  :  n^affia  ovfbx  x*n  nnx  x'bn  :  rnxn-by  nnxi  n‘a©a 

-  •  -  T  -  •  VS  T  —  *:  F  V  T  T  *  T  -  :  •  -  T  — 

nvfbK  nnnn  :  arun  ibi  scan  ib  :  on  ■'b  nnyn  :  nx  nab 

-  —  •  :  *  v  v  -  •  ••  •  t  -  :  t  v  t 

:  nbyb  xm  nix  bx"!®-1  p an  ■'pa  :  "nix 

X  •  •  —  y  ••  I  ••  •  ••  •  y 


T  T  “ 


3.  Other  Pronouns. 


30. 


*  j,  /\A  * 

£A-VV  /V 


Remark  4.  When  a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  joined  to 
a  noun  as  an  attributive,  it  follows  the  noun  and  both 
receive  the  definite  article,  e.  g.  run  ffbn  this  day ,  nvn 
X'rn  that  day.  When  it  is  used  as  a  predicate,  the  de- 
’onstrative  stands  first  and  is  without  the  article  Dtog  r'l  >x 
'  is  the  day ,  §  71.  1.  .( .>  .. 

:  run  ni*n  “y  :  x'“n  nipan  :  n">aa  "iBX"ba  :  ib-ncx-bai  xti 
■>pa.  nix  nxr  :  nab  rex  rrxn  nxr  :  run  n^abi  nxun  ynxb 
to  !  nirr  *ia  :  pixn-baa  aaa  px  :  rnxrrby  nnx  “i©a-ba  pai 

•  r  :  1  v  t  j  t  ;  •  t  1  l  v  t  r  -  v  •:  t  t  t  J  •• 

*>ab  :  nax  narwna  :  -iaa  *»a  nbx  ra  :  nnx^a  :  n^aira  ■'b 

•  •  •/  ••  r  m  r  I  y  •  V  ••  •  T  *  •  •  •  r  —  • 

ynxn  na  :  x  n  unp  *a  nnx  rex  nipan:  nrx  run  ■»xn  nnx 
n-'aa  ncxi  nnnn  y-ixa  ncxi  byaa  n^aca  tcx  :  na  x-.n  "nrx 

:  ib~irx-bai  ax  nb  :  pnxb  nnna 

•  v  *s  t  ;  •  *s  1  :  I  v  t  ▼  *  •  • 


4.  Perfect  Verbs.  Kal  Preterite  and 

Infinitives.  S  33. 


The  verbal  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements  ; 
thus  ye  (m.)  killed  is  composed  of  the  ground  form  of  the  Kal  pret. 

and  CH  shortened  from  the  2  m.  pi.  pron.  CPK . 


Analyze  and  translate  : — 


,abnp  ,  bin 


1 


r  i 


-^2 


•  ,  i 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


113 


Remark  5.  Both  forms  of  the  infinitive  may  be  used 
alone ;  but  the  construct  only  is  employed  with  preposi¬ 
tions,  8  81.  2,  thus  birab  biij'aa  not  bi©©b,  biicaa . 

7  o  7  :  •  7  •  t;7  t: 


-npap 1  <  roo  nbpn-ra?  :  mhb  nm  Pin  pi?©  nbba  Him 

h  :  r T 


T  !  IT  T 


nos  ib  in:  :  snsarrrs  ©p©©-sb  :  pa  ipap  :  pap  era  :  na 

n:a©  s  nimb  na©  rifcn  nnn©  :  na  nb©©2-s?b  :  p©ob  n^ban 

::-t  t  -  t-Jvtt  t:it  t  t  :  -  t  :•  •  "  : 

_ns  nm©©  :nbxn  D^bamba  by  ma©  nbpn  mao  :np'©a 

•  •  ••  ••  T  #  ••  •  T  “  •  §•  •  T  •  •  I  -  T  ••  T  * 

•  •••  •  •  r  .  ■  •  ••  •  •  i  •  * 

©affimnx  am©©  :  ■>n©ab  ppi  :  rmambamx  ib©  :  run  or© 

T-.  — ■  ••  ••  •  •  •  •  I  ••  ••  *  •  «  r  ••  t*  ••  •»  — 

•  •  •  •  •  ■  w  •  •  T  •  T  •  T  . 

:oab  s?in  ©pp  ■•a 

V  T  •  V  I 


1  pD'n  is  followed  by  2  ,  the  usual  Hebrew  pbrase  being  to  cleave  or  adhere  in, 
where  the  English  idiom  requires  to  cleave  to.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  in 

§  13.  4. 

2  is  also  followed  by  2  ?  where  our  idiom  requires  to  rule  over. 


5.  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Preterites  and  Infini¬ 
tives,  §  34. 

A  figure  following  a  verbal  form  indicates  the  number  of  times  it  is  to  be  found 
in  the  paradigm. 


Analyze  and  translate : — 

,  *>nbap:  ,  maps  ,  tnbap:  ,  nbap:  ,  ©baps  ,  <ibap:  ,  nbap: 

7  '  t:»:  1  7  v  :  - 1;  •  7  t  :  -  Tj  •  7  :  -  b  •  7  :  h  •  7  ::  -*:• 

.  nnbap:  ,  bap:  ,  bapn 

,  nbap  ,  nnbap  ,  bap  ,  ©bap  ,  nbap  ,  nbap  ,  •'nbap  ,  inbap 

/  t  :  \\  7  v  :  -  f*  7  7  s  -  /  t  :  -K  7  t  :  -!•  /  •  :  -  /  •  •  -h 

,*»)?  ,**»*  ,»<*?>?  , ,(2)ba^,pba?  , 

’  .  nnbap  ,  nbap 


Remark  6.  The  sign  of  the  definite  object  nx  becomes 
ns  before  grave  suffixes  and  nix  before  light  suffixes, 
§  06.  3,  thus  ’’nis?  ,  opt©* ;  with  the  3  m.  s.  suffix  it  is  ini?, 
witli  3  f.  s.  nnk ,  8  29.  4. 


•  •  • 


■ns  p©©b  ^ffipp  -irybs-ns? 

v  :  •  :  t  t  ;  •. 


:  D3©sb  rifcn 

•  1  V  T  T 

:  msrba  ©w 

•  “  T  “  \ 


neaa:  !  abpa:  tfb 


:  nirp  ©m*>a  nnypi 

T  |  •  *«  *  V  I  * 


114 


LESSONS  IN  HEADING  HEBKEW. 


p®b  ■’nyi®:  n®a  in  an  !  n-n  nipsa  oana  ‘’n:ae  :  wan 
Tn®n-nx  nnpb  :  inia  ananp  ab  :  arte®  ina  :  na  Dana 
:  pb  !)2ap3  :  ina  nonpi  ia"n®a-bs-nxn  lacnn-na  nn®an 

it  :  I;  •  t  :  :  ?  •:  t  v  j  '  t  :  •  ~  v  tj-t 


6.  The  Remaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives.  §  35. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

*ebapnn  ,inbapnn  ,  inbapn  ,  nbapn ,  nb^apn ,  i:bapn ;  onbapn 
,  ^rn  ,  (2)  bapn  ,  V>apn  ,  ■’nbapn  ,  ibapn  ,  nbapn  ,  nbapn 

.(2)  bapnn  ,  rapn  ,bapn 

Remark  7.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  often  joined  with 
the  finite  tenses  of  the  verb  for  the  sake  of  emphasis, 
thus  ■’ncnpn  ®npn  consecrating  I  have  consecrated ,  i.  e. 
I  have  certainly  or  entirely  consecrated. 

.  .  .  .  .  ...  a 

ttwpn  n®a  an-mn  scan-ay  mwa  nin  pbsn  ®-npn  ana-aa 
ccarrra  inunpn  cnpn  :  ^®ipnn-a'b  :  ®aa  n®a  a^isn-baa 
*:ra®n  :  nanai  ana  n vfca  naaim  na-in  rnan-na  wncn  •.  nirob 

:  -  :  •  t  ;  t  t  tv*  •  :  *  :  -  7  r  t  v  •  •  •  t  — 

pbrn  nb  aana  a^npnb  aana  a^nba 2  bnnm  ayan1  inaaban-na 

/  —  •  T  <■•••  •  I  •  —  •  •••••  •  •••  •••  •  —  •  •  T  *f  •  •  •• 

•  1  r  •  •  •  •  •  ••  •  •  • 

nnrbam  aana  nba®i  n*nn-na  aaa  ■’nnban 3  :  naban-by 

T*  •  •  •  •  •••••  x***  T  *  ••  VT  •  •  •  •  •  •  —  —  •• 

•  •  •••  •  •  •  ■  ••  • 

:  aana  naiyam  nanan-ra 

••  •  ••  T  •  •  •  I  T  ••  •  •  •• 

•  •  •  1  •  *  ■  •  • 

1  See  §  26. 

2  Plural  in  form  but  singular  in  sense,  and  therefore  taking  a  singular  verb, 
§  85.  3. 

*  Followed  by  the  prep.  2  in  the  sense  of  sending  upon  or  against. 


7.  Kal  Future,  Imperative  and  Participles.  §  36. 
Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  ibapn  ,  bapa  ,  (2)  npbapn  ,  bap?  ,  bap:  ,  (2)  bapn  ,  ibap? 

.  ibap  ,  brjp  ,  n:bap  ,  bap  ,  bap  ,  ^bap  ,  •’bapn 

Remark  8.  The  article  before  a  participle  must  some¬ 
times  be  rendered  in  English  by  the  relative  pronoun, 
e.  g.  naan  the  (one)  keeping  or  (he)  who  is  keeping. 

+  A  M  .  /  .  •  i  a  .  I  '"V*  *  , 


rt*rdi 


AM 


/ 


,*/  /  '• 


>  /.o> 


-f  W  &  CfU\  <f  <  //  J  0 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


llo 


I 


9.  When  the  sign  of  the  definite  object  precedes  the 
e  ative,  it  belongs  not  to  it  but  to  its  antecedent  under¬ 
stood,  see  §  30.  3;  hence  ac*j  ns  means  not  whom  or 
which,  but  him  who  or  what  equivalent  to  that  which. 


n-ijr-y  aaaa  :  naan  sinn  Di«a  :  yasrrbaa  baa  svn  p  ^ 
:nnaa  ncs  ns  naa  ninn  nnai  nnaizn ’sb  nb-bi  pr ariacr* 

:  p??  &ih  nin?  »  fl**  pa  nin?  :  ns-rn  niaan-brns  aaan 
Dinahs  s  Tin  naa^i  :  aa®  mn  naan  :ybaa  aaa  :  visa  pa 
.v  ‘’3'abn  :oaa  baa?  nip  oaa  as  baalrs'b  ibsaisna  nPaa 

sn'bTan  n:aabn  « 

•  7  j  -  j  • 


jP 


r-<-  Wtpy 


*  *  J  -/  v 

(f  b  S^X)  I  ^  '  ‘y-l  7  C  Vq  * 


v 


T^/  V) 


8.  Riphal,  Piel  and  Pual  Futukes,  etc. 


37. 


Analyze  and  translate : — 

>  ,  (2)  b-pn  ,  \btppn  ?  ^bapn  ,  n:bupn  ;  bapn  ,  bap: 

•  (2)  ,  bap:  ,  Papn  ,  Papp  ,  Papn  /bap? 


’ n— ^  ,  ^p:  ,  ^  ,  rub  eg  ,  bappi  ,  bap 

.  ibapn  ,  "'bap  ,  Pap  ,  bapa  ,  bap?  ;  (2)  bapn 


Remake  10.  The  infinitive  with  or  without  the  prepo- 

sition  b  maybe  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  as  Tnprt  pb  s‘b 

to  burn  incense  belongs  not  to  thee  or  it  is  not  for  time  to 
burn  incense. 

l  1.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  pronoun  may  often 

.  „  •  CO 

.  rn?a  a:en  « aayrra?  i?s^sb  a?an  :  ns-n  naan  p  Paan 

nfv  V®*  °??  ^ 

bsaa:-ns  aapa  nin.  ^  a  D,ian  ^‘baaas 
5*3  ft  :Wpr^™m  nanab^  nirrb 

^  .  ''k 

1  $  ik'Wz 


,  -?&&&# 


116 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW 


nim  ms  -rex  mnarms  nnaarrjs  Dab  naan  :  y-rpy  anaa 
:  pinaa  mm  Tins  y:a  mm  pnx  raaax  raaa  ■max  :  aaay 

t  •  t  :  •  :  -  x  ••  •  :  1  :  -  .  .  -  T  ~  t- 


9  a.  Hiphil,  Hophal, 


AND  HlTHPAEL 


Futures,  etc. 

7 


Analyze  and  translate : — 


,(2)  n:bapnn ,  bapm  ,(2)  b'vapn ,  nbapn ,  baps  ,  b^ap: ,  nbapnn 
,  ,bapa  ,bapnn  ,  nbapnn  ,  •'bmpn  ,n:bapn  ,nbap? 

.  biopna 

••  t-  :  ■ 


tann  :  y«i  mans  Daman  :  oman-ia  onb  oab  ■v’ts'ca  ts 

•  "  V  •  J  “  •  "J  •  •  ~  x  “  /  ■  V  *,•  V  T  |  •  *  .  —  • 

nnyn  :mn  mimnx  nanpn  ranpnn  nmy  ;ntthpm  nanan 
max  na  !  obiy  py  mn  man  oya  pen  nmamsb  :  nbman 

T  “  ••  "  •  "  —  •  ••  ••••  •  •  «  #  • 

•  #  •  •  K 

“by  in's  naAai  :r.naan  pats  ran  Dipanaa  nanra  aiix  mm 

■  •-  T  =  •  ■  It  ”  i  .,  ji  .f,  i  r  -  i  .  •..(■-  ■  »  t  = 


"ba  ns  nns  mncan  J !  mi  mb  nbs  na-npn  s'b  :  bxnttmba 
aeb  npysrn  nbpma  ran  nipamnx  arax  oannca  i  nnsen 

:  *  »t  t  ;  -  t  :  it  •  a  v  -  »  r  -  ••  :  -  •  •  •  -  •  ••  • 


K  r 2Q'-~(V$-<  '  ^  ^  (f? 

9  b.  The  Entire  Paradigm  op  bap . 


<  mm 

t  t : 


A  >  lV  i  |  f 
W  V^w  /  S»  y 


i  V  / 


The  figures  denote,  as  before,  the  number  of  places  in  the  paradigm  repre¬ 
sented  by  the  preceding  form. 


Supply  the  vowels  and  translate : — 

,  (2)  nbapn  ,  onbap:  ,  (2.)  n:bap  ,  (5)  ‘’bapn  ,  (3)  (nbap 
,  (2)  bnap  ,  (2  )  nbapnn  ;  mbapnn  ,  n:bapnn  ,  biapi  ,  (4)  nbapn 
,(4)  bapnn  ,  bapm  ,(8)  bapm  ,(2)  onbapn  ,  bmps  ,  nbapn 
,(10)  bapn  ,(3)  n:bap  ,(12)  mbapn  ,  ibapn  ,  n’napn  ,  nb^api 
(2)  bapnn  ,  hasp:  ,  nbapnn  ,(2)  nbmpn  ,  (3)  bapa 
,(5)  baps  ,(5)  nbap  ,  nbap:  ,(2)  ba:pn  ,  ba:pa  ,  nbapnn 
,  nb-apn  ,  bapna  ,  bapn:  ,(5)  nbapn  ,(2)  nbap:  ,  ■’b^apn  ,  bapns 
(7)  bap:  ,  (5)  bapi  ,  (3)  mbap  ,  nbap:  ,  (2)  n:bapn  anbapnn 
,(2)  ■'bap  ,  inbap:  ,(2)  n:bapn  ,(2)  nbapnn  ,(2)  mbapnn 
,(2)  ■jnbapn  ^b^apn  ,  (5)  nbapi  ,  (6)  nbap  ,  'jnbap: 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 

,(3)  si*Bp  ,(2)  ^nbapn  ,  -lubtsp:  ,(3)  fibt :p  ,(11)  bttp  ,  ‘ibtaprs 

.  “’b-jpnn  , ‘jrfropnn  ,(2)  b^-jpn  ,*b-jpnn  ,  ■nbttpnn 


\ 


\ 
*  * 

<V 


10.  Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future  and  Impera¬ 
tive  and  Vav  Conversive,  8§  40,  41. 

Remark  12.  When  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  pre- 
ded  by  a  preterite  or  by  any  expression  referring  to 
'past  time,  it  is  to  be  translated  as  a  preterite.  And 
a  preterite  with  Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future, 
an  imperative  or  any  expression  indicating  future  time,  is 
to  be  translated  as  a  future,  §  79.  •'>• »  |»  ‘ty 

13.  xb  is  the  simple  negative:  bx  is  used  with  the 

-jy/.v  \  i.  n  ' 

^future,  which  takes  the  apocopated  form  if  it  has  one,  to 
:xpress  the  negative  imperative  vacn  sb  thou  shalt  not 
leliver,  “lien  bs  deliver  not. 

^  jvo-  F  •  cv 

rrirv’  pis  ‘ins  nim  :  annrrbs  th  papm  f»n  reo-1 

mrarrnx  “opna  jnp*i  barms  am  -otto*!  :  r-ixrrbp  na 
nra  roban  nb»m  nppr  pypi  -isin  pip  iziab^  ib  irs 
ruETi  nbxn  a  “Harms  nirri  rrnpi  :  bap  s'bn  ■'r^rr.x  pnsbnb 
□■'7S3  "ins  nsrm  pann-sx  n“npn  "prisms  :  "Hscn  naa-n  ans 
wsrrrs  pinpbn  rerermss  pnsTS  nshbm  Q-rrarrrsc  nnpbr 

’  v  V  -  v  T  :  »-  rr  :  v  -  -a  t  :  -  :  .•  •  *  ■  t  i-j-1  1  *“  ,T  : 

I  1  /VWWV  I  lwHvtAVV4  /Y,  a aA  V 

is  ms  n^.p  tan  sra*  ptDprba  nna  nnrctn  ©snn  br  T.pan 

r  •*  #•  ~  1  :  •  /  -  ;  -  -  tj-jt  t  -  t  I;  -  rr . 

v»T  >  .  r>  ,  .  ..  .'T-!  abiyb  ns-rmas  :  manso 

3®^:  -•  ,  .xT/xrtif 


A 


|fl.  Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fem.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre¬ 
terite. 

^The  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements,  and 
separate  equivalents  stated;  thus  iiap  lie  killed  him  is  composed  of  bbp 
8  masc.  sing.  pret.  and  *i  for  sin  suffix  of  3  masc.  sing,  with  vowel  of  union 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


(T),  and  is  equivalent  to  irx  bap :  rtFibap  she  killed  her  is  for  PinSap 
which  is  composed  of  ni^p  3  fem.  sing-,  pret. ,  whose  termination  becomes  n 
before  suffixes,  and  n  suffix  of  3  fem.  sing.,  and  is  equivalent  to  nrk  n  b'-p  . 


Analyze  and  translate 


inrup 

t  t  »: 


i* 


,  10? 


^vi?  ,1?^!?  ,oboj5  , •'&$>  ,  i&p 

•°^i?  ,]bup 

.ainbup  ,  inbup  ,  iDnbup  ,  anbcp  ,  onBcp  ,  nnbup, 

'  v  :  -  nh  7  -  tI;  7  :  •  tI;  7  1  :  -  t);  7  -  T  t  I;  7  t  -  T  V;  | 

.  inn b up  ,  pnbup  ,  unb  up  ,  irnbuS 

:  -  t  7  /  v  :  -  it»:  7  •  :  *  t(;  7  <  v  t  t  f;| 


b.  The  rest  of  the  Kal  Preterite. 


Analyze  and  translate 


,^'V i?  ,o^l?  A^i?  A:*?i?  , wvfioj? 

,nii:bup  ,  vnibuj?  ,B«boj?  ,  ^bt#  ,!pb'uj?  ,  Diibuj?  ,  pibuj 

.  mibui 


,  niribup  ,  (2)  u-'nbup  ,  Tprbu£  ,  uiribup  ?  irnbup  ,  iribup 
,  (2)  -pnbup  ,(2)  riibup  ,  ^ribup  ,  wrfeoj?  ,  ^?nbup  ,  unbup 
,  rnnbup,  rnnbup  ?  nnbup  ,  unbup  ,  ]nbup  ,  }inbup  ,  -pnbu 
.  ppbup  ,  o^Rboj?  ,  (2)  *vpnbuj?,  (2)  synbujp  ,  ininb, J 

,  n^nyv1  ,  ini?br  ,  nunp  ,  uny-T  ,  uyv>  ,  iiiyT>  ,  unyr1 
,  vrac  ,  ?py*r»  ,  uiyv  ,  rnyp-1  ,  Tpnyr  ,  nuiy-p  ,  cny-p 

.  uhnpb  ,  inis  ,  wic-p  ,  nurrp  ,  hub-p  ,  *»:r nu© 

t:J-:7  t;7'  :  7  t  •*  j  7  t  j  -  s  7  •  -  :  -  s 


*  This  form  belongs  to  the  first  person  of  the  preterite  as  well  as  to  the  second 
feminine,  although  for  the  sake  of  brevity  it  is  not  repeated  in  the  paradigm. 


} 


c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 


Pem  ark  14.  When  a  verb  is  doubly  transitive,  either 
object  if  a  pronoun  may  be  suffixed  to  the  verb,  thus 
ibhupn  means  either  lie  caused  him  to  hill  or  lie  caused 
to  hill  him;  nbnp  oncabn  thou  hast  caused  them  to  pack 
on  tunics ,  but  “nyba-ns  cnrpbn  thou  hast  caused  Eleajjr 
to  put  them  on.  .  1 


LESSONS  IN  BEADING  HEBREW. 


119 


Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  inbidpn  ,  (2)  rfebojpn  ,  tpbippn  ,  nwbdpn  ,  dbhdpn 

,  ;n  ,  (2)  svhbopn  ,  npSidpn  ,  prbdpn  ,  vobippn 

pinbap  ,  dnbap  ,  dpbdp  ,  oinbtsp  ,  diibap  ,  'ppbtap  ,  *obap 

.  (2)  dpbdp  ,  osbpp 

vnso  ,  dross  ,  irnas  ,  ,  dtias  ,  in^a  ,  iribna 

i-paon  .  Tpniihpn  ,  ^imEop  ,  Snmp  ,  dmop  ,  nnbsitj  ,  □■'nbsc 

.  spnacn  ,  dnaon  ,  (2)  vnnsn  ,  Tpmpn 

pn  Tan  nPb  nsci  :  mb  ib 1  anna  nnpbi  a«T  ns  nb  px 
Tnii  nbx  bio  TpriTdin  pay  ais  nsn  :  pban  iWa  ncxHo 
nffidbi  aiaa  rrrn  cibi  ao3on  :  pbsizh  mm  oyn  inn  a®  :  pb 
rnirabn  :  dinaan  ateabn  :  iirnpi  mramby  pan  ann  id  npbn 
anx  man  tcxo 3  nb  anbnar.  nnx  :  mrpann  nanban  :  raran 

!  nim J 


1  To  himself ,  there  being  no  reflexive  pronouns  in  Hebrew,  the  personal  pr(£ 
uns  mav  be  used  with  a  reflexive  sense.  ryyi^f  ^ '  r  ' 1  ‘ 


nouns  may  be  used  with  a  reflexive  sense 

2  Used  adverbially,  how .  3  See  §  29.  SfL 

O  '  5 -  -  H- 


%  V 


4  §  See  23.  3. 


*  ! 


J- 


t  ✓  > 


12.  Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes, 

§  42. 

a.  Kal  Future. 

Remark  15.  Those  forms  in  the  Kal  future  6  which 
end  with  the  last  radical  follow  the  analogy  of  bbpi. 

In  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  a  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical  is  not  liable  to  rejection,  but  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  before  all  the  suffixes  except  the  2  pers.  plur. 
where  Pattahh  is  retained,  e.  g.  i.nbo'i  not  anbtcn  from 
nbd'i  and  ahb©  from  nbc. 

-  :  •  7  •  ••  r  :  -  ; 

16.  Those  forms  in  the  various  futures  and  imperatives 
which  have  personal  endings  undergo  no  change  before 
suffixes,  except  in  the  fern.  plur.  as  stated  in  §  42.  2. 


120 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


Analyze  and  translate  : — - 

:  ^p? ,  ■#?)??  ,^1??  ,  n»tsj5^  ,iSop?  ,(2)  , '?btjp? 

.  ,  •#?!??  ,  ^>91?: ,  ,  oi?w: 

.(2)  -pbapri  ,  (2)  rfepn  ,  qbapr?  ,(4)#?pri  ,  obap:  , 

.  (2)  ^bapn  ,  3^ojf?  .  mbap3  ,  ,  a=bapx 

.  fpbapn  ,  (3)  vnbapn1  ,  ‘mbapn  ,  aibap?  ,  aibap?  ,  mbap? 

.  pbapn  ,  mbap?  ,  DEibap?  ,  mbapp 

1  See  §  42.  2. 

npy  :  na  uabmcx  •p’irrbsa  isnatm 1  :  r-ixna  urnas 
-nsi  pcrsrrns  cupH  :  paa  aiaa1’  xb  “o  pbarrbx  x:mau 
siacp  nimmnx  :  nyppH  nabtea  ©ami  :  nn©a!H  naran 
xb  ■'sbxi  nsnairn  nbiroa  fib  hex  biyn  max  na©nn  :  obiyb 

•  t  :  t  :  -  ;  v  ••  —  t  v  “:  t  t  •  -  :  •  t  : 

■“y“  npya  y-rbaa  spa©'-1  rrim  :  inn©'©*!  inx  laban  :  pnatc'x 
!  p©aua  a©',,n 2  pbambx  anb©‘p  arum  aoarrba-nx  npb  :  abiy 

1  Translate  the  future  with  vav  conversive  in  these  and  subsequent  exercises 
*s  though  a  preterite  preceded. 

*  See  Remark  8. 


h.  Piel  and  Hipliil  Futures. 

Remark  17.  In  those  forms  of  the  Piel  future,  which 
end  with  the  last  radical,  Tsere  is  shortened  or  rejected 
before  suffixes  as  in  the  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Piel  preterite. 

18.  Tsere  in  the  Hipliil  apocopated  future,  future  with 
Vav  Conversive,  and  imperative  becomes  Hhirik  before 
suffixes,  e.  g.  rnc'rrbx  destroy  not ,  'nmno'mbx  destroy  him 
(or  it)  not. 


Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  pbaps?  ,  pap?  ,  mbapn  ,  wbap?  ,  (2)  abapp  ,  apbaps 

.  nbi-jpx  ,  amap:  ,  pb-rap?  ?  (4)  isb-'apn  ,  (3)  nnbppip 

fisipx  D^bjimnx  ipsfn  ns©'abx  ~ee*x  rcnarrnx  “>na©E 

T  T  ••  •  •  J  -  ▼  V  •  5  —  ▼  ▼  AV  T  :  V  T  T  ••  V  \  •  V  •  ;  *  T 

mi-bnx  msa  •o:x  “ay  :  nyna  mm  apuai  buan  :aasax 

att;  •  t  •  tt-  t:  •  b  •  j  “  •*  :  “  *• :  ** 


LESSOJNS  1JN  KEADING  HEBBEW. 


121 


s  ia  naia  ■'a  'nnTnrrrbx  nas  :  nr-ib©-"!  npia  oat'"1!  !  'imsaa-, 
tnab  yain  nte«  rvnarrnx  na©-'  sbn  nrpn©i  ssb  rprp  o*m 

—  M  (  a  ••  ••  •  •  ••  •  •  •  l  A**  •  •  «•  T  «*» 

a  I  ,  *  ••  •  •  •  •  “•  •  ■  ft 

rpsrrbaa  ^inb^ffiam  vnoyn  nm  Than  wann  •'a  ©iax-na 

1  v  it  r  t  ;  •••:-:  :  t  r  :  r  •  •.*::•  •  v:  t 

wirabi  :  TTir'abEi  o^aa  srsmai  :bsn©i-by  'Tia^ba’i  ini?  npb 

:  nn“i;a 


c.  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

Hem  a  ee  19.  The  suffix  of  the  1  pers.  sing,  is  attached 
to  the  infinitive  in  two  forms,  \  expressing  the  subject 
of  the  verb  ‘'bop  my  hilling  and  "p  its  object  ‘pSpp  to  hill 
me.  The  remaining  persons  have  but  one  form,  which  is 
used  indifferently  for  the  subject  or  the  object,  f]bpp  thy 
hilling  or  to  hill  thee ,  T^ppR  thy  causing  to  hill ,  to  cause 
thee  to  hill  or  to  cause  to  hill  thee. 


Analyze  and  translate : 


1  Of  the  two  forms  here  represented  one  has  a  suffix,  the  other  has  not. 

2  Notice  the  position  of  the  accent. 


o  ,  *'nb»  ,  anbuj  ,  anas  ,  spaa 
jb  ,  on  bo  ,  innbo  ,(2)^3Rbo  ,  ■> 

•  •  i*l 


l 


Hemaek  20.  The  copulative  1  is  sometimes  employed  in 
Hebrew  to  connect  an  action  with  the  time  of  its  occur¬ 
rence,  where  no  connective  is  required  in  English.  In 
such  cases  we  may  use  then  as  its  equivalent  or  better 
still  leave  it  untranslated.  Thus  in  my  gathering  Israel 


122 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW 


on  “’ntt^pDi  then  shall  I  he  sanctified  in  them  or  when  1 
gather  Israel ,  I  shall,  etc.,  §  89.  2  (2). 


nny  :  ib  omnia1  “ini  ^©v  :  pay  mala  oyn  y©© i 

jimianb  “in  oipambs  min  nns  tbsiim  s:  ©inn 

•  •  •  •  ••  »  I  T  —  ••  T  •  “  •  T  ••  ••  T  •  •  ••••  Y  •  ••  •  — 

•  •  •  r  1  •  •  •  1  *  •  •  •  •  • 

-ns  innpn  :  ovan-i©  ©sap  :  sin  nma  inn©©  :  ors  in©© 

«  •  r  •  •  •  •  •  1  •  1 

iimpna1  nim  ©s-13  ovan  ©rm  an  ipoipan 2  ovan-i©  bsiiin 
i:sb  niapnb  i©inpnb.  fins  biav  :i©ipb  ins  no©©  :nnn 

:  rvim 


1  The  initial  aspirate  has  Daghesh-lene  as  though  the  preceding  word  were 

§  23.  3. 

2  The  accent  would  be  thrown  upon  the  ultimate  by  Vav  Conyersive,  §  17.  6, 
but  for  the  following  monosyllable,  §  18. 


13.  Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 


Remark  21.  Attributive  or  qualifying  adjectives  fol¬ 
low  the  noun  to  which  they  belong,  and  agree  with  it  not 
only  in  gender  and  number  but  also  in  definiteness,  that 
is  to  say,  they  receive  the  article  if  the  noun  is  definite, 
naiia  ins  a  great  stone ,  nSiian  insn  the  great  stone ,  §  7 0.  2. 

22.  When  a  demonstrative  and  an  adjective  qualify 

the  same  noun  the  demonstrative  stands  last  fiibian  nnsn 

•  • 

nbxn  these  great  signs ,  §  71.  2. 

23.  Predicate  adjectives  do  not  receive  the  article  even 
though  the  noun  is  definite ;  their  usual  place  is  before 
the  noun,  but  they  may  also  stand  after  it  insn  nbiia  or 
nbiia  insn  the  stone  is  great ,  §  70.  3. 

24.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  the  preposition  fa 
§  72.  1,  pis©  niopn  pnins  thy  sister  young  from  thee,  i.  e. 
younger  than  thou;  pi?©  bias  I  will  he  greater  than  thou. 


nam  :  oibiia  Qinb©a  ©inn  ova  :  ncin  pisi 1  oi®m  qi©© 

•  •••  •  •  ,T.  •  —  •  ▼  T  mZ  1  V  ▼  ▼  •  T  •  •  T 

•  •  •  • 

mnbn  ovsrn  :  n©in  n©b©  :  isan-by  nbia  psm  mtea  isn 

•  ••  ;  •  T  T  *:  T  !  •  ••  ;  •  “  ▼  •  /  v  V  ▼  l  •  T  •  • 


LESSONS  IN  BEADING-  HEBREW. 


123 


Diisa  laba  ics  Qiyban  nbs  :  isc  niyi  niymi  isc  nine 

•••  ••  .  .«  ••  —  •  .  T  •  —  ••  ••  •  r  t  'T  •  • 

•••  2  IT  ••  1  »  •  •  *  t 

“i3i  rrcrby2  slab  nbsn  □■ybomby  ns  :  bsiijnb  spc-ibc  ■cab 
emby  mben  nimi  :nsin  nbimn  nyimby  ns  irby3  mm 

t  i“  -  t  :  -  tttt  ••  ••  t  t: 

my  :  nb  in:  mm  ics  naicn  yisn  !  mccn-p  nibia  m:as 

:  iyn-!B  nbim  smi  pyy.i  nbiia 

—  T  J  •  T  2  *2  r  :•  T  2 


1  Vowel  of  the  noun  assimilated  to  the  preceding  Kainets  as  after  the  article, 
§  25.  3.  a . 

2  Upon  what  ground,  i.  e.  for  what  reason ,  why . 

3  Upon  us  or  against  us. 


14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Remark  25.  Nouns  in  the  construct  before  a  definite 
noun  (including  proper  nouns)  are  themselves  definite, 
§  69.  1,  nip®  cl  place,  but  piajn  nip*?  the  place  of  the  arh; 
mm  pis  the  cirh  (not  an  arh)  of  Jehovah. 

26.  Nouns  in  the  construct  state  do  not  receive  the 
article;  they  are  rendered  definite  by  prefixing  the  article 
to  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  5,  om’bs  nbs  a  man  of  God , 
Dmbsn  urs  the  man  of  God. 

27.  Adjectives  or  demonstratives  qualifying  a  noun  in 
the  construct  state  do  not  follow  it  immediately,  but  are 
placed  after  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  4,  biian  nim  m'i 
siiam  the  great  and  dreadful  day  of  Jehovah. 

28.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns  in 
the  singular  connected  by  the  conjunction  and ,  the  predi¬ 
cate  is  commonly  put  in  the  singular  if  it  precedes  the 
subject,  and  in  the  plural  if  it  follows,  §  86. 


ma  ■’by  by  s  mm  runs  pis  :  bsiirn  mbs  pis  :  omron  ■'asy 
mci  D’nacn  nimb  ;n  :o->,ben  “>yyiy  smsepm  mbian  om'bsn 

..  :  •  -  t  -  t  i-  ’  ••  •  -  t  -  :  v  •  -  I :  -  :  •  :  -  •  v:  it 

*>:iayn  :  icy  mmm  apy>  bp  bpn  :  na-ics_byi  yisn  omen 
pbrrn  bian  :  yisn  iayy  ai  oy-by  “inabcn  nns  :  men  mn 

1  v  v  -  -  :  •  -  F  v  it  t  -  *:  i-  -  -  -  •  -  :  -  2  •  t  -  v  r  -  - 

“orm  nim-ns  inycm  :  nmeba  mca  mi  am  :  yisn  •’ybc  bac 

;  t  v  :  :  •  -  *  :  •  :  ;  •  •  t  -  t  i  v:  t  t  :  -  t 


124 


LESSONS  IN  BEADING  HEBREW. 


nona 1  baa  pisan  ninns  nsnsn  n:as  sit:  sbn  :  Bins  trb-ib  n'a  ars 

:  ■’mnai  era  vmtrsbn  bknto* > 

•  :  n  t  ;  v  t  *  -  s  v  -  t  j  • 


■np  n:ra  23. 1. 

1  The  construct  of  D'h  ,  a  reduplication  of  the  more  usual  form  ">>a  . 


15.  Nouns  with  Suffixes,  §  49. 


Remark  29.  The  prepositions  “ins  after,  “bs  to,  by 
upon  and  a  few  others  take  the  suffixes  belonging  to 
plural  nouns,  §  66.  2,  e.  g.  "Hns  not  “'“ins  after  me. 

30.  The  article  before  oi-1  day  limits  it  to  the  present, 
that  which  is  now  passing,  abn  to-day,  §  68.  3. 


imnans  nns  :ppann2  im  syiaB’n1  ibpai  inacn  -pniaaTis 
“i©s  niaparrba-ns  pnasn  “as  :  ?pnns  riynn  nns  naan 
■ns  cnan:i  nrrn'bs-ns  ans  D">ir-p  ans  ncs  o^ian  o©3-!Hay 

v  :  -  •  :  Ait  ••  i  v:  v  t  •  :  i  v  -  v  ■:  •  -  t  :  it 

ts  annasi  a'sa  nsnan  an-nrsi  anhaa^ns  oniaci  onhana4 

•  •  •••—••*  •  •  ▼  I  •  •  •  ••••••  —  T  •  •mm  ••  •  •  •  X  ••• 

•  •••  •  •  ■  •  •• 

anynn  risrrba  nnna  aisn  nbirs  a:s  mm  :  smn  aipamra  aa® 
B’oian  amann  baa  nns  nan  ba;  sb  13  aaaErbam  aaaab-baa 

•  t  •  ••  •  •  •  t  •  x  • 

:  aa-by5  aa^rtbs  mm  nan  n©s 


T  T 


1  may  take  a  direct  object,  or  as  in  this  instance  be  followed  by  2 

2  See  Lesson  4,  note  1 ;  also  §  39.  3.  *  §  30.  33. 

4  The  3  plur.  suf.  with  fern.  plur.  nouns  may  be  either  n  or  o 
6  Upon  the  subject  of,  concerning . 


16.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §  53. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  per¬ 
fect  verb  bap : — 

,  •'ptnn  ,  (2)  nay  ,  nays  ,  nays  ,  nrayn  ,(2)  nayn  ,  annay 

.  ba's  ,  TOsn  ,  nsprnn  ,  pirn 

,  mnayn  ,  nnayn  ,  arrayn  ,  mmays  ,  wrayn  ,  imayn 

.  nay? 


*  T2H 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


125 


Kemark  31.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  nouns  in 
the  relation  of  the  construct  state,  the  predicate  commonly 
agrees  with  the  first  as  the  principal  noun ;  but  it  may 
agree  with  the  second  if  this  conveys  the  main  idea.  The 
latter  is  almost  always  the  case  when  the  first  noun  is 
bb ,  e.  g.  D^rrbs  6am  all  the  waters  shall  be  turned. 

32.  If  a  predicate  refers  to  two  words  of  different 
persons  it  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to  the 
third,  and  in  the  first  in  preference  to  either  of  the  others. 
§  86.  3. 

33.  Nouns  are  sometimes  put  in  the  construct  state 
before  a  following  clause,  §  75.  3,  as  “ics:  QipT?  the  place 
which  or  where ,  etc. 


shaferi  :m'm  ?pnx  id  roiab  nbbprrnx  sb  rpn'bx  mm  sbmi 
laya  ■maa  ■’aax  !  nib  D^mba  warn  :  mb  nmm  -rcnb  sem 

-:i-  ...  •  t  t  :  •  -  -  t  :  it**  -  t  :  -  t  -  :  1  v  :  /  T  •• 


:  bbxb  •j‘52  nmby  imm  :  nanx  mm-nx  oniTy  :  mm-nx 

•  •  r.  >  .  .  •  ...  .1  r  a  .  .  .  •  »,  . 

aipaaa  nnb  bax  xb  pbambx  nvibxrriijix  -raxH  :  ‘rarrnx  nbax^ 

It-  v  v  -  *  v  v  “  v  •  vs  t  •  v  -  /  t  -  v  »  :  i*  •:  i-  - 

nnb  aipna  :  wina  itd  nim  nawibxn  ‘'i-iimarba  :  mr, 

xa  rax1’ 1  b anm  vtbx  firm  :  irrbx  “>aa  nnb  pax1’  nnx  •’Bmxb 

T  "  T  •*  •*  T  :  •  **  *A  T  -  :  IT  .....  ...  x  ••  T  ••  V  -  •  - 

s*ox  yh  mayb  mm  nos  maf 

*T  •  T  i  •  •  —  •  t  »  »  #  ••  “!  »  *T2 
■  ®  •  .  •  •  •  •• 


*  *np 

1  The  future  followed  by  has  the  force  of  a  petition  or  request. 

2  State  the  form  and  meaning  of  both  the  K’ri  and  K’thibh,  and  which  reading 
yields  the  more  exact  grammatical  agreement. 


17.  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  §  54. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bt?]5 .- 
.  ^bxa*1  ,  6xai  6xa,»  ,  ibxan  ,  *>bxa  ,  6xa  ,  6xa  ,(2)6x3 

>  it  •  7  -:rr  :  )  7  -:it  7  •  “:i-  7  -:i-  7  \  /  -:it 

,  trpxa  ,  aabxa  ,  nnbxa  ,  6xan  ,  bxaa  ,(3)bxann  ,  nbxa  ,  6xa 

.  tnabxa  ,  nbxax 

"|®S2  ■ma  :nb  ana  mn'bx  nim  max  pixa  nim  ipim  iia 
spanatt  ronaxi  wao  nbiaxi  aanax  :  varaa-ba  Ya©rrbx“i  nim-rw 

’  v  :  it  s  t  :  it  *:  r*  1  #t  1  r  t  *•  *:r  >  •,  v  r  t  :  t  •  :  :  •  ■  ;  t  t  * 


120 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


nnyi  :  pia©  p-omirx  ns  Tern  :  risen  *’■©3  bb  pa  ©31331 
y©©se  sebi  ■'bs  ipy t  :  abiyb  p-Qi  anaia©!  piay  jra-nse  pia 
■bars  ©in©  •.  risen-ra  ©©use  :  vn'bsrbse  teps  ipypi  :  orv'bs 
“rs  i-ina©  o^rrcn  nna©  :  fba-bavissi  nanan-rsn  Him  rfa 

•  •  »•  i«  •  —  •  ••  it  •  -  T  **  T  ••  •  —••••——•••  ■»  •  •• 

•  •  I  i  •  |  #11  ■  ■  ••  •  ••  1  • 

sinai  rrn  Tpbs  nrs  s  cyn 

it  :  /  -  :  •  v  ••  -  t  t  t 


18.  Lamedii  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bap  • — 

nbr-  ni bci  ,  nb®  ,nb©3  ,  n'b©3  ,  n'bcs  ,  nb©'  ,  rfb©  ,  mb® 

.  nnb©->  ,  ©fib©  ,  ©nb©  ,  inb©  ,  nan©©  ,  nb©3 

Remark  34.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives, 
and  pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural,  §  85.  7. 

ma©  yrr'bs  :  pyrrnse  ynr  ipaa  :  basb  onbi  yvrb  yir  v© 

:  p'bx  ©nb©'  nini  ->a  nyi-'  :  msb  aia-n©  yi©"1©  :  oyn-ba-ns* 

._T;  T;  .  J  “  -  T  TTT  -  “  M  •  ITT  T 

p©sh  by©  w:bs1-ns  np'b  ninn  aim  ■’a  nyi-n  ©bse  nase© 
srrbs  :  pb©n  n*Q-bs*  npbn  :  mb©  ‘ns  :  ■>ny,ip  ©x  oa  irab 
n©ab  o©syn  aabn  pibn  :  is©  pia  ax  “aa  ■©  ->bx  p'bn©  y:©n 

©-my  ©©?  n:np2na  tx  :  ©■'by  roib©  rr'-ib  n©x©  pb©  aroby 

caaab  ©np  :  Tn  n©i©  nab©©rwrs  ynps  :  nrnnsn  n^rnn15  ©Tsa 


•  • 


■nr> 


1  The  plural  of  "inx  is  often  used,  as  it  is  here,  in  a  singular  sense. 

3  nps  is  applied  specifically  to  opening  the  eyes  ;  HIP 5  is  the  general  term  foi 
opening,  and  is  applied  to  anything  whatever. 

*  din  is  for  din  and  consequently  does  not  lose  its  Tsere  in  the  plural. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bap 
,©33  ,  ©3  ,n3©iin  ,  n©33  ,  1©33  ,©23  ,n©3  ,(2  )©33  ,©3» 

»  r*  7  -  7  t  s  -  •  7  t  j  -  •  7  :•  7  |7  V  •.*  7\  /  m  •  1  f 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


127 


.  ©aa  ,  ©hi?  ,  nbsn  ,  >i ©’■'3"'  ,  onffian  ,  ©‘’a©  ,  (2)  ©an  ,  ©has 
.  ( 2")  ©raffia n  ,  -niznnn  ,  oiarffian  ,  mffi'ffiin  ,  ©anffian  ,  nn  ,  ran: 

.(?>)  aDaffiffira  ,  anffi©:  ,ffia©aaa  ^ffi-aa 

Remark  35.  The  relative  is  often  omitted  as  in  English 
•pnbasn  ffiap  honey  I  gave  thee  to  eat  for  honey  which  I 
gave ,  etc ,  §  88.  3. 


nrajn  nansrrai  rr’ynsi  wnKi  ipn  !pffi-nx  sra  inn: 
-bsi  a-icaa-anp  :  nrra  ini©  aia  iffiEmx  srnp  mm 

sb  inn:  nos  annb-nx  anpm  cm:sb  nn:  imspa  ©ffiffi  •  pos 
binn  tap  am  ab  nmamsb  :  om:sb  ©-pnnm  -pnbastn  ffiam 
nab 1  :  nbsn  oiiaimba  ns  tibab  ma:  man  ;  -can  mans' 

T  T  V  I**  T  •  T  :  -  T  •*  '  V  V  -  •  -  I  -  - 

ab  nrs  npsa  san  inhx  mas  nab  san  nraffis 2  ia  ^  rnsn-s'b 
aan-a  Diana  nana  nan  xrnbs:  :  iann  ib-iamxb  n:m  :  nffisb 

T  -  •  -  t  ;  -  ;  t  t  :  •  •  •••  -  •  -  ■.  ••  •  :  x  •  : 

:  nbss-bs  ans  man 

T  I  V  -  T  T  -  : 

■np  ram 

1  ma  preceded  by  b  is  pointed  Hrb  before  a  guttural  and  FiftS  before  other 
consonants. 

2  The  construct  of  niEK  is  ndx  which,  before  suffixes,  becomes  "ipiTO  etc. 

x*  ••••  /  /  ••• 

•  •  • 

See  §  50. 


20.  A  yin  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 


It  is  not  easy  to  distinguish  accurately  the  significations  of  the  different  species 
of  -SO.  For  the  present  the  usual  sense  of  the  passive  and  causative  species 
may  be  retained,  the  Piel  may  be  rendered  to  surround  entirely ,  and  even  the 
unmeaning  surround  one's  self  may  be  tolerated  in  the  Hithpael,  which  is  not  in 
actual  use. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  btpjp : 


,  (2)  abn  ,  ©tap  ,  nmao  ,  nab  ,  top  ,  aap  ,  (3) 2b  ,  20  ,  niap 
,  mac:  ,  aae*1  ,  abn  ,  abn  as:  ,  ab:  ,  ab:  ,  ab:  ,  *>abn  ,  ■'ben 
.  anaoi  ,(2)  ffibci  ffiaoi  ,  naaao  ,  vraao  ,  mho  ,  nab: 

teen  ,  ©ibn  ,  nab-1  ,  ab©  ,  niacn  ,  macn  ,  ■jni'acn  ,  nabn. 

.  •oacn  ,5030*'  ,aainc:  , aaaio  ,  aban  ,  aow  ,  abx  ,(21  nracr 

.cac^  ,  nbam  .  iiiabr  ,(2)  ©2201 


128 


LESSONS  IN  READljS  (x  HEBREW. 


'  Remark  36.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  are 
sometimes  employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural 
subjects,  §  85.  6,  ipna  rpanaa  blessed  is  every  one  of  those 
blessing  thee. 

37.  The  conjunction  1  may  be  used  to  introduce  the 
apodosis  or  second  member  of  a  conditional  sentence, 
§  89.  1,  if  thou  wilt  not ,  etc.,  spa'll  then  shall  cleave  to 
thee ,  etc. 


nyn-nx  nsn  sb  :i8T'  *is*r\  nbs  :  ana  ?pa*ia*»  nms*  wnna 
"ba-ns  "ibbb  svfba  rvim  bipa  ynbn  sb-os  :  sw  sm a  13 
nns  "imsi  *v>ya  nna  iris  :  nb^n  nibbpn-ba  sa  apa*ri  wire 
nin^ "by  bia  :  mynn  iB"bs  nibna  anas  ab5  Taxn  :  r“ba 

t  ;  t  t  :  -  •  :  •  t  *:  r  -  •:  r 

ninara  rs  aanan  anban-p  rmrr-nx  nnnb  bnn  :  TpTi 

:  QininaTa-by  cpto  nano  niaayi  pbm 1  nab  anbam  o^byan 
bisn '  bisa  fash  bsab  nibnn  nbs  ianna  annan  ynia  as 

•  t  t  t  :  :  •  t  •  -  v  *:  -  :  :  t  •  :  ~  ■  v  •  • 

*.  bsnb1-ba  ansa  sbna  bns  n-m  nnn  :  Tasb 

••  t  ;  •  t  ••  ••  •  »  •  •  ••  t  v  •  —  t  t 


o  I 

^  i.  e.  Yodh  superfluous;  according1  to  the  Masoretic  direction,  there¬ 

fore,  it  is  to  be  neglected  in  reading  the  word. 

1  With  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  in  place  of  Tsere. 


21.  Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  §  58. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bap : 


,  a-'bia ,  aba  ,  aba  ,  abia .  naabn  ,  naab  ,  ab  ,  nab  ,  aba  ,  ab1 
,inab  ,  bins  nba^n  ,  bn1  ,  ba1  ,  (2)  arbin  ,  iabm  ,  aba 

7  i*7  -  •  7  »  i*  7  -  :  7  :  7  \  /  •  7  i  7  ••  t  • 

.  -priabin  ,  manci1  ,  ^a-bix  ,  oanab 


Remark  38.  The  interrogative  n  is  employed  in  simple 
direct  questions,  nniiin  shall  Hive?  in  indirect  questions 
ns  is  more  usual ;  inquire  n*:ns  nx  vjhether  I  shall  live. 

39.  In  a  disjunctive  question,  direct  or  indirect,  the 
first  member  is  introduced  by  n  and  the  second  by  os , 
e.  g.,  xbaax  nniata  nbbr.n  wilt  thou  keep)  (or  in  dependence 


LESSON'S  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


129 


on  a  previous  verb,  [to  Tcnozo\  whether  thou  wilt  keep') 
his  commandments  or  not  t 


!-ps  aaiasa  *iawin  naa  omasi  abaa  rrirp  ordain 

•  l  T  •  •  IV  •  AT  *  •  •  •  •••  •• 

mnbs  rrirp  rpibin  net?  s-Hrrbavis  rnan 1  :  lascari  Wbs 
an  nnsi  :sb-as  irriaaa  laenn  rnnba  -iffis-ns  nanb2  aanaa 

■  :  t  -  ;  •  t  :  •  :  •  *:  '  :  it  :  •  v  ■:  v  -  -  t  t  :  *  — 

nans4  rrirp  mwa  bsp  sb  •’n  an  nrrinan  was3  wbsTS  an 

t  :  -  t  :  -  •  •  •  *  :  ••  :  t  :  '  •  r  v  ~ 

sb  j'psrrbnn  aaa  rs  •'n  ann  :nsns  na  ba>  rrirp  nawnrs 
oannn  i  mns  -rbamaas  ssa-by  aiari  ■’a  nnaarns  renin 

••  •  i*  •  *  rr  ••  i—  /••••—  •  — •  ••  •  ®  ••  ••  •  »  t  •  “ 

•  IT  t  IT  •  I  •  •  •  •  ••  ••• 

nbsn  Driaswba~ns  rrirp  tjvrirn  :  nrpbns-bs  aabn  nnben 

m  «(  «  a  ■»  x  ••  *  a  o  •  ••  ••  X •  TT  ••  •  ••  «•  ••  •  -  t  «a 

•  T  I  a  *  •  •  •  •• 

toaa  nrina  aria  nnahn  naasba 


iip  mss 

Pret.  with  Yav  Conversive. 


‘’"ip  "p23> 
2  §  52.  1. 


§  50.  2. 


4 


48.  1, 


22.  Ayin  Yav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  §  59. 

The  Piel  of  ta^p  means  to  raise  :  the  Niphal,  which  is  not  in  use,  may  in  this 
exercise  he  rendered  to  be  risen , 


Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bfaja  : 

,  »’>? ,  Bn-tetps ,  (2)  nariaapn  ,  aap  ,  n:ap  ,  (2)  nap  ,  (2)  op 
,  (3)  mrip  ,  aaiiwpa  ,  naipa  ,  naipa  ,  nipa  ,  (2)  aipa  ,  wnfc 
,  ■anp  ,  wip  ,  aaipa  ,  (2)  naaaipn  ,(2)  naaaipn  ,  (2)  nnaaip 

.  ijanp  ,  iaip  ,  riaap 

,0'ps  ,trp»  ,  naapn  ,  wiiwpn  ,nj?r  ,myn  ,wpn 
,inia^pn  ,(2)a‘*i  ,  (3)  an  ,nan?  ,  nan  ,  aaipw 


Hem ark  40.  When  the  predicate  precedes  its  subject, 
it  sometimes  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 
is  to  say,  it  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  instead  of  the 
feminine  and  in  the  singular  instead  of  the  plural,  §  55. 1. 

41.  The  conjunction  i  may  be  emphatically  used  be¬ 
tween  a  noun  placed  absolutely  and  the  clause  to  which 
it  relates  §  89.  2,  the  blessing  nanan  it  shall  even  be 
given,  etc. 

6* 


130 


LESSONS  IN  BEADING  HEBREW. 


42.  A  present  action  conceived  of  as  unfinished  and 
continuing  in  the  future  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense, 
§  78.  2,  Niari  yjpr  whence  art  thou  coming  t  the  action 
being  regarded  as  still  continuing,  whereas  in  ansa  ■pipa 
whence  have  you  come  t  the  action  is  viewed  as  at  an  end. 


a® Pb*n  o pH  :  irrob  ©is  *ow  :  nabn  nes  Piia  awn  xb 

r  t  —  i  v  ••  -  It  t  -  ••  :  •  t  :  it  t  v  '  y  v  -  T 

tprnruh  iitz’j  iris  run  :  ■pntnpb  nrauin  ?rrH:af  ns  ;  “ittiprb 

•  /  t  •  •  t  •  •  •  /•••—•  I—  •  T  l  •  •  •  •  —  |  •  • 

*vyn  ia©H-bx  ttibc'n  :  ns-tn  rrapxrrbs  wna»m  -ibn-nrs 2  bra 

•  t  •*  :  i  v  :  :  —  t  t  rr  v  •  •;  • 

“bs  :  mirb  “nTiai1  !ia“ip!,i  :  nin*'  msT8  DT>®b&  lafcn  nfcxb 
“nrsa  Ti'bs  p'n'bsi  ifey  tiny  pbs  Tbn  nirxai  pbx  tabn  its2 
roian  nrcn  :  sian  rsxn  pbn  pox  ;“iaps  nth  nwx  Titan 
ibjna  n^rbriren  DTysb  nsroi  Tnxb  anne®  nth  -i®s  ns-in 

•••*■•  •  •  •  «  •  »  •  T  •  •  r  •  •  •  •  *“  I  •  IT  •  •  •  ••  ••  ••  • 

•  •  ••  *  •  •• 


♦ 


1  §  50.  1. 

2  Supply  the  noun  “place”  as  the  antecedent  of  the  relative,  which  is  itself 
governed  by  a  preposition  not  expressed.  Complete  the  Hebrew  sentence  by 
supplying  the  ellipsis  in  both  cases.  See  §  30.  3. 


23.  Lamedii  Aleph  Verbs,  §  60. 


The  Piel  of  fcttfcE  may  for  the  sake  of  distinction  be  rendered  to  find  out. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  b-rp  : — - 

,  nsian  ,  nsi®  ,  (3)  si®?  ,  afsrr:  ,  (2)  n:x£®pi  ,  xra? 

.  Tixapn  ,  nxsttx  ,  roxspa  ,  *cxm?  ,  (2)  rcxiten  ,  (2)  roxiisn 


Remark  43.  The  verb  sb®  takes  a  direct  object  in  the 
Kal  to  be  full  of  anything,  and  in  the  Niphil  to  be  filled 
with  anything ;  in  the  Piel  to  fill  something  with  some¬ 
thing,  it  may  have  two  objects. 


i;:n  -i®xH  ibjrbs  y*-\H  *>33n  bxtaurbx  nirv’  xip^-i 

Nip  trp  :  arrrn  sbH  ar®  aw  Tsip“s'b  -i®sH  “>S  nsip-o 
;  s~®  *>b  inip  tojw  ■’b  n:sipprbx  ymbx  naiim  :  TprfbxHs 

r  t  •  t"  7 1;  K  nrr  •  t  re  •  *  '¥***!  v  ~  '  r*.  ft  “ 


»  t 


:n  :  Dwmrrpx  n:sb®m  roxam 


nar  n*n  rvarrnx  irxr®- 


LESSONS  IN  HEADING  HEBREW. 


131 


n©s  rnrr  “cs 

v  ■:  t  :  •  *: 

“ib-s-a  nint:  ab 

•  t  ;  t  •• 

1  See  §  18. 


jn’norms  rnsn  shan't  Dins  tpna  D^sa  n^ia 
:  ns-m  ynsrrns  nb  mb 1  c^ntoa  msa  rpnsain 

I  V  T  T  *.*»':  V  ST  •  S  -  ml.-  I 

!  DTi’bs 


24.  Lamedh  He  Verbs,  8  61. 


nbs  in  Kal  means  to  reveal,  i.  e.  to  uncover  a  secret,  in  Piel  to  uncover ,  in 

▼  T 

Hiph.il  to  exile ,  i.  e.  to  uncover  or  strip  a  land  of  its  inhabitants,  in  Hithpael  to 
uncover  one's  self. 


Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  biaja 

.■’ban  , nbra  ,  ( 2)  nbro  ,  niba  ;*nba  , aa^ba  ,  nnba  ,  aba  ,  aba 
,  nbaa  ,  nbaa  ,  aban  ,  mba  ,  aba  ,  aba  ,  aba  ,  nrb'a  .  Drfbaa 
,nb'jp  ,  naan  ,  oban  ,  nbana  ,  nb'as  ,  nbrp  ,  na'ban  ,(2)nban 

.  naba-1 

:  nanbtaa  naar-a  aVnab  atena  •rb-’  ©nn-naa  n:a  n©s  ©-sn  i© 

r  r  •  •  *  t  1  v  **  ;  t  •  *  ••  ••  r  t  *  i“  t  t  y  •  t  • 

nababa"  sb  n^iaffin  ©a  ©a  D’daffin  n:n  ynsn-by  n^n'bs  a©1’  o:rsn 
n^a-ns  n-aab  -tab©  nibaa  vra  :  nrpja  n©s  nan  man--©  as 

•  •  ••  ••  •  “  •  •  •  —  •  T  ••  •  •  —  •  •  -  •  I  • 

•  •  •  ••  ■  ■  •  •  • 

■p*a  !  aiyaaa  a^bs  nsna  n©sa  m:®  ntab©-bs  nam  sn^a1  n-'n*1 
nan  sb  n©;  n^banrs  ntotsn  :niby  b©*t  narpb  nam  nan  a© 

....  t  t  •  t  v  t  •  -  -  —  -  t  r  -  •  •  t  t 

nas  n©s-ba  ns  a©y  ibina^aab  tans  -©as  :natan  nita  na2  naiata 

t  .  v  t  ••  *:r  t  :  ’  :  v  vs  rv  t  •  tv* 

:  obcanna  nnteso  n®sa  D^taiBrnba  nnn  nn©n:3  sb  :  nam 


t  :  viv 


V  5  V  IV 


T  I 


1  See  Remark  20,  Lesson  12. 

2  ^p  for  ;  or  it  may  be  translated  but ,  to  which  it  is  often  equivalent  after  a 
negative. 

3  The  feminine  in  the  sense  of  the  neuter. 


25.  Numerals,  §  65. 

Remark  44.  In  stating  dates  cardinal  numbers  are 
commonly  used  for  the  year  and  day,  and  ordinals  for  the 
month. 

45.  The  age  of  persons  is  idiomatically  expressed  by 
the  words  1?  son  or  na  daughter  prefixed  to  the  term  of 


132 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW 


tlieir  life,  thus  ®D®  ®:©B“a  son  of  eight  years  i.  e.  eight 
years  old. 

See  also  the  rules  in  8  73. 


®yaax  :  did®  :®'i«  a,>©©n  soasa  ®©o  sqto'*  n®b© 

t  t  :  -  •  r  *  -  ;  •  *  t  t  •  *r  ts 

p®©n  i  ns:  *>:©  :  a1©'1  n®'®  !  n»»  :  a©no  ®ya©  :a“ob© 

t  t  ;  ••  :  •  r  ••  ••  •  t  t:  t  •  •  ■:  t  :  •  •  t  : 

iQip®  ary  jd^eds  ©'©  :  ary®  ®b©  :a‘'©!’®  nya©  :  arban 

•  —  •  •  t  •  -  r  •  ••  •  t  f  •  :  -  t  “  -  •  •  •  t  :  - 

;  ®b-o  Diyaixi  ar  a^yaas  :  naTairn  a^yaas  ary  sd^ted  dip® 

T  •  “  •  T  *  •  •  x  •  ”  ••  •  •  t  •  *“  •  T  “  »T  •  ! 

-p  :®d©  D^yop-na  •.Dyr  p:©«-p  :  ama  did®  :  anb®  a"©-* 
:.nb“©a  nbx1  ®©b©  imba  '■>p®i  sti  :iab©a  th  ®db  a-®b© 

-  i  :  v  «■  t  :  r  :  ••  :  :  t  :  •  r  t  t  •  : 

B©i®in  d'p®  :  ®bx®  a©as®  ®a©y  dip®  :  d^cds  a©y  a-1:® 

•  :  •  -  :  v  ••  t  •  t  it  :  v  :  •  t  •:  t  t  ^  : 

jd^ps®5!  a^yaci  n®b®  abx  ar©yi  a-1:®  :®:c  pis®  yaw  ®d® 

•  IT  T  •  :  •  :  t  :  lv  v  •  :  v  :  •  -  :  t  t  ••  -  :  r  r 

®yaasa  yaax  ®:ca  s  ©anb  ans  Dip  ■>®©n  ©ana  d?p©  rfica 
rwiiipn  p:©a  :®anb  ®©©na  iyaaa  n:©  a’ntfboa  rycp®  ©anb 

•  •  :  -  -  :  •  v  -  t  •  •:  i-  •  •  :  rr  t  t  •  :  •  •  •  :  -  v 

-tpryb2  nyaasi  ar©y  ara  :  ©anb  ai®ya  r-®yn  ©ana  iab®b 

•  •  •  —  •  XX*  “  ■  ••••  •  “  ••mm  T  ••  •  •  T  *  •  •  !  T  ! 

•  •  ••  •  •  ••  •  ■  •  •  • 

:bp®n-ni©ib®  ;arn  p©nan  :®yasb  miDnan  opnD^i  :®an  a©y 

§••  ••  mm  •  •  •  •—  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  ••  •  •  "  ■  •• 

•  •  •  •  *  •  •  •  • 


T  T 


:®ax®  nancy 

t  ••  r  •  a 


1  Observe  the  distinction  between  the  predicate  and  the  attributive. 
*  S  65.  3. 


The  End  of  the  Deluge.  Genesis  8,  1-9. 


ipx  a©x  n®nan-ba-ps"!  ppnn-ba  nsi  nb-ns  Dribs  aarr 

v  *  >-  k:  r  *  t  vs  t  -  i—  t  *•  •  *  v  •  vs  •  •  — 

p'ry®  rosy  :  a-1©®  t®©w  rakn-by  nr  a^n'bs  aayr  napa 

j  ;  ;  •  ;  rr  •  *  *  it  -  it-  j  v  t  t  -  ~  /•  vs  “  a  p*  at  ~  - 

a^©®  nry  :  a-'©ffl®“Ta  a©a®  sbar  ana©®  naasn  ainp 

■  r~  -  i  \  r  •  •  it  r  *  "  •  v-tv  “  p  r  •  -  •  at  t  -  v  \  p  : 

n:pi  :  ai"1  ps®i  o^ffiDn  nap®  o‘®n  rcrm  ai©*i  aibn  yaxn  by© 

Di©m  :  ©aax  m  by  ©ahb  uv  a®y-nyaca .  lyi^an  ©ana  pop® 

•  *  -  :  itt  •:  r-  t  V  v  a  *  t  it  t  it  i  *  :  •  •  :  -  •••  j  -  t  - 

*>©sa  Tsa:  ®ahb  ansa  r-i©ya  r->©yn  ©ahn  ay  aicm  aibn  rn 

j-  r  v  :  •  v  —  jt  v  ;  •  •  it  ft  •  rr  v  j  —  r  t  :  <  j  t  t 

t  n©y  acs  napn  iibn-ps  n:  npsr  oii  a^yaas  rs©  ipri  :  arnn 

itt  /r  *:  it  -  I  /  -  v  j*  :  •  ~  a  j*  t  j  -  1  h’  •  •  :  r  ttit 

nb©,',i  :  yasn  by©  a-,©n  pca^ay  a-?©!  sir1  sar  aairrns  nbo^n 

-  -  s  *  r  v  rr  t  p  •  r  *■  v  /  s  *■  v  t  «*•••  -  if  it  v  r  •  :  • 

nsa©_s'bn  :n©asn  ©e  by®  a11©®  rp®  nisab  ips©  ®;©®-ps 

nsrrba  ©E_by  a'©  •o  ®ap®_bs  i^bs  dc'pt  nb;.a-qab  nib®  ®:r 

att  t  j •*  ;  *■  ■  p  r  t  -  ••  r-  t«t-  t  :  -  I  -  s  -  t  t  - 

:  ®ap®-bs  rbs  nns  sasi  phs^D  ia11  nb®y 

It  -  v  w  *•  n  /**  T  •  T  V  ft  •  •  T  p  I  ■  • 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


133 


The  Creation  and  Fall.  Genesis  1-3. 


CHAPTER  I.  S 

inn  nmn  pisnn  :  pan  nsn  maiBn  ns  mn'bs  sia  nnssiS  2  n 

n :  it  1  v  t  t  ;  J  y  it  t  :  •  y  t  -  /••  k  vs  Jt  t  t  . 

■nasm  :  man  i:s~bp  nsmn  mn’bs  nnm  ninn  as-bp  -icm  nnan  3 

1  -  •  tr  -  r  :  -  v  v.*  -  :  •  vs  -  j  :  a  ;  j-  :  -  '  v  v  :  t 

biaa  aia-ia  insmns  mn'bs  sia  :  ins-inin  ins  tp  mn'bs  4 

j-  :  —  a  1  r  v  t*  vs  :  4-  -  1  •  :  1“  a  j*  :  v*  vs 

sip  pnnbn  nv  iisb  1  mn'bs  sip51!  :  p©nn  pm  insn  pa  mn'bs  n 
inn  mn'bs  irs*n  a  :  ms  nn'i  ipmmin  aip-ma  nbib  o 
ypinms  mn'bs  topa  :  mab  ma  pa  biiaa  “’nil  man  Pina  yen  7 

-  h  r  it  v  •  v:  -j —  •  it  r  •  v*  '  r  •  :  -  j*  •  •  at  -  '  j  :  —  hf  r 

yipib  bpa  nos  man  pap  pipib  nnna  ibs  man  pa  biam 

•  I;©  nii  ipa-ma  mp-inin  ma©  pipib  mn'bs  sipfln  :  pirn  s 
ins  nnpa-bs  ma©n  nnna  man  mn'bs  lasa  a 


9 


Qian  nnpabn  pis  n©anb  1  norths  sipa  •.  "ja^n^i  n©asn  nsinn  * 
pisn  s©in  mn'bs  ias«n  !  aia-ia  mn'bs  sifln  mai  sip  11 

1  y  r  t.  «~  :  1-  •  vs  v  j  -  1  v  vs  : > —  A’"  jt*t 

ia-ipir  i©s  iPab  ins  nirp  •na  pp  pit  yira  a  toy  son 
nnmab  pit  yira  aap  sun  pisn  saimn  :  p-mm  pisn-bp  12 
ai p-T.n  :  aia-ia  mn'bs  smn  nnmab  ia-ipir  ibs  iis-n©p  ppn  13 

V  It  •  :  I-  I  •  v*  vs  :  I —  a-  •  :  a  :  ”  r:  r  :  ,  It-: 

ypia  nisa  ini  mn'bs  iasn  a  :  i©iba  nn  ipa~inn  14 
Qia^b^  nippiabi  rihsb  rm  nbibn  pan  nip  pa  bipanb  oifean 
;  Tp-inm  pisn-bp  msnb  niaan  pipia  niisab  ninn  :  oacn  to 

1 1”  •  ;  1-  J  v  at  t  -  v  t  ;  •  -  t  -  -  u*  :  •  :  •  <  r  ;  1*  t  ; 

nbcaab  bn^n  nisan-ns  Qibnan  n'isan  potk  nip'bs  ©psi  ig 

v  jv  :  v  :  t  -  <  t  —  v  a*  :  —  *  :  *  r  :  v  •  vs  -j~  — 

pii  :  aiaaian  nsn  nbipn  nbcaab  ppn  n'sarrnsi  niP  17 
nbi'san  Difla  Steabn  :  pisn-bp  Tsnb  Qiaan  pipia  nin'bs  ons  is 
aipim  :  aixria  Qin'bs  siii  aann  pan  nisn  pa  biiianbn  i& 
pi©  Qian  aniiji  nin'bs  lasm  a  sipiai  nn'i  ipa-inin  a 
siain  :  niaan  pipi  i:s-bp  pisn-bp  paipi  pipn  nin  ©a:  21 
ios  nisain  1  n.inn  ©erba  nsn  nibisn  nnsnn-ns  mh'bs 

v  ”t  v  v  rr  jt  -  1-  vjv  t  j”  ;  a-  :  -  v.  .  _  -  .  vs 

« ainia  Qin'bs  si*n  nnmab  n:a  nip-ba  nsn  nnnab  nian  nil© 

»  •  v  vs  -  ••  •  :  It  r  I  <  i  ;  |.  ;  .  -  _  :  rf 

oiasa  nian_ns  nsban  nain  ms  lasb  nin'bs  nns  aiain  22 

•  —  -  •  —  —  ¥  «  ;  •  •  j  ;  A  •*  <  VS  IT  '  V  »T  S  “  ^ 


•'nil  v.  1. 


134 


LESSONS  IN  READING  HEBREW. 


23 

a  4  “ras*-1!!  s  •.  'Xi'an  an  apa-Nnn  aayrni  :  rasa  aa*>  tiiyni 

•  J  i  »v  v  •  :  i-  v  rt  •  :  i-  I  v  rr  t  v  r  I  i  t  i 

ns-in^ni  teann  mama  ra'ab  ri»n  tot:  pasn  sain  BTfbs 
“3  rianarrnsn  nnab  rasn  r>n-ns  toy'bs  toyi  :  ■jd-tv’I  ryab 

T  •  •  T  ■  T  v  t  t  —  -  •/  ■  v:  ~j~  —  *  i—  •  •  r  at  ■  ; 

26  aasn  :  aia-o  a-m'bs  say  y,;*ab  nansn  teaa-ba  nsi  nnab 

■•"  J  "  i  *  C  :  i“  -  «v*  •  :  vt  t  it  v  r:  t  y  ;  t  •  : 

cr'yan  e*n  nan  a  rian  Nnaaaa  aabaa  aas  ntoys  a*nbs 

1  J  J  T  ~  :  •  :  •  :  rr  :  •  t •  :  *  :  »t  t  /v  ~n-  * 

£7  saa**i  :  nasn-by  toaan  toa^n“baan  naSn-baan  nanaan  adatom 

t  :  •  -  >  •/  it  t  -  /••  it  •-•  iv  r  t  :  i  r  r  t  t  :  T  ..  .  _  •  -  r  - 

nap:*  aar  ins  s-a  a*m'bs  absa  itbaa  tonsn-ns  i  a*n'bs 

28  naan  na  norths  ahb  aas«*i  a^n'bs  tons  paan  :  ans  saa 

n«n-baai  Button  spyai  tonn  nans  iiai  ntoaai  •psrrrs  nsbai 

29  1  atoyba-ns  arb  inn:  ran  a 'ribs  aasn  :  pasn-by  ntoaan 

v  j-  t  v  v  t  •  -  t  ••  •  •  vs  v  j  -  1  v  it  t  -  v  rr  it 

yfT  fyns  ia-atos  yyn-bs-nsi  rasn-ba  as-by  atos  yi  ya'T 

—  IV**  •  j  /  V  l  7**  T  T  V  :  f  V  r  T  T  J**  J  “  ••  * ;  —  ••  M  jh 

*>  i  bbbi  adatom  n-y-babi  yasii  yn-babn  :  nbasb  mm*  arb  yi 

j  :  •  -  T  -  I  T  :  1  v  r  T  J-  -  T  ;  rr  ;  r  ;  w  :  r  /v  t  “at 

:  p-wna  nbasb  airy  payyns  n*n  rs3  itoratos  yasrrby  toaia 

31  ■■'rm  aiyrm  nsa  nic-mm  n®y  ntts’ba-ns  trn'bx 


•  -  |T* 


T  T 


:  iffiian  o'.i  *ipa 

i*  •  -  »  h  ^ 


CHAPTEE  II.  a 

s  *ijiaiBn  cisa  n^n'bs  b-N  r  csaybai  p“sni  Dtoisn  'bi" 
!  nicy  Tibs  ircsbBTya  ^i^a'bn  niBa  riaib^i  “toy  itos  inasb^ 

it  t  n  v.  :  -  :  t  •  •  •  :  -  j  -  :  •  -  at  t  jv  : 

3  "baa  fiato  ia  ■'a  ins  to^p"1!  "anatom  Di‘-ns  to  Nibs  saa^i 

4  anatom  nimbin  mbs  s  :  nitoyb  a",m'bs  saa-atos  inasba 

•  v  r  -  i  :  i  v  j-  i  i—  v  «  ;t  t  v  *:  :  -  : 

n  m-ito  i  ban  :  a^atoi  its  aNibs  min*'  nitoy  ana  asaa~a  rasm 

-  j*  j  :  •  it  t_:  1  v  /y  vr  v:  rr  :  x  :  at  ;  it  •  :  r  v  it  t  : 

aiaarn  s'b  1a  may  aaa  niton  atoybai  rasa  mwa  aaa  niton 

•  ;  •  •  at  :  •  v  j-.  cr  t  ■  vr  r  :  r  v  t  t  jv  :  i*  v  v *  "-*  T  ~ 

6  nby  asi  :  naasnms  aayb  ns  ansi  pasnrby  to*m'bs  rira 

jv  -:i-  v  :  it  t  *:  rr  v  k.  r~  '  ■  -  jt  »  :  1  v  t  t  -  •  v:  «t  : 

i  "ns  a*>nbs  riina  ira  s  naasn  *>:B"ba"ns  natom  vasn-ns 

•  «  t  :  v  •  -  it  t  it  j-  ;  t  v  ■«  :  •  :  '  v  at  t  •  • 

aasn  ^n^n  a^^n  natos  nssa  ns«i  maasnna  aay  aasn 

it  t  it  r  :  -  a-  -  y  :  •  it  -  :  j-  •  -  t  ▼  jt  >  •  t  t  t  t  rr 

3  "ns  ato  ato^i  aapa  pya  n  awi’bs  nin*>  :  rm  toa:b 

9  aan:  ryba  naasn-,;a  trn'bs  nan"’  naa^i  :  ay  atos  aasn 

/ t  ;  •*  !  »jr*  ▼  t  r  *v  jt  »  •  <t  !  -  ;  •  •  it  t  iv  !  it  *  it 

:  yai  aia  nyan  ryi  in  pina  a^nn  ryi  basab  aiai  nsaab 
,  nyaasb  n*>m  ais*1  totoan  wnrns  niptonb  iaya  sa’"  ann 

1 1  nbrnn  pas"ba  ns  aaton  s*n  nto^s  ansn  ato  :  a*tosa 

12  :  anton  psi  nbaan  ato  aia  snnn  rasn  anvn  :  a n*n  atoytos 

-i  -  ’  v  n  :  *  v  :  -  rr  a  K  “  I  v  rr  t  j**M  rrr-  vt  •  1 


EESSOXS  IX  READIXG  HEBREW. 


185 


‘injrTQ-ih  ibp  pns-ba  ns  rpisn  spj  pna  “^"cbi  JJ 
inns  sin  ppnn  nn:m  mbs  nanp  sbnn  sin  bpnn  ^bbn 
:  nnabbi  rnayb  Tinsa  r0n?  nl"l « 

^  bps  prrpy  nasb  onsn-b?  m*bs  mm  pa  }« 

:  man.  nia  aaa  qbas  cna  p"  aaa  basn  sb  ym  aia  nynn 
nry  ib-ntoys  inab  cnsn  nan  aiirsb  cnn'bx  mm  nasa  is 

v  v*  •  v  vs  iv  A  -  :  w  t  it  >  v:  v  l  •  vs  jt  : 

niy-ba  nsi  nnbn  mrrba  nansnaa  curbs'  mm  ns  a  is 

I  j  T  ••  :  v  r  -  «-  -  t  t  t  rT  i  •  •  vs  t  :  v  •  -  i  :  v  : 

ansn  ib-snpi  nbs  'bin  ib-snpT'-na  nisnb  nbs  mbs  saa  d “'bbn 
aiybn  nanan-bab  niab  ansn  snpa  :  Sab  s-n  mn  tt:  s 

1  j  ;  t  ••  :  -  r  :  ••  t  t  it  tI;  •  -  I  «  j  vt  -  v r: 

riim  "bsa  ;  inaa  nry  saa~sb  cnsbi  nnbn  mn  bbbn  cPbn  21 

t  ;  -  ,  ;  v  ;  v  «•  rt  t  1  t  t  :  av  t  -  j-  -  v  :  •  -  t  - 

nba  nboa  anybsa  nns  nsa  ‘iir-s'^n  ansmby  nannn  >  cn'bs 

VT  r  J  :  •  -  T  :  -  •  -  -  1  -  •  -  I  AT  •  -  IT  T  IT  -  VT  ••  :  -  s-  vs 

nbsb  ansmia  npb-nbs  ybamrs  1  am'bs  mm  pa  :  nsnnn  22 
•niuan  ■'bsya  asy  cyan  nsr  ansn  nasa  icnsmbs  nsna  23 

miraim  p"by  :  nsrnnpb  msa  p  nbs  snpi  nsrb  abaa  24 

•  t  -:i-  I  ••  1  t>t:.\  vj  ••  r  r  •  j-»t  •  :  a*  t  :  • 

ofvoffl  n^n^n  :  qns  niaab  rm  ib.ffisa  pam  iawnNi  ras’rs  ns 

•  sibbani  «bi  in©in  DP^n  camy 


<  :  i* 


it  :  • 


IT  T  »  T 


CHAPTER  III.  y 

naion  DTi'bs  nim  r.©y  ncs  nnian  n^n  baa  Eiby  n*n  i;n:rTi  » 
nasm  :  ian  py  baa  ^iba^n  sb  a^Kb^  nas^a  rx  r&xrrbs*  2 
pm-rina  nos  pyn  insai  : bas:  larrpy  Psa  bn-rrbs  rbsn  3 
nas^T  :  pnan-p  is  pan  sbn  sisaa  fesn  sb  n'n'bs  nas  4 

cabas  nip  p  a^nbs  yn'i  •'a  i  pnan  nia-sb  nb^n-bs  bran  n 

nosn  snm  :  ym  aia  pnb  C'n'bsa  bn^^m  aa^ry  "npE;1!  aba  q 

bpbnb  yyn  nanri  cryb  sin-nnsn  pi  bbsab  pyn  aia  P 
ap  n:np»m  :  basa  may  nb'sbpa  pm  basm  bnsa  npm  1 
i  nnan  anb  nbay^n  nbsn  nby  ?nsn"a  an  canp  ia  pna  chab 
sinn^a  can  mnb  pa  pbnna  a^n'bs  nim  bip-ns  ayab^a  g 
nin-'  snp"i  *.  pn  py  pina  mn'bs  nin-i  asa  post  cnsn  9 

n  .  vt»:  -  mt  -  1  y  '  v  :  •  jt  :  :  •  :  t  t  it 

pa  ■>nyab  qbp-ns  nasa  :  na?s  “,b  nasa  cnsn-bs  c‘n'bs  n 
nns  cnp  p  pb  nan  ^a  nas^.  :sansi  p:s  n'na-p  a  nan  11 
onsn  nasa  i  nbas  aaa-bas  pibab  Tiin,'^a  nbs  pynaan  12 

•  IT  •  \  T  J  IT  T  VV  '  T  “J  J*  2  ’  S  "•!•••  y»  — •  J  ..  T  |  •  •; 


pi-iTD  inN  rc:n  v.  25. 


136 


LESSONS  IN  LEADING  HEBREW. 


13  nassm  :baa?n  wmia  “>b"nin3  sin  “nay  nmna  nos?  rioaan 

V  —  r*  IT  I  K’  T  »  J*  r  j  it  -r  •  T  •  f  J~  T  JV  t  •  rr 

aasion  ®nsn  ni:s?n  naasznn  miry  rs-rna  noaab  mn'bs?  nnrn 

•  r  *  “  nx  “  t  •  rr  v  -  k  t  j  -  *t  •  rr  r  v.  »t  : 

14  hns?  "nix  nssn  miry  *>3  Snsn-ba?  i  nvfba?  rvim  naasm  :  br>5?"i 

t  -  <  r  x  j •  r  r  tt  -  j*  v:  t  :  -  i~  rr 

"wba  brain  nsyn  -rbn  nsh-rby  men  mn  baan  nianambaa 

r*  :  T  V"  /TTJ  !••••  J  I  •  •  —  jg  x  —  ,/■  •  ^  •  T  ••  x  —  f* 

•o  ny-ir  “pm  Tpnr  pan  nirssn  pan  tbp  mos?  i  nans?n  :  ?p*n 
16  nas?  nossn-bs?  o  :  apy  nssmrn  nnssn  ossn  sano*’  ssnn 

*  t  jt  •  it  /i~  t  rr  ;  it  -  :  j  1  :  i  :  « 

-inpncn  rrmss^bstn  naa  “’“bn  aaya  pshnn  nsiany  nans?  nann 
!7  bassnn  tiros?  bnpb  fnyao  ->a  nas?  nns?bn  o  :  ’arbira"’  ssnnn 
nanssn  mas  nsaa  bassn  ssb  nassb  $p?nnx  mrs?  pjn-po 

is  pb  moan  nnnnn  pipn  i man  ba  robassn  panya  Tpnaya 

19  -ba?  nano  ny  nnb  basin  mss?  nyra  s  “non  airy_ns?  nbassn 

v  1  :  i  «“  v  •«•  -  j  1  v  -  <—  :  r.*  t  —  v  r*  v  »t  :  -  it  : 

a  ssnpm  :  anon  nsybssn  nni?  nnyo  nnpb  n:aa  “>a  rvbnasn 

21  mim  "iyym  i  nn-ba  ns?  nmn  a?nn  ^a  mn  nimra?  no  nnssn 

t;  —  -  itt  r  it  :  it  r  • r  at-  s  :  •  /“  »  t  t  ft 

22  nasim  n  i  noabrn  my  mana  nmoa?bn  nns?b  n^n’bs? 

j  -  i-  •  ;  —  i.  t  :  t  v  :  •  s  «  »  :  •  n 

1  nnyn  ynn  ana  ny“b  nsaa  “ns?a  rrn  nns?n  nn  n^n'bs?  nnn*> 

jt  -  ;  at  t  j  -  v  t  v  •  J~  -  :  t  t  t  t  it  »  *•  •  v:  jt  s 

23  nnnbcm  :  nbyb  nm  bas?n  nn^nn  pya  n a  npbn  nm  nbo“’-'!B 

24  nns^n  :  no  a  npb  nos?  ntns?n-ns?  nayb  pypa  n^n'bs?  ninn 
annn  nnb  ns?n  n^anan-ns?  nnynsb  nnpa  p«sn  nnaarrnaa 

:  n^nn  py  pnn-ns?  naob  rarnnan 

*  !•  -  I-  I  »-  I  V  VV  V  I  *  V  ■/  ~  I  •  ~* 


Masoretic  Notes  Explained. 


“’nan  'a 
aamyr  'n 
pnno  nns?  oan 


Large  Beth. 
Small  He. 


Dagluesh  after  Shurek. 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


1.  The  Prefixed  Particles,  §§  24-28. 

Translate  into  Hebrew: — 

A  bouse  and  field.  A  field  and  a  house.  In  a  house. 
In  the  house.  To  a  house.  To  the  house.  As  a  house. 
As  the  house. .  From  a  house.  From  the  house.  The 
house  in  the  field.  From  the  house  unto  the  field.  Light 
and  darkness.  Day  and  night.  From  night  to  night  and 
from  day  to  day.  Darkness  in  the  night.  Light  in  the 
day.  As  the  sun  in  the  heavens.  The  darkness.  The 
evening.  Evening  and  morning.  As  the  sea.  Light 
from  the  sun  in  the  day  and  from  the  moon  and  from  the 
stars  in  the  night.  Bread  from  the  field  for  man  and  for 
beast.  And  flesh.  And  the  flesh.  And  from  the  flesh. 
And  to  the  flesh.  As  flesh.  Not  day  nor  (lit.  and  not) 
night.  From  sun  to  stars.  From  the  sun  unto  the  stars. 

2.  The  Personal  Pronouns,  §  29. 

Direction  1.  In  conformity  with  Remark  2  on  page  111, 
possessives,  when  not  immediately  followed  by  the  object 
possessed,  are  to  be  rendered  by  the  preposition  b  thus,  I  am 
my  beloved's  a,nd  my  beloved  is  mine  "’b  "Hiti  t'-mb  . 
The  verb  to  have  must  be  paraphrased  by  the  same  pre¬ 
position,  e.  g.  You  have  a  brother  nx  asb  lit.  a  brother  is 
to  you  •  He  has  no  son  “ja  ib  px  lit.  there  is  no  son  to 
him. 


138 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


Translate  into  Hebrew  : — - 

Ye  masc.  I  and  lie.  They  masc.  and  they  fem.  She 
and  thou  fem.  Ye  fem.  and  we.  In  us.  In  them  (m. 
and  /’.).  In  me.  In  her.  In  thee  (m.  and  f).  In  you 
(m.  and  f).  From  eternity  unto  eternity  thou  art  God. 
From  God  to  us.  From  me  to  you.  We  are  in  the 
house,  ye  are  in  the  field.  He  is  in  the  light,  I  am  in 
darkness.  The  earth  is  Jehovah’s.  The  silver  is  mine 
and  the  gold  is  his.  Heaven  is  thine.  God  is  for  us. 
God  is  not  like  man.  We  are  like  you.  He  is  like  us. 
The  house  is  yours,  and  the  field  is  theirs.  The  sea 
is  his.  The  bread  is  mine.  I  have  no  bread  in  the  house. 
We  have  a  brother;  he  is  still  living.  You  have  no 
brother.  There  is  no  beast  in  the  field. 


3.  Other  Pronouns,  §  30. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

This  house.  In  this  house.  This  is  the  house.  That 
field.  From  that  field.  That  is  the  field.  God,  who  is 
in  the  heavens.  Who  is  in  the  heavens  ?  The  bread, 
which  is  in  the  house.  What  is  in  the  house?  Who  am 
I  ?  What  are  we  ?  These  stars.  These  are  the  stars. 
From  this  day.  In  this  day.  Whose  is  this  house? 
Whose  is  that  bread  ?  The  place  in  which  we  are.  The 
land  in  which  I  am.  Who  is  this  masc.  ?  AY  hat  is  this 
fem.  ?  AVho  art  thou  fem.  ?  Is  this 2  thou 1  masc.  ? 
This  field,  in  which  thou  art.  The  land,  from  which  they 
are.  These  waters,  which  are  from  the  sea.  Jehovah  is 
mine  and  I  am  his.  Ye  are  liuht  in  Jehovah.  AYe  be- 

o 

long  to  the  day :  we  belong  not  to  the  night  nor  to  dark- 
nr-ss. 


LESSONS  TN  WHITING  HEBREW. 


139 


4.  Perfect  Verbs.  Kal  Preterite  and  Infinitives, 

§33. 

Write  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitives  of  bttj?,  “33  and 
bits'  in  all  tlieir  forms  as  they  appear  in  the  paradigm, 
with  the  proper  signification  attached  to  each. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

She  killed.  They  killed.  We  killed.  To  kill.  Thou 
(■ masc .)  killedst.  I  killed.  Ye  ( masc .  and  fem.)  killed. 
He  killed.  Thou  (fem.')  killedst. 

Thou  (m.  and  f. )  wast  bereaved.  We  were  bereaved. 
Ye  (m.  and  f.)  were  heavy.  She  was  bereaved.  I  was 
heavy.  They  were  heavy.  He  was  heavy.  He  was  be¬ 
reaved.  To  be  bereaved. 

Direction  2.  In  Hebrew  sentences  the  verb  commonly 
precedes  its  subject,  and  both  precede  the  object  unless 
the  emphasis  requires  a  different  collocation,  e.  g.  N33 
Baffin  ns  D^rfbi*  God  created  the  heavens.  But  if  a  per¬ 
sonal  pronoun  be  either  the  direct  or  indirect  object  it  is 
usually  placed  immediately  after  the  verb  ib  ‘jns 

cbDn  God  gave  to  him  property.  £-0<-  ^  'w, '  ^  V-  7^-  f 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

I  shut  the  house.  She  shut  the  door.  He  shut  the 
heavens.  They  ruled  over  this  land.  Who  gave  you 
(Heb.  to  you)  those  vessels?  To  whom  did  he  give  this 
field  ?  What  did  they  give  me?  The  sun  ruled  over  the 
day  and  the  stars  ruled  over  the  night.  Thou  didst  pour 
water  from  the  heavens  upon  the  earth.  He  poured. 
She  gave  us  gold  and  silver  in  the  vessels.  They  gave 
to  him  honor  and  majesty.  They  kept  the  command¬ 
ment.  We  kept  the  Sabbath.  God  gave  us  a  command- 


140 


LESSORS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


ment  to  keep  the  Sabbath.  He  rested  in  this  day,  bo 
cause  it  was  the  Sabbath.  The  darkness  was  very  great. 
I  dwelt  in  the  house.  They  dwelt  in  the  field.  This  is 
the  bread  which  Jehovah  has  given  to  you. 

5.  FlPHAL,  PlEL,  AND  PlJAL  PRETERITES  AND  INFINITIVES, 

§  34. 

"Syrite  the  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  preterites  and  infini¬ 
tives  of  bisj:  with  their  significations. 

Translate  : — 

He  was  killed.  To  be  killed.  I  was  killed.  We  were 
killed.  She  was  killed.  Thou  (m.  and  f. )  wast  killed. 
Ye  (m.  and  f.)  were  killed.  They  were  killed. 

They  massacred.  They  were  massacred.  She  was 
massacred.  I  massacred.  Ye  ( m.  and  f.)  massacred. 
We  massacred.  To  massacre.  To  be  massacred.  Thou 
(m.  and  f. )  wast  massacred.  He  was  massacred. 

The  house  was  sanctified.  The  tabernacle  and  the  ark 
were  sanctified.  Thou  (m.  and  f.)  wast  sanctified.  Ye 
(m.  and  f.)  were  sanctified.  To  be  sanctified.  To  sanc¬ 
tify  this  day.  This  is  the  day,  which  Jehovah  has  sanc¬ 
tified.  They  sanctified  this  place.  I  sanctified  the  taber¬ 
nacle  and  the  vessels  which  were  in  it.  Ye  were  sepa¬ 
rated  from  them.  The  day  was  separated  from  the  night. 
We  were  separated  from  you.  He  was  separated  from 
us.  We  were  separated  from  him.  They  subdued  the 
land.  They  were  subdued  before  you.  Ye  were  sub¬ 
dued.  He  has  sworn  to  gather  you  to  this  land.  The 
door  was  shut  in  the  place,  in  which  they  were  gathered. 
What  did  ye  gather  ?  We  gathered  bread.  Flesh  was 
gathered.  They  have  sworn.  We  have  sworn.  She  ha? 
sworn.  .  . 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW.  14  i 

6.  The  remaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives,  §  35. 

Write  the  preterite  and  infinitives  with  their  significa¬ 
tions  in  the  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  of  bis j? . 

Translate  : — 

I  caused  to  kill.  She  killed  herself.  They  killed 
themselves.  Ye  (in.  and  f.)  were  caused  to  kill.  To  kill 
one’s  self.  To  cause  to  kill.  To  be  caused  to  kill.  We 
were  caused  to  kill.  Thou  (in.  and  f.)  killedst  thyself. 
He  caused  to  kill. 

We  separated  the  silver  from  the  gold.  He  separated 
the  darkness  from  the  light.  Thou  didst  separate  Israel 
from  all  the  nations  which  are  in  all  the  earth.  I  was 
made  king.  Thou  wast  made  king.  Is  it  a  little  (thing) 
to  be  made  king  ?  A  little  bread.  A  little  flesh.  A 
little  gold.  A  little  silver.  They  cut  off  the  nations. 
The  nations  were  cut  off.  Bread  was  cut  off  from  the 
house.  Bread  and  oil  were  cut  off.  We  were  cut  off. 
She  cut  off  man  and  beast  from  the  land.  They  caused 
the  kingdom  to  cease.  He  made  the  kingdom  small.  We 
made  small.  Whom  did  she  destroy  ?  What  did  she 
destroy  ?  Thou  (m.  and  f.)  didst  purify  thyself.  I  did 
not  purify  myself.  She  purified  herself.  Ye  (in.  and  f. ) 
purified  yourselves.  They  brought  the  water  near  to  the 
king  David  and  he  poured  it  out  before  Jehovah.  He 
consecrated  the  oil  and  anointed  the  tabernacle,  the  ark 
and  all  the  vessels.  We  consecrated  all  the  silver  and 
the  gold  to  Jehovah. 


7.  Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and  Participles,  §  36. 

Write  the  Kal  future,  imperative  and  participles  of 
bbj? ,  and  the  futures  of  133  and 


142 


LESSONS  IN  'WRITING  HEBREW. 


Translate — 

Tliou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  kill.  We  shall  kill.  I  shah 
kill.  He  will  kill.  They  (m.  and  f. )  will  kill.  She  will 
kill.  Ye  ( m .  and  f)  will  kill.  Kill  ye  (m.  and 
Killed.  Killing.  Kill  thou  ( m .  andyb). 

Thou  wilt  rule  over  us.  He  will  rule  over  them.  The 
stars  shall  rule  over  the  night.  The  sea  shall  not  rule 
over  the  earth.  Rule  thou  over  the  nations.  He  is 
ruling.  She  is  ruling.  We  are  ruling.  Ye  shall  rest  in 
the  Sabbath.  Rest  ye  (m.  and  f. )  with  me  in  the  house. 
Keep  thou  (m.)  this  beast.  Keep  thou  (yi)  that  bread. 
Who  is  keeping  the  silver?  Jehovah  is  keeping  Israel. 
Jehovah,  who  is  keeping  Israel,  will  also  keep  us.  God 
shall  keep  thee  in  the  day  and  in  the  night.  We  shall 
dwell  in  heaven.  Shut  (m.  pi.')  the  door.  I  shall  shut 
the  gate.  She  is  shutting  the  house.  The  virgins  are 
dwelling  in  the  house.  The  wild  beast  is  dwelling  in  the 
field.  He  will  subdue  all  the  nations  which  are  under 
heaven.  Thou  shalt  be  clothed  with  majesty  and  splen¬ 
dor.  I  will  keep  what  I  have  spoken. 

8.  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Futures,  etc.,  §  37. 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  of 

Translate  : — 

We  shall  be  massacred.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  will  massacre. 
She  will  massacre.  I  shall  be  killed.  He  will  be  killed. 
Thou  (m.  andjd)  wilt  massacre.  They  (m.  and/1.)  will 
be  massacred.  Be  thou  (m.  and  f.)  killed.  Massacre  ye 
(?/i.  and /.).  Killed.  Massacred.  Massacring. 

Ye  will  be  separated  from  us.  They  will  be  shut  in 
the  house  until  the  morning.  All  the  people  will  be 


LESSONS  IN  WETTING  HEBEEW. 


143 


sanctified.  The  company  will  be  sanctified.  These  vir. 
gins  will  be  sanctified.  Those  nations  will  be  sanctified. 
We  shall  be  sanctified.  Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  be  sanctified. 
Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  be  sanctified.  I  shall  be  sancti¬ 
fied.  Jehovah  will  be  honored.  Be  ye  honored.  I 
will  honor  them  who  honor  me  (lit.  the  [ones]  honor¬ 
ing  me).  I  will  sanctify  the  priests.  He  will  sanctify 
them.  They  will  sanctify  us.  It  belongs  to  the  priests 
to  honor  this  house.  It  is  not  for  me  to  honor  him. 
They  will  speak  to  thee.  To  whom  will  ye  speak  ?  God 
is  speaking  to  us  from  heaven.  Wilt  thou  speak  to  me  ? 
Speak  ye  to  them.  I  will  take  heed  that  I  do  not  speak 
evil.  Will  the  gate  be  shut  ?  Will  they  be  shut  up  in 
J  ericho  ? 


9.  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  Futuees,  etc.,  §  38. 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  of  . 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  be  caused  to  kill.  We  shall  kill 
ourselves.  Kill  thyself  ( m .  and  /.).  Causing  to  kill. 
Thou  (m,  and/.)  wilt  cause  to  kill.  Cause  ye  (m.  and 
/.)  to  kill.  They  (m.  and  /.)  will  kill  themselves.  I 
shall  l)e  caused  to  kill.  Killing  one’s  self.  Caused  to 
kill.  He  will  be  caused  to  kill.  She  will  cause  to  kill. 

I  withheld  the  rain  from  you.  I  shall  cause  it  to  rain 
upon  this  field  and  I  shall  not  cause  it  to  rain  upon  that 
field.  Thou  wilt  clothe  them  with  (lit.  cause  them  to 
put  on)  splendor  and  majesty.  He  will  clothe  the 
heavens  with  darkness.  Clothe  (2  m.  s.)  all  the  nations 
with  joy  and  gladness.  He  will  be  made  king  and  will 


144 


LESSONS  IN  "WRITING  HEBREW. 


be  honored  in  all  the  land.  Ye  will  be  caused  to  reign. 
We  shall  be  caused  to  reign.  Thou  wilt  be  caused  to 
reign.  What  shall  I  offer  to  God?  Shall  all  the  rem¬ 
nant  be  cut  off?  Joy  shall  be  cut  off  from  Israel.  All 
these  nations  shall  be  cut  off.  Shall  we  cause  the  work 
to  cease  ?  Who  shall  separate  us  from  him  ?  What  shall 
separate  him  from  us  ?  I  am  separating  between  good 
and  evil.  He  shall  cause  them  to  dwell  in  the  land. 


10.  Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future  and  Imperative 

and  Vav  Conversive,  §§  40,  41. 

Direction  3.  In  narrating  the  past,  the  first  verb  is 
commonly  to  be  put  in  the  preterite  and  the  succeeding 
verbs  in  the  future  with  Vav  Conversive,  provided  the 
verb  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause.  If,  however, 
any  verb  of  the  series  is  for  any  reason  removed  from  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  and  so  separated  from  the  con¬ 
junction,  it  must  be  put  in  the  preterite,  §  79.  2. 

4.  In  a  paragraph  relating  to  the  future,  the  first  verb 
is  commonly  to  be  put  in  the  future  or  imperative,  as  the 
case  may  be,  and  the  succeeding  verbs  in  the  preterite 
with  Vav  Conversive,  provided  they  stand  at  the  begin¬ 
ning  of  their  own  clause.  But  if  any  verb  of  the  series  is 
separated  from  the  conjunction  by  an  intervening  word, 
it  must  be  put  in  the  future. 

5.  A  negative  imperative  must  be  translated  by  -if 
with  the  future,  the  apocopated  form  being  used  if  ons 
exists,  §  78.  8. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

He  anointed  me  and  caused  me  to  reign  instead  of 
David.  They  drave  out  the  nations  and  subdued  the 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


145 


land  and  dwelt  in  it.  Thou  wilt  gather  them  from  all 
the  nations,  and  cause  them  to  dwell  in  this  land,  and 
thou  wilt  reign  over  Israel  forever  (lit.  to  eternity). 
Ye  shall  keep  the  commandment  and  be  separated  from 
the  nations  and  be  consecrated  to  me,  and  ye  shall  be  great 
from  sea  unto  sea.  Cleave  thou  unto  me  and  thou  shalt 
keep  the  covenant  which  I  have  made  (lit.  cut)  with  thee 
and  thou  shalt  honor  me.  Ye  shall  not  forget.  Forget 
not  ye  what  I  have  spoken  to  you.  Take  heed  that  ye 
forget  not  the  Sabbath  to  rest  in  it  from  all  work.  Wilt 
thou  not  withhold  me  from  evil?  Withhold  not  mercy 
from  me,  O  Jehovah,  and  I  will  keep  (parag.  fut.)  this 
commandment.  Cut  them  not  off.  We  gave  them  bread 
and  made  (lit.  cut)  a  covenant  with  them.  Pray  reign 
over  this  people.  Shut  the  door.  Pray,  shut  the  door. 
Thou  wilt  not  shut  the  door.  Do  not  shut  the  door. 
We  will  shut.  Let  us  shut. 


11.  Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fern.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre* 
terite. 

Write  the  3  to.  and  f  sing,  of  the  Kal  preterite  of 
with  suffixes,  adding  to  each  form  its  proper  signifi 
cation. 

Translate  : — 

He  killed  them  ( to .  and/*.).  He  killed  him.  He  killed 
us.  He  killed  thee  (to.  and  /.)  He  killed  me.  He  killed 
you  (to.  and  f.').  He  killed  her. 

She  killed  us.  She  killed  you  (to.  and  f.').  She  killed 
me.  She  killed  her.  She  killed  them  (to.  and  y.).  She 

killed  him.  She  killed  thee  (to.  and  f.'). 

7 


146 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


b.  The  rest  of  the  Kal  Preterite. 

Write  the  remaining  parts  of  the  Kal  preterite  of  bbjJ 
with  suffixes. 


Translate : — 

They  killed  you  (on.  and  f. ) .  Ye  killed  them  (on.  and 
f.).  I  killed  her.  Thou  (on.)  killedst  me.  I  killed  thee 
(on.  and  f. ) .  We  killed  him.  They  killed  me.  They 
killed  her.  Ye  killed  us.  Thou  (/.)  killedst  him.  We 
killed  you.  Thou  (on.)  killedst  her.  Thou  (f.)  killedst 
her.  Thou  (on.)  killedst  him.  Thou  (f.)  killedst  me. 
He  kept  you  (on.  and  f. ) .  She  kept  him.  Ye  kept  us. 
Thou  (on.)  didst  keep  her.  Thou  (f.)  didst  keep  me. 
She  kept  you  (on.  and  /.).  We  kept  them  (on.  and/!). 
They  kept  us.  I  kept  thee  (on.  and  f. ) . 

He  anointed  him.  He  anointed  me.  Thou  (on.)  didst 
anoint  us.  Thou  didst  anoint  them.  They  sent  thee  (on. 
and  f. ) .  She  sent  her.  Ye  sent  him.  We  sent  you  (on. 
and  f.).  She  forgot  me.  Thou  (/!)  didst  forget  her. 
We  forgot  her.  I  forgot  him.  He  washed  them  (on.  and 
/!).  I  washed  you  (on.  and/!). 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  pre- 
terite  of  ^bj?  with  suffixes. 


Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  ambiguous : 

He  massacred  them  (on.  and  f.).  We  massacred  you 
(on.  and  /.  ).  She  massacred  us.  Ye  massacred  us.  Ye 
massacred  them  (on.  and  /.).  They  massacred  us.  They 
massacred  you  (on.  and  /.).  Thou  (on.  and  f.)  didst  mas¬ 
sacre  us.  He  massacred  you. 

They  caused  me  to  kill.  He  caused  you  (on.  and  f.) 
to  kill.  She  caused  to  kill  them  (on.  and  f. ) .  They 
caused  to  kill  her.  She  caused  thee  (rn.  and  f.)  to  kill 


LESSONS  IN  "WRITING-  HEBREW. 


147 


Ye  caused  me  to  kill.  Ye  caused  to  kill  kim.  I  caused 
tliee  (to.  and  f. )  to  kill.  I  caused  to  kill  them  (to.  and 
f. ) .  Thou  (to.  and  f.)  didst  cause  to  kill  her.  Thou 
(to.  and  f. )  didst  cause  us  to  kill.  We  caused  to  kill 
him.  We  caused  you  to  kill. 

He  made  me  great.  He  made  us  great.  He  made 
them  (to.  and  f. )  great.  He  honored  you  (to.  and  f.). 
He  honored  him.  He  honored  her.  He  bereaved  thee 
(to.  and  f. ) .  Ye  gathered  them  (to.  and  f).  She  gathered 
us.  We  honored  her.  Thou  (to.  and  f. )  didst  honor  him. 
She  honored  him.  She  honored  her.  I  gathered  you  (to. 
and  f. ) .  They  honored  me. 

They  caused  him  to  reign  over  Israel.  Ye  caused  me 
to  put  on  the  garments.  He  caused  Eleazar  to  put  them 
on.  A  wild  beast  overtook  him  in  the  field.  Thou  hast 
caused  us  to  dwell  in  this  place.  I  have  cut  them  off 
because  they  did  not  honor  me.  Thou  hast  separated 
them  from  all  the  nations  which  are  upon  the  earth.  Ye 
brought  him  near  to  the  tabernacle.  The  sword  has 
bereaved  her,  and  she  has  neither  father  nor  daughter  nor 
brother  (lit.  to  her  is  not  father  and  not  daughter  and 
not  brother). 

I 

12.  Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes, 

§  42. 

a.  Kal  Future. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Kal  future  of  bt3)5 
with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

He  will  kill  us.  She  will  kill  us.  I  shall  kill  you  (to. 
and  f.).  Thou  wilt  kill  her.  We  shall  kill  him.  She 
will  kill  them.  They  will  kill  her.  Ye  (to.)  will  kill 
her.  Thou  (f.)  wilt  kill  her.  Thou  (f.)  wilt  kill  me. 


148 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


Ye  ( m .)  will  kill  them.  They  will  kill  you  (ra.  and 
f).  Thou  (  f.)  wilt  kill  us.  She  will  kill  thee  (nt. 
and  f. ) . 

Jehovah  will  keep  us  from  all  evil.  Thou  (ra.)  wilt 
keep  them  (ra.  and  f.).  They  (ra.  and  f. )  will  remember 
me.  I  shall  remember  them.  AY  ho  will  remember  him  ? 
AYill  he  remember  her  ?  AVill  she  not  remember  you  ( ra. 
and  f.)  ?  I  do  not  know  ( pret.)  him  and  how  shall  I 
remember  him  ?  AVe  shall  remember  thee  (ra.  and  f. ) 
and  not  forget  thee.  This  is  the  house;  wilt  thou  (ra. 
and  f. )  remember  it  ?  This  is  the  commandment ;  will 
they  keep  it  ?  AATiose  are  these  garments  ?  I  shall  put 
them  on.  Behold  this  babe  !  will  the  mother  forget  it  ? 
(The)  Lord  will  surely  ( abs .  infin.')  remember  you. 
Thou  (m.  and  f. )  wilt  not  forget  me.  Do  not  thou  (ra. 
and  f. )  forget  me. 

b.  Piel  and  Hiphil  Futures. 

AVrite  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  future 
of  with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

She  will  massacre  them  (m.  and  f.).  AYill  ye  (ra.  and 
f.)  massacre  us?  He  will  massacre  you  (ra.  and  /!). 
He  will  cause  thee  (m.  and  f()  to  kill  me.  He  will  cause 
to  kill  thee.  Thou  (m.  and  f.')  wilt  cause  her  to  kill  us. 
I  will  cause  him  to  kill  them.  They  (ra.  and  f.)  will 
cause  me  to  kill. 

Thou  (ra. )  wilt  deliver  them  and  they  will  honor  thee. 
The  Lord  has  remembered  us  and  crowned  ( future  with 
Vav.  Conv.)  us  with  honor  and  majesty.  He  will  not 
destroy  me.  Let  him  not  destroy  me.  Jehovah,  who  is 
dwelling  in  Zion,  will  sanctify  the  people  and  deliver 
them  (Heb.  sing.  suf.  referring  to  people)  from  all  evil 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


149 


and  cause  them  to  dwell  in  this  place  forever.  I  will 
cause  thee  to  put  on  sackcloth,  and  will  cause  joy  and 
gladness  to  cease  and  will  utterly  (ahs.  injin.')  cut  thee 
oif.  Thou  wilt  gather  us  and  make  us  great.  We  will 
separate  her  from  the  assembly.  All  the  virgins  shall 
honor  her. 

c.  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

Write  the  Kal  infinitive  of  with  suffixes  and  give 
the  different  significations  of  each  form. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  am¬ 
biguous  and  giving  the  alternate  significations: — 

To  kill  you  ( m .  and  f.).  To  kill  them  (m.  and  f). 
To  kill  her.  To  kill  him.  Kill  ( m .  s.  and  pi. )  her.  Kill 
(m.  s.  and  pi.  )  him.  My  killing.  To  kill  me.  Our  kill¬ 
ing.  His  being  killed.  Massacre  (m.  s.  and  pi.)  them. 
To  massacre  you  (m.  and  f.).  His  massacring  us.  Your 
being  massacred.  Cause  (m.  s.  and  pi.)  him  to  kill  the 
woman.  My  causing  you  to  kill.  Her  causing  to  kill 
them.  To  cause  him  to  kill  me.  To  cause  me  to  kill 
him.  To  cause  to  kill  thee  (m.  and  f.).  Their  being 
caused  to  kill  her. 

To  keep  me.  To  keep  him.  To  keep  thee  (m.  and  f. ) . 
To  keep  us.  To  keep  them  (in.  and/!).  Keep  (pi.  s.  and 
pi.  )  them.  My  keeping  the  commandment.  Remember 
(m.  s.  and  pi.)  me.  Here  am  I  (Heb.  ‘'Sin  ,  behold  me), 
send  me.  Hear  us.  Deliver  (m.  s.)  us.  Crown  (m.  s.  and 
pi.)  him.  To  honor  her.  He  has  sworn  to  (use  the  prep.) 
gather  us  and  to  cause  us  to  reign  with  him.  Honor  him 
and  he  will  not  forget  to  honor  thee.  Sanctify  us  and 
bring  us  near  to  thee.  Gather  the  priests  to  the  sanc¬ 
tuary;  honor  them  before  all  the  people;  clothe  them  with 
(Heb.  cause  them  to  put  on)  salvation. 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


13.  Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 

Translate  : — 

A  great  war.  The  great  war.  It  is  a  great  war  (Heb. 
the  war  is  great).  This  war.  This  great  war.  This 
great  and  evil  war.  Great  wars.  The  great  wars.  These 
great  wars.  These  great  and  evil  wars.  These  wars  are 
great  and  evil.  Wars  are  great  evils.  He  uttered  (Heb. 
cried)  a  great  cry.  I  will  make  (Heb.  cut)  a  new  cove¬ 
nant  with  them.  New  garments.  These  garments  are 
new.  There  are  the  new  garments.  He  caused  me  to 
put  on  these  new  garments.  He  rent  the  new  garment 
which  was  upon  him.  A  great  kingdom.  He  shall  reign 
over  all  these  great  kingdoms.  Many  wells.  Large 
rocks.  An  evil  beast.  Good  commandments.  Many 
and  great  nations.  Large  figs.  These  large  figs.  These 
figs  are  large.  The  large  figs  are  very  large.  These  figs 
are  larger  than  those  figs.  Those  figs  are  better  than 
these.  War  is  worse  than  (Heb.  evil  from)  famine. 

14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Direction  6.  Observe  that  where  a  short  vowel  is  in¬ 
serted  in  the  construct  plural  agreeably  to  §  47.  5,  the 
first  syllable  is  intermediate  and  a  following  aspirate  will 
not  take  Daghesh-lene,  §  9.  a. 

■  Translate  : 

A  house  of  a  king.  The  house  of  the  king.  In  the 
king’s  house  are  vessels  of  gold  and  vessels  of  silver. 
-The  vessels  of  silver  are  more  than  the  vessels  of  gold. 
The  vessels  of  gold  are  smaller  than  the  vessels  of  silver. 
-The  priests  of  Jehovah  burned  incense  upon  the  golden 
altar  (Heb.  the  altar  of  gold).  Who  will  shut  the  doors 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


151 


of  the  house  ?  The  rivers  of  the  garden.  The  waters  of 
the  sea.  The  cattle  of  the  earth,  the  beast  of  the  field, 
and  the  fowl  of  heaven.  This  is  the  sio-n  of  the  covenant 

O 

which  I  have  made  with  you.  The  mercy  of  Jehovah  is 
from  eternity  and  to  eternity.  The  blessing  of  Jehovah, 
the  God  of  all  the  earth.  The  kings  of  the  nations.  The 
stones  of  the  field.  The  gates  of  the  city.  The  field  of 
Edom.  The  stars  of  the  morning.  Will  ye  not  keep  the 
commandment  of  the  king  ?  The  good  commandments  of 
God.  The  great  day  of  Jehovah.  Aaron  and  Eleazar 
offered  them  upon  the  altar. 


15.  Nouns  with  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Direction  7.  Nouns  having  suffixes  are  definite  and 
require  attributive  adjectives  joined  to  them  to  take  the 
article,  §§  69,  70. 

Write  the  nouns  "O'?  word  and  ©3  5  soul  in  both  num- 

■  *  •  • 

bers  with  the  suffixes  in  their  order,  adding  to  each  form 
its  signification. 

Translate : — 

Thou  shalt  hear  my  voice  in  the  morning.  He  put 
(Heb.  gave)  the  ark  of  God  in  its  place.  His  mercy  is 
to  eternity.  She  caused  him  to  put  on  his  new  garments. 
He  will  subdue  the  nations  under  us.  Thou  wilt  subdue 
them  under  our  feet.  I  will  clothe  her  priests  with 
(Heb.  cause  her  priests  to  put  on)  salvation.  My  priests 
shall  be  clothed  with  righteousness.  Ye  shall  keep  my 
Sabbaths.  I  have  kept  thy  commandment.  Hear  my 
cry.  She  will  wash  her  head,  her  hands,  and  her  feet. 
He  anointed  my  head  with  (3)  oil.  The  nations  and 
their  kings.  His  holy  tabernacle  (Heb.  the  tabernacle  of 


152 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


his  holiness).  My  righteous  God  (Heb.  God  of  my 
righteousness).  He  will  not  forget  his  covenant.  His 
voice  is  breaking  in  pieces  rocks.  My  foot.  My  feet. 
His  foot.  His  feet.  Their  feet.  He  has  given  salvation 
to  his  king.  Ye  are  dwelling  in  your  house.  This  is  my 
field.  Thy  field  is  larger  than  our  field. 


16.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §  53. 

The  intransitive  verb  to  stand  does  not  in  strictness  admit  of  a  passive, 

and  accordingly  never  occurs  in  the  Niphal.  That  species,  as  found  in  the  para¬ 
digm,  may  in  these  exercises  be  rendered  as  though  1  stand  ’  had  its  transitive 
sense,  he  was  stood ,  etc. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  "ray  to  stand ,  the  Kal  future  of 
bis  to  eat ,  and  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  of  pin  to 

he  strong. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and/)  stood.  We  shall  stand.  They  (in.  and 
f.  )  will  stand.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  stand.  Stand  thou 
(in.  and  f. )  I  shall  stand.  To  be  stood.  I  was  stood. 
She  was  stood.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  will  be  stood.  Be  ye 
(in.  and  /.)  stood.  He  shall  be  stood.  We  shall  cause 
to  stand.  Thou  shalt  be  caused  to  stand.  Thou  (in.  and 
/.)  wast  caused  to  stand.  They  were  caused  to  stand. 
They  caused  to  stand.  Caused  to  stand.  Causing  to 
stand.  I  shall  eat.  Ye  (m.  and  /)  will  be  strong.  Be 
thou  (in.  and  /.)  strong.  She  will  eat. 

The  curse  was  turned  to  a  blessing.  I  shall  turn  day 
to  night.  Turn  (thou)  these  stones  to  bread.  Darkness 
shall  be  turned  to  light.  I  shall  cause  them  to  eat  bread. 
He  caused  his  people  to  eat  manna.  Have  ye  not  eaten  ? 
What  have  you  (Heb.  is  to  you)  to  eat?  There  is  no 
bread  to  eat.  It  shall  not  be  eaten.  The  priests  shall 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


153 


eat  it.  Eat  no  bread  in  this  place.  Ye  shall  not  eat  from 
this  tree.  Ye  have  forsaken  me  and  I  will  forsake  you. 
Will  ye  forsake  me  ?  Thou  shalt  serve  him  and  he  will 
not  forsake  thee.  Serve  Jehovah  with  all  thy  heart  and 
with  all  thy  soul.  All  the  nations  shall  serve  him.  Who 
is  Jehovah  that  I  shall  serve  him?  It  shall  be  said  to 
you,  Ye  are  my  people  and  I  am  your  God.  The  words 
of  Jehovah  were  verified.  He  is  a  living  God  and  an 
everlasting  king  (Heb.  king  of  eternity).  He  is  king  of 
kings. 

17.  A yin  Guttural  Verbs,  §  54. 

The  verb  has  in  Kal  and  Niphal  the  sense  of  redeeming ,  in  Piel,  Pual,  and 

Hithpael  that  of  'polluting. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  . 

Translate : 

He  will  redeem.  Thou  ( m .  and /I)  wilt  redeem.  Re¬ 
deem  ye  ( m .  and  f. )  They  redeemed.  She  was  re¬ 
deemed.  Be  thou  ( m .  and/.)  redeemed.  They  (m.  and. 
f.)  will  be  redeemed.  We  polluted  ourselves.  Polluted. 
Polluting.  Thou  ( m .  and  f. )  pollutedst.  Ye  (m.  and  f. ) 
were  polluted.  She  polluted.  Pollute  ye  (m.  and  f.). 
Pollute  thyself  (m.  and/.).  We  shall  be  polluted.  They 
(m.  and  f.)  will  pollute.  Ye  (m.  and  f.)  will  pollute 
yourselves.  I  shall  pollute. 

I  will  bless  him  with  all  my  heart.  God  will  bless  us. 
He  has  blessed  us.  Bless  ye  (m.)  Jehovah.  Bless  Jeho¬ 
vah,  ye  virgins  of  Israel.  He  went  to  bless  his  house. 
His  seed  shall  be  blessed  in  the  earth.  He  will  bless  thee 
and  thy  seed  after  thee.  Ye  shall  be  blessed  in  him  I 
cried  unto  thee  in  the  night  and  thou  heardest  my  voice. 
We  will  cry  with  a  loud  (Heb.  great)  voice  to  him  that 

7* 


154  LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 

sitteth  (Heb.  to  the  [one]  sitting)  in  the  heavens.  Crj 
not  to  me ;  cry  unto  the  gods  whom  ye  have  served. 
Wash  ye  your  hands  and  your  feet.  Wash  thou  me  and 
I  shall  be  clean.  Cleanse  your  hearts  and  not  (bs)  your 
garments.  I  will  cleanse  you  from  all  evil.  Forsake  evil 
and  serve  me.  He  drove  out  the  nations  from  before  us 
and  we  dwelt  in  their  land.  Thou  hast  redeemed  us 
The  God  of  Israel  is  thy  Redeemer. 

18.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  nbc  to  send. 

The  Piel  of  this  verb  may  be  rendered  for  the  sake  of  distinction  to  send  away. 

Translate : — 

To  send.  To  send  away.  To  be  sent.  To  send  one’s 
self.  To  cause  to  send.  Thou  (m.  and  f.  )  didst  send. 
We  shall  be  sent.  I  shall  send  myself.  Cause  thou  (m. 
and  f.)  to  send.  He  will  send  away.  Thou  (rn.  and  f.) 
wast  sent.  Ye  ( m.  and  f.)  will  cause  to  send.  Sending. 
Sent.  Causing  to  send.  He  will  cause  to  send.  She 
will  be  sent.  Thou  (m.  and  f.)  wilt  send  thyself.  They 
( m.  and  f.)  will  send.  Send  ye  (m.  and  f.). 

He  will  sow  his  field.  It  is  time  to  sow  thy  seed. 
Sow  good  seed  in  thy  field.  Bad  seed  which  should  (Heb. 
shall)  not  be  sown.  These  fields  shall  be  sown  to-day.  The 
sower  ( port.)  went  to  sow;  and  in  his  sowing  (inf  )  these 
fell  on  the  way  and  the  fowls  of  heaven  ate  them ;  these 
fell  on  the  rock  and  these  on  good  ground.  The  field  is 
the  whole  earth;  the  seed  is  the  word  of  God;  the  sower 
is  the  Son  of  man  and  his  servants  whom  he  has  sent  in 
his  name.  Didst  thou  (m.)  not  sow  good  seed  in  thy 

field?  Didst  thou  (/.)  hear  what  he  said  to  thee?  It  is 
•good  to  hear  thy  voice.  She  will  be  heard.  To  be 
heard.  He  will  open  the  house.  The  heavens  were 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


155 


opened  and  a  voice  was  heard,  This  is  my  Son,  hear  him. 
Who  shall  open  the  eyes  of  the  blind?  The  deaf  shall 
hear.  His  clothes  (were)  rent  {Kal  pass,  part .)  and 
ashes  upon  his  head.  Forget  not  his  commandments. 
Thou  shalt  not  be  forgotten.  He  will  not  withhold  any 
(bis)  good  from  us. 

19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 

The  Kal  and  Niphal  of  IE  S3  ,  though  given  in  full  in  the  paradigm,  are  each 
but  partially  in  use,  and  as  they  are  identical  in  signification  they  are  made  to 
supplement  each  other.  The  Niphal  is  found  only  in  the  preterite  and  participle ; 
the  Kal  in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative. 

^  , 

Write  the  paradigm  of  tttop  to  approach  and  the  Kal  of 

to  give. 

Translate  : —  ' 

Approach  thou  (m.  and  f.).  She  will  approach.  They 
(m.  and  f )  will  approach.  Approaching.  To  approach. 
We  approached.  Ye  (m.  and  f. )  approached.  I  ap¬ 
proached.  I  shall  approach.  I  shall  be  caused  to 
approach.  Thou  (m.  and  f.)  caused  st  to  approach. 
Cause  ye  (m.  and  f. )  to  approacli.  Thou  (m.  and  f. ) 
wilt  cause  to  approach.  He  will  be  caused  to  approach. 
Caused  to  approach.  To  cause  to  approach.  To  give. 
Ye  (m.  and  f.)  gave.  Thou  (m.  and  f. )  gavest.  Wo 
gave.  We  shall  give.  Give  thou  (• m .  and  f. ) . 

Give  {imp.  with  He  parag .)  (to)  me  thy  field.  I  will 
give  (to)  thee  instead  of  it  a  field  better  than  it.  Ask 
from  me  and  I  will  give  thee  the  nations.  He  will  give 
me  a  new  heart.  Ye  gave  me  bread  and  I  ate.  Thou 
gavest  this  land  to  him  and  to  his  seed  forever.  He 
sware  to  give  us  this  good  land.  Thou  wilt  give  rain 
upon  the  earth.  ,  He  will  give  them  into  our  hand.  He 


156 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


said,  Give  me  thy  hand ;  and  he  gave  him  his  hand, 
What  will  ye  give  me?  I  know  (pret.)  that  he  will  not 
suffer  (Heb.  give)  you  to  go.  I  shall  take  a  little  honey. 
Take  half  of  the  blood  and  put  (Heb.  give)  it  upon  the 
altar.  I  have  (see  Direction  1,  Lesson  2)  no  silver  and 
gold ;  I  shall  give  thee  all  that  I  have.  Tell  me,  I  pray 
thee,  what  he  said  to  thee ;  withhold  not  a  word  from 
me.  And  he  told  her  all  that  was  in  his  heart.  They 
did  not  tell  us  the  half.  It  was  told  to  the  king  and  to 
his  servants. 


20.  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  320  to  surround,  and  the  Piel 

of  to  excite. 

Translate 

He  surrounded.  We  surrounded.  They  surrounded. 
Ye  (m.  and  f.)  surrounded.  Thou  (m.  and  f. )  didst 
surround.  She  surrounded.  I  surrounded.  I  was  sur¬ 
rounded.  He  was  surrounded.  Ye  (m.  and  f.)  were 
surrounded.  She  was  surrounded.  They  were  surround¬ 
ed.  Thou  (m.  and  f. )  wast  surrounded.  We  were  sur¬ 
rounded.  We  shall  be  surrounded.  We  shall  surround. 
Thou  ( m .  and  f.)  wilt  be  surrounded.  They  (m.  and  f.) 
will  be  surrounded.  Ye  ( m .  and  f. )  will  surround.  I 
shall  surround.  Surround  ye  ( m .  and  f.).  Be  thou  (m. 
and  f.)  surrounded.  Surrounded.  Surrounding.  To 
surround.  To  be  surrounded. 

They  surrounded  enti-ely.  We  shall  surround  entirely. 
Surround  ye  (m.  and  f.)  entirely.  I  caused  to  surround. 
She  caused  to  surround.  She  was  caused  to  surround. 
Ye  (in.  and  f.)  caused  to  surround.  He  caused  to  sur¬ 
round.  We  caused  to  surround.  They  were  caused  to 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


157 


surround.  They  caused  to  surround.  Cause  thou  (to. 
and  f.)  to  surround.  I  shall  cause  to  surround.  They 
(to.)  shall  be  caused  to  surround.  Causing  to  surround. 
Cause  ye  (to.  and  f. )  to  surround.  Ye  (to.  and  f.)  shall 
cause  to  surround.  Surrounding  one’s  self.  We  excited. 
They  (to.  and  f.)  shall  excite. 

I  have  begun  to  give  you  this  land.  Thou  hast  begun 
to  speak  to  him.  Begin  to-day.  The  famine  began  this 
year.  In  those  days  (§  50)  Jehovah  began  to  send  into 
Judah  the  king  of  Edom.  She  began  to  ask.  We  began 
to  demolish  the  statues  and  the  pillars.  They  began. 
They  (to.  and  f.)  will  begin.  They  rolled  the  stone  from 
upon  the  mouth  of  the  well.  The  stone  is  very  great ; 
who  shall  roll  it  for  us  ?  He  is  rolling  himself  upon  the 
ground.  I  shall  curse  thy  blessings.  He  began  to  curse 
and  to  say,  I  know  ( prct .)  not  the  man.  Curse  ye  bit¬ 
terly  (abs.  injin.)  the  city  and  its  inhabitants  (Heb.  the 
[ones]  inhabiting  it).  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  shall  eat 
bread  this  day.  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  will  not  hearken 
to  the  words  of  this  covenant.  I  took  thee  to  curse  them 
and  lo !  thou  hast  blessed  them.  Thou  shalt  not  bless 
them  and  thou  shalt  not  curse  them. 


21.  Pe  Yodii  Verbs,  §  58. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  to  dwell ,  and  the  Kal  of 
E’a?  to  be  dry. 

Translate : — 

To  dwell.  Dwell  thou  (to.  and  /.).  He  will  dwell. 
Ye  (to.  and  f.)  will  dwell.  I  shall  dwell.  Thou  (to. 
and  f.)  wilt  be  dwelt  (in).  She  was  dwelt  in.  Be  thou 
(to.  and  /.)  dwelt  in.  Causing  to  dwell.  They  were 
caused  to  dwell.  They  caused  to  dwell.  She  caused  to 


158 


LESSONS  IN  "WRITING-  HEBREW. 


dwell.  We  were  caused  to  dwell.  Ye  (m.  and  /.')  were 
caused  to  dwell.  Cause  ye  (m.  and  f. )  to  dwell.  She 
will  be  caused  to  dwell.  I  shall  cause  to  dwell.  Thou 
(rn.  and  f.)  slialt  be  dry.  Be  ye  ( m .  and  f. )  dry.  To 
be  dry. 

Hast  thou  known  ?  Will  he  know  ?  Wilt  thou  let 
me  know  or  not?  Will  he  go?  Let  me  know  whether 
he  will  go  or  not.  They  will  go  to-day.  Hast  thou 
remembered  the  commandments  of  Jehovah  ?  Wilt  thou 
keep  them  or  not  ?  He  knows  (p>ret.)  whether  thou  wilt 
keep  them.  Thou  knowest  whether  he  will  keep  them  or 
not.  Wilt  thou  bless  him  or  curse  him  ?  Who  shall 
dwell  in  thy  holy  place  (Heb.  place  of  thy  holiness)  ? 
Art  thou  my  son  or  not  ?  Tell  (He  parag. )  me,  I  pray 
thee,  whether  thou  art  my  son  ?  Tell  me  whether  thou 
art  my  son  or  not.  Will  the  tree  stand  or  fall  ?  He 
caused  us  to  go  in  the  wilderness,  where1  we  wearied  him 
and  did  not  walk  in  his  ways.  Where  did  we  weary  him  ? 
If  Jehovah  be  (the)  God,  go  after  him ;  and  if  Baal, 
serve  him.  Whither  thou  wilt  go,  I  shall  go.  This  is  the 
man  to  whom  ye  shall  go.  To  whom  shall  we  go  ?  thou 
hast  the  words  of  life.  If  ye  will  serve  me  with  all  your 
heart,  then  (  Vav  with  pret.  Rem.  37)  will  I  cause  you  to 
dwell  in  this  land  forever. 

1  Observe  in  this  and  the  following  sentences  the  distinction  between  the  rela¬ 
tive  and  the  interrogative. 


22.  A  yin  Vav  and  A  yin  Yodii  Verbs,  §  59. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  Dip  to  rise  and  the  Kal  of  Dip  to 

contend. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (rn.  and  f. )  rose.  He  rose.  They  rose.  We  rose 
She  rose.  They  (rn.  and  /.)  will  rise.  Rise  thou  (m 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


159 


and  /).  We  shall  rise.  He  will  rise.  Rise  ye  (to.  and 
/.).  To  rise.  Rising.  Risen.  To  be  risen.  Ye  (to. 
and  f.)  will  be  risen.  I  shall  be  risen.  Thou  (to.  and 
f.)  wilt  be  risen.  She  was  risen.  We  were  risen.  1 
was  risen.  Thou  (to.  and  f.)  wast  risen.  He  was  risen. 
Ye  (to.  and  f. )  were  risen.  They  were  risen.  He  will 
be  risen.  He  raised.  We  shall  raise.  He  will  be  raised. 
He  was  raised.  Raising.  Raised. 

I  caused  to  rise.  Ye  (to.  and  f. )  caused  to  rise.  She 
caused  to  rise.  He  caused  to  rise.  They  caused  to  rise. 
Thou  (to.  and  f. )  didst  cause  to  rise.  They  (to.  and  f. ) 
will  cause  to  rise.  Thou  (to.  and  /!)  wilt  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  ye  (to.  and/1.)  to  rise.  We  shall  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  thou  (to.  and  /.)  to  rise.  Causing  to  rise.  I  shall 
be  caused  to  rise.  They  were  caused  to  rise.  Raise  thy¬ 
self  (to.  and  /!).  She  raised  herself.  Thou  (to.  and  /.) 
didst  contend.  I  contended.  He  contended.  She  will 
contend.  Contend  thou  (to.  and  /.).  Contending. 

He  came  to  his  house.  They  came  to  him  and  ate 
bread  with  him.  Whence  hast  thou  come  ?  Whence  are 
ye  coming  ?  Whither  didst  thou  go  ?  Whither  art  thou 
going  ?  Wilt  thou  come  to  me  to-night  ?  Come  and 
lodge  Avith  me.  Bring  thy  father  and  thy  mother  with 
thee.  We  came  to  the  well  and  there  was  no  water  in 
it.  Bring  |  ye]  my  tunic.  Gold  and  sil\rer  shall  be 
brought.  They  brought  to  him  gold  and  incense.  She 
shall  return  to  her  former  state.  Return  from  your  evil 
ways  and  serve  Jehovah.  We  are  from  dust  and  shall 
return  to  dust.  The  virgins  will  return  bringing  water 
from  the  wTell.  Bring  back  the  silver  which  ye  have 
taken  from  me.  They  brought  him  back  to  the  city  in 
joy  and  gladness.  They  shall  be  brought  back  to  this 
land.  He  shall  die.  We  shall  die.  They  put  him  to 
death.  He  was  put  to  death.  She  shall  be  put  to  death. 


160 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


23.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  §  60. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  sift  to  find. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and  /.)  found.  We  were  found.  Thou  (rn. 
and  /.)  didst  find  out.  They  caused  to  find.  I  found 
myself.  He  was  found.  To  cause  to  find.  To  he  found. 
Finding  one’s  self.  They  (m.  and/!)  will  cause  to  find. 
Ye  (rn.  and/.)  will  find.  She  will  be  found.  He  will 
find.  Ye  (rn.  and/)  will  find  out.  Find  ye  (rn.  and/.). 
Cause  ye  (rn.  and/)  to  find.  Ye  were  found. 

I  shall  call  to  him  and  he  will  hear  my  voice.  They 
called  the  name  of  the  city  Ur  of  the  Chaldees.  Call  ye 
this  young  man.  Call  to  me  in  the  day  of  evil ;  I  will 
deliver  thee.  Thy  name  shall  not  be  called  Naomi ; 
thou  shalt  be  called  (Heb.  to  thee  shall  be  called)  Mara. 
Jehovah  brought  you  out  from  that  land.  I  shall  bring 
you  out  from  all  the  lands  in  which  ye  are  and  will  give 
you  this  good  land  which  I  sware  to  your  fathers.  He 
created  the  earth  and  the  sea ;  and  the  heavens  are  the 
wrork  of  his  hands.  My  hands  have  created  all  these. 
Thou  didst  create  man  and  beast  upon  the  earth.  Bring 
us  out  from  all  evil.  Fill  the  vessels  large  and  small 
with  water.  Thou  hast  filled  the  earth  with  thy  mercy. 
The  house  wras  full  of  men  and  women.  He  caused  it  to 
rain  upon  the  earth  and  filled  our  hearts  with  food  and 
gl  adness. 


24.  Lamedh  He  Verbs,  §  61. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  rt'ia . 

Translate : — 

They  revealed.  We  revealed.  She  revealed.  I  ie- 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


161 


vealed.  Thou  (to.  and  /)  wast  revealed.  He  was  re¬ 
vealed.  I  was  revealed.  Ye  (to.  and  /.)  uncovered. 
They  uncovered.  He  was  uncovered.  We  were  uncov¬ 
ered.  She  was  exiled.  Thou  (to.  and  /l)  wast  exiled. 
Thou  (to.  and/)  didst  exile.  They  exiled.  I  uncovered 
myself.  To  exile.  To  uncover.  To  be  revealed.  To 
reveal.  Thou  (to.  and/!)  wilt  be  revealed.  I  shall  re¬ 
veal.  He  will  uncover.  We  shall  be  uncovered.  They 
(to.  and/.)  will  exile.  She  shall  be  exiled.  Be  ye  (to. 
and/!)  revealed.  Uncover  thyself  (to.  and/.).  Reveal¬ 
ing- 

The  house  was  built  in  the  city.  My  father  built  it. 
He  began  to  build  it  and  my  brother  finished  it.  I  have 
finished  the  work  which  thou  gavest  me  to  do.  Who 
will  build  an  altar  in  this  place  to  Jehovah?  They  built 
a  dwelling  for  him  in  Jerusalem.  All  the  nations  shall 
go  up  to  Jerusalem  to  serve  Jehovah.  To  go  up  and  to 
go  down.  They  offered  burnt-offerings  upon  the  altar. 
I  did  as  Jehovah  commanded  me.  Bring  him  up  to  me 
in  the  bed.  And  it  came  to  pass  (Heb.  it  was)  as  he  fin¬ 
ished  to  offer  the  burnt-offering  that  (Heb.  and)  fire  fell 
from  heaven.  They  made  for  him  a  throne  of  gold. 
Solomon  built  him  a  house.  Wilt  thou  dwell  in  this 
house  which  has  been  built  for  thy  name  ?  He  went  up 
into  heaven.  He  shall  descend  a  second  time  from  hea¬ 
ven.  Jehovah  appeared  to  Solomon  in  Gibeon. 

25.  Numerals,  §  65. 

Direction  8.  The  preposition  (/following  a  cardinal 
number  must  be  expressed  by  pa ,  thus  pa  nffian 

five  of  the  horses ,  not  D^pnsn  noian  which  would  mean 
the  five  horses  ;  area  nya©'  seven  of  them ,  not  Drcnffi'  which 
would  mean  they  seven. 


162 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


9.  In  compound  numbers  insert  the  conjunction  and 
between  the  different  denominations,  which  may  proceed 
either  from  the  higher  to  the  lower  or  the  reverse ;  thus 
for  sixty-five  write  either  sixty  and  five  ox  five  and  sixty. 

Write  the  masculine  absolute  of  the  cardinals  from  one 
to  ten  in  their  order.  Write  the  present  date,  year, 
month,  and  day. 

Translate,  noting  each  case  in  which  different  forms 
may  be  used,  or  in  which  the  order  of  the  words  may  be 
varied : — 

Four  heads.  Ten  seas.  Twelve  nations.  Thirty  of 
the  Philistines.  Fifty  days.  A  hundred  men.  Six  nights. 
Eight  shekels.  Three  years.  The  seven  stars.  Seven 
of  the  stars.  Seven  stars.  These  seven  stars.  Twenty 
rocks.  Eleven  women.  Nine  kings.  Two  vessels.  Nine 
virgins.  Five  stones.  Twenty-four  priests.  Sixty  houses. 
Sixteen  months.  Eighty  queens.  Six  hundred  years. 
Three  hundred  and  sixty-five  days.  In  the  fifth  year  of 
(Heb.  to)  king  Solomon,  in  the  tenth  month,  in  the  second 
day  of  the  month.  In  the  twenty-first  of  the  eighth 
month.  In  the  third  of  this  month.  The  third  [part]  of 
the  month.  The  fourth  [part]  of  the  year.  The  eighth 
[part]  of  the  shekel.  The  eighth  shekel.  Eight  of  the 
shekels.  He  is  eight  years  old.  She  is  nineteen  years 
old.  All  the  days  of  Adam  were  nine  hundred  years  and 
thirty  years  and  he  died. 


26.  To  accompany  Gen.  1 : 1. 

Pleaven.  Earth.  In  heaven.  In  earth.  The  heaven. 
The  earth.  In  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  Beginning. 
In  [the]  beginning.  He  created.  God  created.  I 
created.  In  [the  ]  beginning  thou  createdst  the  earth 
and  the  heaven.  Creating.  God  the  creator  of  (lit.  the 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


163 


[one]  creating)  the  heaven.  He  will  create.  Thou  wilt 
create.  I  shall  create  an  earth  and  heaven.  He  was 
created  (Niphal).  We  were  created.  Thou  wast  created. 
I  was  created.  Ye  were  created.  In  [the]  beginning 
were  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth.  In  [the]  begin¬ 
ning  was  created  the  earth.  [There]  will  be  created  an 
earth.  [There]  will  be  created  a  heaven. 

27.  Gen.  1 :  2. 

Darkness.  The  darkness.  And  the  darkness.  In 
darkness.  In  the  darkness.  And  in  the  darkness.  Face. 
The  face.  The  face  of  [the]  deep.  The  face  of  the 
heaven.  He  was.  I  was.  We  were.  Ye  were.  Thou 
wast.  He  will  be.  I  shall  be.  We  shall  be.  They  will 
be.  The  earth  will  be  waste  and  void  (desolation  and 
emptiness).  Darkness  was  on  the  waters  and  on  the  face 
of  the  earth.  Spirit.  The  Spirit.  The  Spirit  of  God 
brooded  over  the  deep.  The  Spirit  will  brood.  In  the 
beginning  the  Spirit  [was]  brooding  over  the  waters. 
God  created  the  darkness  and  the  waters.  The  deep  was 
created.  And  the  waters  of  the  deep  were  waste  and 
void. 

28.  Gen.  1  :  3,  4. 

He  said.  They  said.  And  he  said  (Vav  Conv.).  And 
they  said.  I  said.  Ye  said.  We  shall  say.  She  will 
say.  We  saw.  They  saw.  He  saw.  And  he  saw.  He 
will  see.  God  [is]  seeing  in  the  light  and  in  the  dark¬ 
ness.  The  waters  were  seen  (Niph.).  The  earth  was 
seen.  The  light  will  be  seen.  God  saw  the  light.  Good 
light.  Light  [is]  good.  The  good  light.  The  light  |  is] 
good.  God  is  good.  God  is2  (Heb.  he,  §  67,  2)  light1 


164 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


He  saw  that  the  light  was  good.  God  divided  between 
the  earth  and  the  heaven.  God  [is]  dividing  between 
the  darkness  and  the  light.  The  waters  were  divided. 
They  will  be  divided.  I  divided.  Ye  divided.  Thou 

wilt  divide.  Divide  thou. 

**  _  . 

29.  Gen.  1  :  5,  6. 

Day  and  night.  The  day  and  the  night.  In  the  day 
and  in  the  night.  To  the  days  and  to  the  nights.  To 
divide  between  days  and  nights.  We  shall  call.  We 
called.  And  we  called  (Vav  Conv.).  Thou  didst  call 
the  firmament  heaven.  I  called  the  darkness  night,  and 
the  light  I  called  day.  The  light  (Heb.  to  the  light) 
shall  be  called  day.  It  was  evening.  One  evening. 
One  morning.  One  God.  One  earth.  In  the  midst  of 
the  earth.  In  the  midst  of  the  heaven.  Between  the 
heaven  and  the  earth  (two  constructions).  God  shall  say 
to  the  waters,  Be  ye  divided.  Let  there  be  light.  Let 
there  be  darkness.  God  saw  the  firmament.  The  firma¬ 
ment  [is]  good. 

30.  Gen.  1 :  7,  8. 

God  made  the  day  and  the  night.  Thou  madest  the 
firmament.  Thou  didst  divide  the  waters.  I  shall  make, 
lie  will  make.  And  he  made  (Yav  Conv.).  I  made  the 
earth  and  the  waters.  We  were  made.  The  earth  was 
made.  The  waters  were  made.  I  made  the  heaven 
which  [is]  above  the  earth  and  the  earth  which  [is]  under 
the  heaven,  and  the  waters  which  [are]  under  the  earth. 
He  divided  the  day  from  the  night.  Light  was  made  in 
one  day,  and  the  firmament  was  created  in  a  second  day. 
And  he  called  the  beginning  of  the  day  morning,  and  the 
beginning  of  the  night  he  called  evening.  A  second 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


165 


morning.  Tlie  second  evening.  And  it  was  so.  And  lie 
did  so. 


31.  Gen.  1 :  9.  10. 

/ 

They  were  gathered.  Ye  were  gathered.  We  were 
gathered.  And  they  were  gathered.  Ye  shall  be  gather 
ed  To  be  gathered.  Being  gathered.  He  said  to  the 
waters,  Be  ye  gathered  unto  the  seas.  The  waters  which 
were  under  the  heaven  were  gathered  unto  one  place,  and 
the  waters  which  were  above  the  heaven  were  gathered 
unto  a  second  place.  The  dry  [land]  was  seen.  The 
sea  was  seen.  See  thou  the  earth  and  the  heaven.  He 
made  the  waters  which  are  in  the  sea.  They  called  the 
dry  [land]  earth.  The  collection  (gathering  together)  of 
waters  shall  be  called  sea.  The  God  of  heaven  made  the 
sea  and  the  dry  land.  He  divided  the  sea  from  the  dry 
land.  He  said  and  it  was  [done]. 


32.  Gen.  1  : 11-13. 

God  said  to  the  earth,  Bring  forth  (either  of  two  verbs) 
grass.  The  earth  brought  forth  herb  and  tree.  Grass 
sprang  up.  Grass  was  brought  forth.  He  said  to  the 
herb,  Produce  seed,  and  it  was  so.  The  herb  produced 
seed  (according)  to  its  kind.  I  have  sown  the  seed.  Ye 
have  sown.  They  have  sown.  In  the  morning  sow  thou 
the  seed.  The  seed  was  sown  in  the  evening.  The  herb 
will  produce  seed.  The  tree  will  yield  fruit.  A  fruit- 
tree.  The  fruit-tree  (§  75.  5).  The  seed  of  the  fruit-tree 
is  in  the  fruit.  To  the  tree  yielding  fruit  |  there]  is  seed 
according  to  its  kind.  The  fruit,  whose  seed  is  in  it.  Seas, 
in  the  midst  of  which  are  waters.  A  day  in  which  there 
is  light.  A  night  in  which  there  is  darkness. 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


166 


33.  Gen.  1 : 14-16. 

Let  there  be  light.  Let  there  be  a  light  (luminary) 
One  great  light.  The  second  small  light.  Two  great 
lights.  The  two  small  lights.  Two  of  (Heb.  from)  the 
small  lights,  which  (Heb.  to  which)  they  have  called 
stars.  The  stars  will  give  light  in  the  night.  He  made 
one  light  for  the  rule  of  the  day.  The  second  light  was 
made  for  the  rule  of  the  night.  He  divided  between 
lights  and  lights  (Heb.  to  lights).  Thou  didst  divide  be¬ 
tween  the  great  lights  and  the  stars.  God  created  the 
lights  and  said  (Yav.  Conv.)  to  them,  Give  light  upon  the 
earth  and  divide  day  from  night ;  and  it  was  so.  There 
shall  be  signs  in  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  One  sea¬ 
son.  A  second  day.  The  third  year.  Two  years  and 
two  days.  Let  there  be  stars  giving  light  in  the  night. 


34.  Gen.  1:17-20. 

In  the  fourth  day  God  made  the  two  great  lights  and 
the  stars  and  in  the  firmament  of  heaven  he  set  (Heb. 
gave)  them.  He  set  the  firmament  above  the  earth  and 
the  earth  above  the  sea.  I  gave.  They  gave.  We  gave. 
Thou  gavest.  She  gave.  Giving.  To  give.  He  will 
give.  We  shall  give.  Given.  Ye  will  give.  One  light 
ruled  the  day.  A  second  light  shall  rule  the  night. 
Thou  [art]  ruling  the  earth  and  the  sea.  God  saw  that 
the  lights  [were]  good.  He  made  the  reptiles  (collective) 
which  are  in  the  waters.  He  divided  between  the  rep¬ 
tile  and  the  fowl.  A  soul  of  life.  The  soul  of  life. 
Thou  madest  the  soul  of  life  which  is  in  the  fowl  and  in 
the  reptile.  In  the  morning  they  flew  away. 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


J  07 


35.  Gen.  1:21-23. 

The}''  were  fruitful  and  multiplied  ( Vav  Conv.)  and 
filled  the  earth  and  the  sea.  The  waters  [are]  filling 
(Piel)  the  sea.  The  sea  shall  be  filled.  The  stars  shall 
till  the  heavens.  The  moving  soul  of  life  shall  be  fruitful 
and  multiply  upon  the  earth.  Great  monsters.  The 
great  monsters.  All  the  great  monsters  of  the  sea.  The 
monsters  of  the  sea  are  great.  God  created  them  and 
he  will  bless  them.  He  blessed  the  winged  fowl  and 
every  soul  of  life  which  he  had  made.  He  caused  the 
fowl  to  multiply  in  the  earth  and  the  monsters  in  the 
seas.  Blessed  be  God.  Bless  ye  God.  Bless  God,  O 
my  soul.  God  is  blessing  (Piel)  every  morning  and  every 
evening. 

36.  Gen.  1 :  24-27. 

The  beast  of  the  earth  was  made  after  its  kind.  Man 
was  created  in  the  likeness  of  God,  and  in  his  image. 
The  earth  brought  forth  cattle  and  reptile  creeping  upon 
the  ground.  God  made  lights  for  the  rule  of  the  day  and 
of  the  night;  and  the  man  he  created  for  the  rule  of 
the  earth.  Thou  didst  make  man  according  to  thine 
image  and  in  thy  likeness.  Man  (Heb.  with  arti¬ 
cle)  was  made  in  the  image  of  him  that  created  (Heb. 
the  [one]  creating)  him.  Rule  thou  over  the  fish  of  the 
sea  and  have  dominion  over  all  the  earth.  Let  the  fish 
multiply  in  the  sea.  The  fowl  shall  fly  over  the  face  of 
heaven.  He  made  them  male  and  female.  Every  beast 
of  the  earth  was  made  male  and  female. 

37.  Gen.  1 :  28-31. 

Subdue  ye  the  earth  and  fill  it  ana  multiply  upon  it 
and  have  dominion  over  all  which  is  in  it.  God  blessed 


168 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


all  tliat  lie  liad  made.  He  saw  that  it  was  very  good. 
He  gave  to  the  man  the  fruit  of  the  earth  for  food. 
Thou  hast  given  to  us  every  herb.  To  the  beast  of  the 
earth  every  green  herb  was  given.  It  will  be  given.  To 
be  given.  Give  thou.  Give  ye.  See  thou  what  God 
bas  made.  He  made  light  in  one  day.  In  a  second 
day  he  made  the  firmament.  In  a  third  day  the  dry 
[land]  was  seen  and  it  brought  forth  herb  and  trees. 
In  a  fourth  day  he  made  the  great  and  small  lights.  In 
a  fifth  day  birds  and  fish  were  made.  In  a  sixth  day  he 
made  cattle  and  created  man  (Heb.  with  article)  in  the 
image  of  God. 

38.  Gen.  2  : 1-5. 

_  _  • 

The  earth  was  finished.  The  host  of  heaven  was  fin¬ 
ished.  The  earth  and  the  heaven  were  finished.  I  have 
finished  my  work.  Thou  hast  not  finished  thy  work. 
We  have  not  yet  finished  our  work.  They  will  finish 
their  work.  Your  work  will  be  finished  and  ye  will  rest. 
These  generations.  These  are  the  generations.  These  are 
the  generations  of  Adam.  These  two  generations.  This 
day.  This  seventh  day.  This  is  the  day  which  God  has 
blessed.  This  is  the  seventh  day  in  which  God  rested, 
and  which  he  sanctified.  No  tree  was  yet  in  the  ground. 
The  earth  had  not  yet  brought  forth  herb  nor  (Heb.  and) 
bush.  In  the  fifth  day  there  was  no  man  and  beast  of 
the  field  there  was  none,  for  they  had  not  yet  been 
created. 


39.  Gen.  2  :  6-10. 

This  is  the  earth  which  God  created  and  made  (Heb 
[so  as]  to  make).  God  blessed  them  and  said  (Heb.  [sc 
as]  to  say,  or  with  Vav  Conv.)  to  them,  Be  fruitful. 


LESSONS  IN  ‘WRITING  HEBREW. 


16ft 


Subdue  the  earth  and  rule  (Heb.  to  rule)  over  it.  God 
caused  it  to  rain  and  watered  the  face  of  the  earth.  He 
causes  it  to  rain  (fut.  §  78,  3)  and  waters  the  ground. 
A  mist  [is]  ascending  from  the  sea  and  the  earth  will  be 
watered.  We  are  as  the  grass,  which  sprouted  in  the 
morning  and  in  the  evening  shall  not  be.  This  is  youi 
breath  which  Jehovah  breathed  in  your  nostrils.  He 
placed  Adam  in  the  garden  which  he  had  planted  and  in 
which  he  had  caused  to  grow  every  tree  good  for  food. 
Four  rivers.  The  four  rivers.  The  four  heads  of  the 
river.  The  six  heads.  The  two  gardens.  Three  days 
and  three  nights.  Five  mornings  and  five  evenings. 
One  small  star. 


40.  G*en.  2:11-16. 

Thou  didst  form  Adam  of  dust.  He  made  the  man 
(Heb.  to)  a  living  soul.  A  great  river  is  surrounding 
the  land  in  which  there  is  gold.  The  name  of  the  garden 
is  Eden.  They  called  the  garden  Eden.  The  garden 
shall  be  called  Eden.  In  the  midst  of  the  garden  were 
two  trees ;  the  one  was  called  the  tree  of  life  and  he 
called  the  name  of  the  second  the  tree  of  knowing  good 
and  evil.  The  place,  where  the  garden  of  Eden  was,  is 
not  known.  He  went.  I  went.  He  will  go.  We  shall 
go.  To  go.  Going.  He  took  the  man.  He  took  him. 
He  took  her.  He  took  us.  He  took  you.  Fie  took  me. 
He  took  thee.  He  will  take  the  tree.  Keep  the  seventh 
day  and  (Heb.  to)  sanctify  it. 

41.  Gen.  2  : 17-20. 

Adam  ate  of  the  evil  fruit  and  died.  This  fruit  is 
good;  thou  mayest  freely  eat  (Heb.  emphatic  infin.)  of 
it.  He  ate  it.  She  ate  it.  We  ate  it.  Thou  shalt  eat 

8 


170 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


it.  Ye  shall  eat  it.  They  shall  eat  it.  Ye  ate  it.  Ye 
ate  of  (Heb.  from)  it.  It  is  not  good  for  Adam  to  eat  of 
it.  He  formed  him.  He  formed  her.  He  formed  us. 
Thou  formedst  us.  I  formed  you.  I  formed  them.  I 
formed  him.  Thou  didst  put  Adam  in  the  garden  to  till 
it.  He  tilled  the  ground  and  kept  it.  Every  beast  of 
the  field  came  to  Adam.  In  the  cattle  of  the  field,  the 
beast  of  the  earth,  the  fish  of  the  sea,  and  the  fowl  of 
heaven  there  was  not  found  a  help  the  counterpart  of 
Adam.  God  gave  name  (Heb.  called  names)  to  the  day 
and  to  the  night. 


42.  Gen.  2  :  21-25. 

Adam  slept  because  a  deep  sleep  from  God  had  fallen 
upon  him  (§  66.  2).  A  rib  was  taken  and  was  made  (Heb. 
built)  into  a  woman  and  she  was  brought  to  him.  One 
bone.  His  bone.  His  one  boDe.  Two  ribs.  Her  ribs. 
Her  two  ribs.  One  of  (Direction  8,  Lesson  25)  his  bones. 
Two  of  her  ribs.  Our  three  gardens.  Three  of  our  gar¬ 
dens.  Four  of  their  evenings.  Five  of  your  rivers.  Six 
of  the  heads,  into  which  the  river  was  parted.  Two  of 
the  men.  Two  of  the  women.  They  two,  the  man  and 
the  woman.  Two  of  them.  The  woman  left  her  father 
and  her  mother  and  clave  to  her  husband.  My  mother 
has  forsaken  me.  My  father  and  my  mother  will  not 
forsake  me.  Thou  shalt  do  all  that  thy  father  and  thy 
mother  shall  command  thee. 


43.  Gen.  3  : 1-5. 

The  cunning  serpent.  This  tree  is  the  best  of  all  the 
trees  (Heb.  collective)  in  the  garden.  The  man  was  the 
greatest  of  all  the  men  of  [the]  east.  The  stars  are  the 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW 


171 


smallest  of  all  the  lights  in  the  firmament.  The  sea  is 
greater  than  the  dry  [land].  Dying  (emphat.  infin.)  he 
shall  die.  We  shall  die.  I  shall  die.  He  died.  She 
died.  They  died.  Dying.  He  killed  (caused  to  die). 
They  killed.  He  was  put  to  death.  She  shall  be  put  to 
death.  He  said  to  the  woman,  Thou  shalt  not  touch 
the  tree  lest  thou  die.  Touch  thou  this  fruit.  I 
touched  it  and  my  eyes  were  opened  and  I  knew  good 
and  evil.  In  the  day  of  thy  touching  this  tree  (§  89.  3) 
thou  and  thy  wife  shall  die  (§  86.  1). 

44.  Gen.  3  :  6-10. 

The  woman’s  eyes  were  opened  and  she  saw.  She  gave 
of  the  fruit  to  Adam  and  he  saw  and  ate.  A  desirable 
tree.  The  desirable  tree.  The  tree  is  desirable.  He  took 
of  it.  She  took  it.  Ye  took  it.  We  shall  take.  They 
( f.)  will  take.  Its  fruit  was  taken  and  eaten  and  it 
opened  her  eyes.  Open  thou  mine  eyes  and  I  shall  see. 
Both  her  eyes.  The  eyes  of  them  both.  Two  of  their 
eyes.  Their  four  eyes.  They  heard  Jehovah  walking1. 
She  heard  the  voice  of  Jehovah  [who  was2]  walking  in 
the  midst  of  the  trees.  I  saw  the  man  eating1.  Where  is 
he  ?  Here  he  is  (Heb.  behold  him  !).  Where  art  thou  ? 
Here  I  am.  I  heard  the  tree  falling 1.  The  falling  waters. 
We  saw  the  stars  falling  from  heaven.  The  woman  and 
her  husband  hid  themselves. 

1  The  participle  being  a  predicate  will  not  agree  with  its  subject  Jehovah  in 
definiteness,  and  hence  must  not  receive  the  article,  Remark  23,  Lesson  13. 

2  See  Remark  8,  Lesson  7. 


45.  Gen.  3  : 11-15. 


Who  commanded  thee  not  to  do  this  evil  [thing]  fern,  t 
Not  to  hear.  Not  to  see.  Not  to  walk  in  the  garden. 


172 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


I  shall  command  the  stars  not  to  give  light  in  the  mght. 
Who  did  this  ?  Didst  thou  see  the  woman  who  ate 
(Heb.  the  [one]  eating)  this  fruit?  Did  the  serpent  de_ 
ceive  the  woman  ?  Eat  ye  of  it  and  bless  Jehovah.  1 
shall  not  eat  the  fruit  which  he  has  commanded  me  not 
to  eat.  What  is  this,  the  woman  has  done  ?  What  are 
these  ?  Who  are  these  ?  The  serpent  is  the  most 
accursed  of  all  cattle.  Thy  mother  is  the  most  blessed  of 
all  women.  Thou  art  the  greatest  of  all  men.  I  told  him. 
It  was  told  to  me.  The  serpent  bruised  his  heel  (Heb. 
him  [as  to]  heel).  He  shall  bruise  the  serpent’s  head. 

* 

46.  Gen.  3  : 16-19. 

I  shall  bless  them  that  bless  (Heb.  blessing)  thee,  and 
curse  them  that  curse  (Heb.  cursing)  thee,  and  all  the 
earth  shall  be  blessed  in  thee.  The  woman  heard  the 
voice  of  the  serpent.  The  woman  hearkened  to  the  voice 
of  the  serpent.  The  man  hearkened  to  the  voice  of  his 
wife,  and  ate  the  fruit  of  which  God  had  commanded  him 
not  to  eat.  The  woman  bare  three  sons.  Sons  were 
born  to  him.  They  shall  be  born.  I  was  born.  We 
were  born.  These  are  the  names  of  the  sons  of  Adam. 
Whose  son  art  thou  ?  Return  to  dust  (ye)  sons  of  man. 
We  returned.  Have  they  returned?  Will  they  (/l) 
return  ?  He  brought  them  back  (caused  them  to  return). 
They  shall  be  brought  back  to  the  garden  of  the  Lord. 

47.  Gen.  3  :  20-24. 

Adam  called  (Heb.  to)  the  woman  Eve.  The  woman 
was  called  Eve.  The  woman’s  name  was  Eve.  God 
called  his  name  Adam,  and  said,  Because  from  the  ground 
I  have  taken  him.  Did  he  not  call  the  man  Adam,  accord- 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW. 


173 


ing  to  the  name  of  the  ground  from  whence  he  had  taken 
him  ?  Men  have  given  (Heb.  called)  names  to  the  stars 
of  heaven.  God  called  the  name  of  the  firmament  hea¬ 
ven,  and  gave  names  to  the  day  and  to  the  night.  See 
thou  the  ground  from  whence  thou  wast  taken.  Take 
ye  of  the  food  which  I  have  brought  for  you  and  eat 
of  it.  Coats  of  skin  were  made  for  the  man  and  for  the 
woman  and  they  were  clothed.  These  God  gave  to  them 
instead  of  the  figdeaves  which  they  had  sewed  for  them¬ 
selves.  He  said  to  him,  Put  forth  thy  hand,  and  he  put 
it  forth.  I  shall  send  (Kal)  him.  I  shall  send  her.  He 
will  send  us.  He  will  not  send  them.  He  has  com¬ 
manded  us  not  to  send  you.  Ye  will  send  me  away 
(Piel).  We  shall  send  thee  away.  I  shall  drive  you  out 
(Piel)  from  my  garden.  He  will  keep  me.  Thou  wilt 
keep  them. 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


as  n.  m.  (const.  “’3$ ,  pi. 

<  trias)  father 

nix  v.  K.  (ss)  to  perish.  P. 

to  destroy 

las  n.  m.  f.  a  stone 

ns  n.  m.  mist ,  vapor 

nils  n.  m.  Edom 
•  • 

pis  n.  m.  lord ,  master 

ois  n.  m.  man 
“ions  n.  f.  ground ,  land 
pi5?  n.  m.  Lord 
ans  or  ans  v.  K.  to  love 
bps  n.  m.  (Dibns)  tent 
n.  m.  Aaron 

"ris  v.  K.  N.  to  shine.  H.  to 
cause  to  shine ,  give  light 
“iis  n.  m.  light 
n.  Ur 

nis  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  sign 

ts  adv.  then 

ps  n.  f.  (d??ts)  ear 

ns  n.  m.  (const.  “P’S ,  pi. 

Dins)  brother 
asns  n.  in.  Ahab 
nns  adj.  one 
nins  n.  f  sister 


ins  prep,  after 
‘s  adv.  (suf.  Ps)  where  t 
nais  n.  f.  enmity 
rps  adv.  where  f 
naais  adv.  bow  f 

T  T 

ps  (const,  pi?)  nothing 
there  is  not  or  was  not 
pi?  adv.  where  f  only  after 
p)D  ,  pSD  whence  t 
“sis  n.  f.  ephah 
©is  n.  m.  (oi»:s)  man ,  hus- 
band ,  each 

bis  v.  K.  (kb)  to  eat.  H. 

to  cause  to  eat 
bs  adv.  not 
bs  n.  m.  God 

“’as  prep,  to ,  unto,  respecting 

nbs  see  nT 

•  •  ••  •• 

•  • 

nibs  commonly  in  the  plt 
Din'bs  n.  m.  God 
“iTybs  n.  m.  Eleazar 

T  T  ,  • 

cs  n.  f.  (niiss)  mother 
DS  conj.  if,  in  a  disjunctive 
question  or 

lias  v.  N.  to  be  verified,  found 
t/t'ue 


176 


HEBREW -ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


“ias  n.  Amandh 

T  T  -• 

d’:es  adv.  truly ,  indeed 
■vas  y.  K.  (ss)  to  say.  N. 

to  be  said 
n:s  adv.  whither? 

®i:s  n.  m.  man 
■as  ,  “>D2K  pron.  I 
C|S  n.  hi.  (d?es)  nostril,  face 
C]S  conj.  also,  even  ;  ■*?  J]S 
how  much  more  or  after  a 
negative  how  much  less’, 
Gen.  iii.  1,  is  it  even  so 
that  ? 

i?s  n.  m.  ashes 

“sis  n.  f.  lattice ,  window 
T  \  * 

“ysns  num.  four 
n-’ysns  num.  forty 
■jins  n.  m.  f.  ark 
m  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  earth ,  land 
■vis  v.  K.  P.  to  curse.  N. 

-  T 

Ho.  to  be  cursed 
nils  n.  Ararat 

t  t  : 

©s  n.  m.  f.  fire 

nrirs  n.  f.  (const.  n©S ,  pi. 

qicd)  woman,  toife 
“|©S  pron.  who,  which',  conj. 

that,  because ;  less  as 
rnts  n.  f.  (o'1,  and  rd) pillar 
ns  sign  of  tlie  definite  object 
ns  prep,  with 
“rs  m.,  ns  f.  pron.  thou 

S  prep,  in,  into,  at,  with 

iss  n.  f.  a  well 


“3s  n.  m.  garment,  pi.  clothes 
“s  n.  m.  separation ;  i'isb 
in  his  separation,  i.  e. 
alone 

bis  v.  H.  to  separate,  divide. 

N.  to  be  separated 
nbis  n.  bdellium 
■ns  n.  m.  emptiness 
nisns  n.  f.  beast,  cattle 
sis  v.  K.  (fut.  sis?)  to  come. 
H.  to  cause  to  come ,  bring. 
Ho.  to  be  brought 
■ps  prep,  between 
n?s  n.  m.  (n^ns)  house 
■’P'bs  adv.  not ,  used  with  tlie 
infinitive 

]S  n.  m.  (o'1??)  son 
res  v.  K.  to  build 
ns?s  prep,  on  account  of 
by  s  n.  m.  Baal,  lord 
“i£s  n.  m.  morning 
sis  v.  K.  to  create.  N.  to  be 
created 
lis  n.  m.  hail 
nils  n.  f.  covenant 
iis  v.  K.  P.  to  bless.  N.  Pu, 
to  be  blessed 
nsns  n.  f.  a  blessing 
itbs  n.  m.  flesh 
ns  n.  f.  (suf.  ins ,  pi.  nibs) 
daughter 

nbnns  n.  f.  virgin 

bsa  v.  K.  to  redeem.  P.  to  defile 


HEBREW -EN GLISH  VOCABULARY. 


177 


yiyaa  n.  Gib  eon 

biia  adj.  great ,  large 

bna  v.  K.  (fut.  a )  to  be  great. 

P.  to  make  great 
*|ia  n.  m.  nation 
pina  n.  m.  belly 
lin^a  n.  Gihon 
b?a  v.  K.  to  roll 
oa  conj.  also ,  even 
bioa  n.  m.  benefit 
13  n.  m.  (o'1  s  a)  garden 
ona  v.  K.  P.  to  drive  out 
oo|  n.  m.  violent  rain ,  show¬ 
er 

pin  (fut.  a)  to  cleave ,  adhere. 

H.  to  overtake 
lin  v.  P.  to  speak 
nin  n.  m.  word 
oa^  n.  m.  honey 

“57  u.  f.  fish 
“HI  n.  m.  David 

•  T 

nb^i  n.  f.  (D^nVi)  door 
07  n.  m.  blood 
mop  n.  f.  likeness 
n.  Damascus 

?P.  7  Y.  K.  H.  to  crush,  pidver- 
ize 

1777  n.  m.  thistle 
777  u.  m.  f.  way 
8*07  v.  K.  to  spring  up,  said  of 
grass.  H.  to  cause  to  spring 
up,  bring  forth  grass 

n.  m.  grass 
8* 


•n  art.  the 
n  asks  a  question. 

"177  n.  m.  majesty 
sin  m.  807 ,  sin  f.  pron.  he, 
she,  it,  that 
Tin  n.  m.  splendor 
nnn  v.  K.  to  be 
7b7  v.  K.  to  go,  walk.  H.  to 
cause  to  go,  lead.  Hith.  to 
go  for  one's  self,  walk  about 
,  nan  int.  (suf.  ’’ian)  lo ! 
behold! 
nan  adv.  hither 
7?7i  v.  K.  to  turn.  N.  to  be 
turned.  Hith.  to  turn 
one's  self 

17!  n.  m.  (pi.  01771,  const. 

*’77)  mountain 
* 

1^77  n.  m.  conception 
1  conj.  and 

nT  m.  nst  f.  bs,  nbit  pi.  pron. 

this ,  these 
arrr  n.  m.  gold 
n'T  n.  m.  olive-tree,  olive 
T?T  v.  K.  to  remember 
“iDT  n.  m.  male 
ny.T  n.  f.  (nyT)  sweat 
p?T  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  cry 
npyr  n.  f.  cry 

a7T  v.  K.  to  sow.  H.  to  pro¬ 
duce  seed 
77 1  n.  nu  seed 


178 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


sin  v.  H.  to  hide.  N.  Hith. 

T  T 

to  hide  one's  self 
rn-in  n.  f.  apron 
ipin  n.  Hiddekel ,  Tigris 
©nn  adj.  new 
linn  n.  m.  month 
“pin  n.  Havilah 
P!>7  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be  strong 
■*n  adj.  (run)  living ,  alive 
n?n  n.  f.  (paragog.  vowel 
in?n)  life ,  living  thing , 
beast 

v.  K.  to  live 
^  ^  ^  *  m.  pi.  life 
yin  n.  m.  £  window 
ibn  v.  H.  to  begin 
f?n  v.  P.  to  deliver 
nan  v.  K.  P.  to  desire.  N. 

to  be  desired 
•'©■'an  num.  fifth 
yin  n.  m.  Haman 
ciian  num.  fifty 
nan  n.  m.  kindness ,  mercy 
ncn  v.  K.  to  be  diminished , 
to  fail 

>,yn  n.  m.  (’’an)  half 
ann  n.  f.  sivord 
ffi'in  adj.  (a^ann)  deaf 
7®n  i\.  m.  darkness 

niha  adj.  clean,  pure 
nno  v.  K.  to  be  clean,  pure. 
P.  to  purify,  cleanse.  N. 
to  be  purified 


aia  adj.  good 

~:a  v.  P.  to  soil,  defile 

ana  adv.  not  yet,  before 

®i?  v.  K.  (inf.  const, 

to  be  dry 

n©3?  adj.  f.  dry  land 

yi?  v.  K.  to  be  weary.  P.  H. 

to  weary,  to  cause  to  toil 
n?  n.  f.  hand 

yn?  v.  K.  to  know.  H.  to 

cause  to  know,  let  know 

rrnn?  n.  m.  Judah 
*  • 

■htp  n.  m.  Jew 
nVn?  n.  m.  Jehovah 
ai*1  n.  m.  (a^a?)  day 
niii  n.  f.  (o'1.)  dove 
cioi*’  n.  m.  Joseph 
nS?  v.  K.  to  bear,  bring 
forth.  N.  Pu.  to  be  born 
tf'??  see  ?J?n 
a?  n.  m.  (a^a?)  sea 
ap??  n.  m.  Jacob 
si?  v.  K.  to  go  out,  go 
forth.  H.  to  cause  to  go 
forth,  bring  forth 
pi?  v.  K.  to  pour 
is?  v.  K.  (fut.  ns*’??)  to  form 
si?  v.  K.  (fut.  si’1?)  to  fear 
nn?  v.  K.  to  go  down,  de¬ 
scend 

ape--',?  n.  Jerusalem 
nn?  n.  m.  moon 
irrn?  n.  Jericho 


HEBREW -EN GLISII  VOCABULARY. 


179 


PV,  n.  m.  greenness 

CT"1  or  tin’1  v.  K.  H.  to  drive 

••  r  •  ▼ 

out 

M  *  •  •  n.  m.  Israel 
a©;  v.  K.  to  sit ,  dwell ,  in¬ 
habit 

1©:  v.  K.  (fut.  !©•>:)  to  sleep 
y©b  n.  m.  salvation 

2  prep,  according  to ,  as,  like 
■122  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be  heavy. 
P.  to  honor.  N.  to  be 
honored 

“Ti23  u.  m.  honor ,  glory 
©is  v.  K.  P.  to  subdue.  N. 

to  be  subdued 
nb  adv.  thus ,  so 
■jns  n.  m.  priest 
2313  n.  m.  star 
bis  v.  P.  (bibs)  to  contain 
©12  n.  m.  Cush 
“©  conj.  for,  because,  that  ‘ 
after  a  negative  but 
bb  n.  m.  (suf.  ife)  all,  every, 
the  whole 

abs  v.  K.  to  withhold,  re¬ 
strain..  N.  to  be  restrained 
nb3  y.  K.  to  come  to  an  end. 
P.  to  complete,  finish.  Pu. 
to  be  finished 

’’bs  n.  m.  (  □’’bs  )  vessel,  article 
adv.  so.  I?  by  therefore 
5|  3  2  n.  f.  wing 
xs3  n.  m.  (Hi)  throne 


5]D3  n.  m.  silver 
C]2  n.  f.  (d?23)  palm  of  tlie 
hand,  sole  of  the  foot 
2113  n.  m.  cherub 
rri  3  v.  K.  to  cut,  cut  off,  make 
a  covenant.  H.  to  cut  off. 
Ho.  to  be  cut  off 
D’|‘i©3  n.  in.  pi.  Chaldees 
n:ri3  n.  f.  (pi.  nisris ,  const, 
nibns)  tunic 

b  prep,  to,  for 
s’b  adv.  not 
2b  n.  m.  (niib)  heart 
22b  n.  in.  (Hi)  heart 
©bb  or  ©2b  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to 
put  on,  wear,  be  clothed 
with.  H.  to  cause  to  put 
on,  to  clothe 
unb  n.  m.  flame 
onb  n.  m.  f.  bread 
b?b  n.  m.  (nb^b  g  48.  2,  pi.  Hi) 
night 

■pb  y.  K.  to  lodge 
">b&b  see  ©“’is 

•  •  •  •  •  T 

•  • 

nbb  v.  K.  to  capture 
npb  v.  K.  to  .take.  N.  Pu. 
Ho.  to  be  taken 

“lira  adv.  very 

num.  hundred 
lisa  n.  m.  (tP.  and  Hi)  lights 
luminary 
b355«  n.  m .food 


180 


HEBREW -ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


"ia*T0  n.  m.  wilderness 
■  • 

ma  pron.  what t  whatever ; 

nab,  “ty  for  what?  why? 
"io yn  n.  m.  instruction 


ni:p  n.  m.  rest 

y:a  v.  K.  to  withhold ,  keep 
back.  N.  to  be  withheld 
a  Tq  n.  a  little 


"lyia  n.  m.  (D\  and  ni)  season 
nva  v.  K.  to  die.  Ho.  to  be 
put  to  death 
nia  n.  m.  death 
nara  n.  m.  (ni)  altar 
naa  n.  f.  bed 

T  • 

“lisa  y.  H.  to  cause  to  rain 

"raa  n.  m.  rain 

’’a  pron.  who?  whoever 

D?a  n.  m.  pi.  water 

■p?  n.  m.  species ,  kind 

"low  v.  K.  to  sell 

sba  v.  K.  to  fill  or  be  full.  P. 

to  fill.  N.  Pu.  to  be  filled 
nasba  n.  f.  (const,  nasba. 
suf.  irosba  )  work 
T  T  *  I^t.  f.  war,  fighting 
pba  v.  K.  to  reign.  H.  to 
cause  to  reign,  to  make, 
king.  Ho.  to  be  made  king 
?}ba  n.  m.  king 
naba  n.  f.  queen 
fi'obn  n.  f.  (§9.  7)  kingdom 
nabaa  n.  f.  (const,  rabaa) 


kingdom 

nbfcaa  n.  f.  (const,  nboaa) 

dominion ,  rule 
T9  n.  m.  manna 
■p?  prep,  from ,  out  of; 
b  oppa  on  the  eas-t  of 


ai'a  H.  to  make  small  or  few 
n.  m.  (a"1,  and  ni) 
fountain 
bya  adv.  above 


npya  n.  f.  (const,  npya)  cave 
aia  v.  K.  to  find 
napa  n.  f.  statue 
niaa  n.  f.  commandment 
nipa  n.  m.  gathering  together , 
collection 

nipa  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  place 
tfpa  n.  f.  Mara  ( bitter ) 
nina  n.  m.  sight,  appear - 
ance 


"'appa  n.  m.  Mordecai 
•  •  • 

nca  v.  K.  to  anoint 
■jaca  n.  m.  tabernacle ,  dwell • 
ing 

btt’a  v.  K.  to  rule ,  with  a  be- 
fore  its  object.  H.  to  cause 
to  rule 

asaa  n.  m.  judgment 


x:  particle  of  entreaty,  now , 
pray ,  I  pray  thee 
“i:  y.  H.  to  tell.  Ho.  to  be  told 
"pi  prep,  before,  in  the  pres* 
ence  of.  over  against;  "pia 
corresponding  to,  a  coun¬ 
terpart 


HEBRE  W -EN GLISH  VOCABULARY. 


181 


yi?  v.  K.  cO  touch,  W1 1  ll  3 
before  its  object 
cip  v.  K.  N.  to  approach 
in?  n.  in.  and  rri)  river 
rn:  v.  K.  to  rest.  H.  (rrin 
or  rpsn)  to  cause  to  rest , 
put ,  place 
ni  n.  m.  Noah 
©n?  n.  m.  serpent 
yi??  v.  K.  to  plant 
■’by?  n.  f.  Naomi  {sweet) 

I 

1?:  n.  m.  young  man 
ns:  v.  K.  to  breathe ,  blow 
b£?  v.  K.  to  fall ,  fail 
©B?  n.  m.  f.  (o\  and  tii) 
soul ,  life 
raj??  n.  f.  female 
sir?  v.  H.  to  deceive 
ff’CD  see 

•  T  T  • 

“bb?  n.  f.  breath 
ry  v.  p.  to  demolish 
■jr?  v.  K.  to  give ,  put.  1ST. 
Ho.  to  be  given 

sis  v.  K.  to  surround 
1??  v.  K.  P.  to  shut,  shut  up). 
N.  Pu.  to  be  shut.  II.  to 
cause  to  shut 
v.  N.  to  be  shut,  stopped 
^  ^  n.  nr  rock 
iso  v.  P.  to  recount,  tell 

•ray  v.  K.  to  serve ,  till 
ray  n.  m.  servant 


ray  v.  K.  to  pass.  H.  to 

cause  to  pass 
1?  prep,  unto ,  until 
ray  n.  f.  company ,  assem- 
bly 

n?  n.  Eden 
Tiy  adv.  yet ,  besides 
biy  n.  m.  suckling ,  babe 
o’yiy  n.  m.  eternity  /  nbriyb 
forever 

5|iy  n.  m.  fowl,  birds 

Spy  v.  K.  P.  to  fly 

i-i.  y  adj.  blind 

iiy  n.  no.  (ni)  skin 

rty  v.  K.  to  leave,  forsake 

IT?  n.  m.  help 

ii?y  v.  P.  to  crown 

■’y  n.  (with  art.)  Ai 

???  n.  f.  (Q?^y)  eye 

"tv  n.  f.  (nray)  city 

n.  m.  (nra-py)  naked¬ 
ness,  naked 

prep,  upon,  over,  concern¬ 
ing 

nSy-v.  K.  to  go  up.  H.  to 
bring  -up,  offer 
“by  xi.  m.  leaf 
nby  n.  f.  burnt-olferinq 
■’by  n.  m.  Eli 
oby  see  nbiy 
oy  n.  m.  (ora?)  people 
oy  prep.  (■’by  or  “nay)  with 
lb?  v.  K.  to  stand 
isy  n.  m.  (mi)  dust 


182 


HEBREW -ENG  LI  SII  VOBABULARY. 


py  u.  m.  tree ,  and  collectively 

trees 

n.  m.  jpain,  sorrow 
■jiayy  n.  m.  pain ,  sorroio 
cap  n.  f.  (n\  and  rvi)  bone 
apy  n.  m.  (const,  a)?? ,  pi. 

d\  and  ni)  heel 
app  n.  m.  f.  (rvi)  evening 
••  li  •  m.  raven 
niiy  adj.  (nap?)  naked 
Dvby  adj.  cunning ,  subtle 
airy  n.  m.  (rvi)  herb 
nicy  v.  K.  to  do,  make,  pro¬ 
duce.  N.  to  be  done,  made 
“icy  n.  m.  Esau 
*vi'»y  n.  m.  decade,  ten 
“’P'1®?  num.  tenth 
ry  n.  m.  f.  (cro?)  time  in  the 
sense  of  duration 
•try  adv.  now 

•a?  n.  m.  (const.  ^E)  mouth 
•jiiijis  n.  Pison 

Qinabs  n.  m.  pi.  the  Philistines 
“s  conj.  lest,  that  not 
D‘,!B  n.  m.  pi.  face  ;  "apb  or 
*»ae-b?  before,  in  the  pres¬ 
ence  of 

cys  n.  ra.  f.  time  in  the  sense 
of  repetition 

nps  v.  K.  to  open  the  eyes. 

N.  to  be  opened 
•he  v.  K.  P.  H.  to  separate, 
part.  N.  Pu.  to  be  parted' 


nps  v.  K.  to  be  fruitful 
■'bs  n.  m.  fruit 
nyps  n.  m.  Pharaoh 
"®ps  n.  Pharpar 
nis  n.  Euphrates 
Bibs  v.  K.  to  take  off  clothes 
nns  v.  K.  to  open.  1ST.  to  be 
opened 

say  n.  m.  (D\  and  rvi)  host 
pi  a  n.  m.  righteousness 
niy  v.  P.  to  command 
■py  n.  f.  Zion 
□by  n.  m.  image 
yb’y  n.  f.  (const,  ybi ,  pi.  D\ 
and  rvi)  side,  rib 
nay  v.  K.  P.  to  sprout,  to  shoot 
forth.  H.  to  cause  to  sprout 
npyy  n.  f.  cry 
rvi 2  n.  f.  (rviy)  trouble 

bap  v.  P.  to  receive,  accept 
rix  v.  P.  to  gather.  N.  to  be 
gathered 

iap  v.  K.  to  bury.  N.  to  be 

buried 

o~P  n.  m.  east 
napp  n.  f.  former  state 
napp  n.  f.  east 

cap  v.  K.  (fut.  a )  to  be  holy. 
P.  H.  to  sanctify,  conse¬ 
crate.  N.  Pu.  to  be  sancti¬ 
fied.  Hitli.  to  sanctify  or 
purify  one's  self 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


183 


©pp  n.  m.  holiness,  a  holy 
place  or  thing 
nip  v.  N.  to  be  gathered  to¬ 
gether 

-ip  n.  m.  (ni)  voice ,  sound 
Dip  v.  K.  to  arise 
pip  n.  m.  thorn 

W  adj.  (nitop)  little, 
small 

top  v.  H.  to  burn  incense 
npibp  n.  f.  incense 
bb'p  v.  K.  to  be  light,  dimin¬ 
ished 

nbbp  n.  f.  a  curse 
T  T  *\ 

fi?  n.  m.  end 
nip  n.  m.  end 

•  "  T 

spp  v.  K.  to  call.  N.  Pu.  to 
be  called 

Dpp  y.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  come 
near,  approach.  H.  to 
bring  near ,  offer 
yip  v.  K.  to  rend 
nip  v.  K.  (fut.  with  Vav 
appi)  to  see.  N.  to  be 
seen,  appear 

©si  n.  m.  (Di©sp)  head,  source 

ni©xp  n.  f.  beginning 
Dp  adj.  (nip.)  much,  many 
nip  v.  K.  to  be  many,  \ mul¬ 
tiply  intrans.  P.  H.  (inf. 
abs.  nipn)  to  make  many, 
midtiply  trans. 
ipipp  num.  fourth 
bip  n.  f.  (opbpp)  foot 


npp  v.  K.  to  rule ,  have  do¬ 
minion 

otonp  n.  m.  pi.  troughs 
nn  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  breath,  wind, 
Spirit 

pil  v.  K.  to  run 
ninp  adj.  merciful 
otorn  n.  m.  pi.  mercies ,  com¬ 
passions 

qnp  y.  P.  to  brood,  hover 
over 

pnp  v.  K.  to  wash 
Dip  v.  K.  to  contend 
top  v.  K.  to  creep 
top  n.  m.  creeping  thing, 
reptile 

yp  adj.  (nip)  bad,  evil 
Dip  n.  m.  famine 
nip  n.  f.  evil 
rpp  n.  m.  firmament 

ni©  n.  m.  (O’1,  and  ni)  field 

nto  n.  m.  bush,  shrub 

nip)  v.  K.  to  place 

bito  v.  H ..to  be  wise,  act'ansely 

mcbiEi  n.  f.  garment 

ntoto  n.  f.  gladness 

pi?  n.  m.  sackcloth 

C|P©  v.  K.  to  burn 

■jito  n.  m.  joy 

nips©  n.  f.  remnant 

iiiD©  num.  seventh 
•  •  • 

yi©  v.  N.  to  swea/r 


184 


HEBREW -EK GLISH  VOCABULARY. 


“ito  nj?a©  n.  m.  seventeen 

T  T  T  ;  • 

“o©  v.  P.  to  break  in  pieces 
na©  v.  K.  (fut.  o  and  a)  to 
rest ,  cease ,  keep  Sabbath. 
H.  to  cause  to  rest  or  cease 

na®  n.  m.  f.  (suf.  bna©)  Sab¬ 
bath 

i 

D“©  n.  m.  onyx 
ai©  v.  K.  to  return.  P.  H.  to 
cause  to  return ,  bring  back 
5|i©  v.  K.  to  bruise ,  crush 
nn©  v.  H.  to  destroy 
n*>©  v.  K.  to  put 
aa®  v.  K.  to  lie  down 
na®  v.  K.  to  forget 
}5©  v.  K.  to  subside 
85©  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be  be¬ 
reaved.  P.  to  bereave 
Da©  v.  H.  to  rise  early 
pv  v.  K.  to  dwell.  P.  H.  to 
cause  to  dwell,  to  station 
n?©  v.  K.  P.  PI.  to  send ,  send 
away ,  put  forth 

■'©■’5©  nura.  third 
•  • 

}b©  v.  H.  to  cast 

si© b©  n.  m.  Solomon 

no  adv.  there  /  “©©  thither 

D©  n.  m.  (ni)  name 

bin©©  n.  ra.  Samuel 
••  • 

0?©©  n.  m.  pi.  heaven 
m  n.  m.  oil 

y©0  v.  K.  to  hear ,  witli  a 
direct  object  or  with  3 ; 
to  hearken 


a©©'  v.  K.  to  keep ,  observe.  IS". 
to  keep  one's  self  take  heed 

©’©©  n.  m.  f.  sun 

•  • 

ni©  n.  f.  (d\)  year 

©©  n.  m.  crimson 

©o'  num.  second 

D^i©  m.  D^n©  f.  num.  two 
•  •  •  •  "  • 

rvi©'  adv.  a  second  time 
a?®  n.  m.  f.  (d\)  gate 
r.fiB©  n.  f.  handmaid 

t  :  • 

njs©  v.  H.  to  cause  to  drink , 
to  water 
5]?©'  n.  m.  shekel 
pi©'  v.  K.  to  creep ,  teem  with , 
increase  abundantly 
n*  n.  m.  creeping  thing ,  rep¬ 
tile 

•'©©  num.  sixth 

nixn  n.  f.  desire 
njsn  n.  f.  (n-> . )  fig-tree,  fig 
nan  n.  f.  ark 
’inn  n.  m.  desolateness 
oinn  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  ocean ,  th6 
deep 

pin  n.  m.  midst 
niibin  n.  f.  pi.  generations 
rnp  prep,  under ,  instead  of 
pin  n.  m.  sea-monster 
asn  v.  K.  to  sew 
©sn  v.  K.  to  lay  hold  of 
seize 

n©""in  n.  f.  deep  sleep 
njpffin  n.  f.  desire 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


Aaron  fins? 

above  by© 

to  accept  bap  P. 

according  to  3 

on  accouut  of  "VOS? 

to  adhere  pai  K. 

after  ins 

Ahab  assns 
• 

Ai  *’?n 

alive  ■>n 

all  ba 

alone  iiab 
• 

also  ps? ,  m 
altar  par© 

Amanah  ns©s 
and  ) 

to  anoint  no©  K. 
apron  rniin 
to  appear  nsi  N. 
appearance  nsi© 
to  approach  ©53  K.  N. ;  lip 
K. 

to  arise  Q^p  K. 

ark  pis 

article  ‘’ba 
•  • 

as  a ,  i©sa 

:  /  V  - 


ashes  iss 
assembly  niy 
at  3 

Baal  bya 
babe  biy 
bad  31 

bdellium  nb^a 

am  • 

to  be  n?n  K. 

to  bear  (bring  forth')  ib^  TC 
beast  (domesticated)  n©na 
beast  (wild)  njn 
because  i©s  ,  “'a 
bed  nti© 

T  • 

before  adv.  Oita 

before  prep.  153 ,  ©ab  ,  ©s-by 

to  begin  bbn  H. 

beginning  mosi 

behold  fi ,  nsn 

belly  pirn 

benefit  bi©5 

to  bereave  ba©  P. 

to  be  bereaved  ba©  K. 

besides  113 

between  pa 

birds  ph'y 


]  86 


EH  GLISH-HEBRE  W  VOCABULARY. 


to  bless  ip?  K.  (only  in 

pass,  part.)  P. 

blessing  “3?2 

blind  “ii? 

blood  O'! 

to  blow  ns:  K. 

bone  osy 
•  •  •• 

•  • 

to  be  born  "ibn  N. 
bread  nnb 

to  break  in  pieces  "a©  P. 

breath  no©;,  nm 

to  breathe  ns:  K. 

to  bring  xis  H.- 

to  bring  back  21©  P.  H. 

to  bring  forth  ns?  H. 

to  bring  forth  children  "ib?  H. 

to  bring  forth  grass  H. 

to  bring  near  2i|3  H. 

to  bring  up  nby  H. 

to  brood  qrn  P. 

brother  nx 

to  bruise  5|i©’  K. 

to  build  ~:3  K. 

to  burn  Cp©  K. 

to  burn  incense  H. 

burnt-offering  nby 

to  bury  22j3  K. 

bush  rr© 

but  (after  a  negative)  “’S 

to  call  X'lj?  K. 
to  capture  "rab  K. 
to  cast  ?fb©  H. 
cattle  “©ns 


cave  my© 

t  r  ; 

to  cease  ru© 

-  T 

Chaldees  D’POS 

•  •  m 

cherub  ins 
city  "py 
clean  "lino 

T 

to  be  clean  ino  K. 

to  cleanse  in©  P. 

to  cleave  ( adhere )  “2“  K. 

to  clothe  02b  H. 

to  be  clothed  with  02b 

02b  K. 

-  ▼ 

clothes  Dn“?2 

*  • 

collection  nij?© 
to  come  tfi2  K. 
to  come  near  K. 
to  command  ni©  P. 
commandment  moo 

t  :  • 

company  my 
compassions  DierH 
to  complete  nbs  P. 
conception  to 
concerning  by 
to  consecrate  ©ij?  P.  H. 
to  contain  bis  P. 
to  contend  2‘n  K. 
corresponding  to  1^.2 
counterpart  "ttis 
covenant  mis 
to  create  «ia  K. 
to  creep  ©m  K.,.71©  K. 
creeping  thing  ©oi,  pi© 
crimson  ‘*5© 
to  cro  wn  i©y  P. 


ENGLISH-HEBEEW  VOCABULARY. 


187 


to  crush  ppn  K.  H.,  5p©'  K. 

cry  npyy ,  npyy 

to  cry  p?J  K. 

cunning  ariy 

to  curse  nps  K.  P. 

curse  nbbp 

Cush  ©by 

to  cut  nny  K. 

to  cut  off  nny  K.  H. 

Damascus  p©nn 
darkness  pen 
daughter  n  a 
David  Tip 
day  ai*> 
deaf  ©nn 
death  nitt 

to  be  put  to  death  ma  Ho. 
decade  ni©y 
to  deceive  sir:  H. 
the  deep  ainn 
to  defile  bxa  P.,  p:a  P. 
to  deliver  Pd)  P. 
to  demolish  pro  K. 
to  descend  nr  K. 
desire  nisn ,  npitfn 
to  desire  nan  K.  P. 
desolateness  'inn 
to  destroy  nas  P.,  nn®  H. 
to  die  nny  K. 
to  divide  bna  H. 
to  do  ni»y  K. 
dominion  nbiiiya 
to  have  dominion  nnn  K. 


door  nbp 
dove  n;T 

to  cause  to  drink  np©  H. 
to  drive  out  ©ns  K.  P.,  ©T 
or  ©T  K.  H. 

••  T 

dry  land  nesr 
to  be  dry  ©T  K. 
dust  nay 

to  dwell  a©?  K.,  p©  K. 

diuelling  p©© 

each  ©,,s 
ear  ITS 

to  rise  early  aa©  H. 

earth  pns 

east  anp,  napp 

on  the  east  of  b  appa 

to  eat  bps  K. 

Eden  yny 

Edom  ains 

Eleazar  ntybs 

Eli  “’by 
•  •• 

emptiness  Tna 

to  come  to  an  end  nby  K, 

enmitii  nys 

U  T 

ephah  hts 
Esau  “i©y 

T  *• 

eternity  abiy 
Euphrates  nns 
even  C|S ,  D3 
evening  any 
every  by 

evil  adj.  en ,  n.  nyn 
eye  p? 


188  ENGLISII-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


face  ops 

to  fail  bss  K. 
to  fall  b£3  K. 
famine  asn 
father  ax 
to  fear  kp? 
female  napp 
to  make  feio  ®?p  H. 
field  npo 
fifth  ‘’ttnpn 
fid,  fig-h>'ee  n:sn 
fiahtinq  nrnbp 
to  fill  xbp  K.  P. 
to  find  xap  K. 
to  finish  nbs>  P. 

®'x 

firmament  Span 
fish  n|fl 
flame  tjnb 
flesh  “>toa 
to  fly  f|i?  K.  P. 
food  b ?xp 
foot  ban 

for  conj.  ,,3 ,  prep,  b 
forever  obiyb 
to  for  yet  n?®  K. 
to  form  "ipp  K. 
former  state  rranp 
to  forsake  ary  K. 
four  nyanx 
fourth 

ybw?  5|*iy 

from  IP 
fruit  viB 


to  be  fruitful  nna  K. 
to  be  full  sbp  K. 

garden  1? 

garment  “as ,  nab® 

gate  i?® 

to  gather  p3j?  P. 

to  be  gathered  together  nip  N. 

gathering  together  nipp 

generations  rvnbin 

Gibeon  papa 

Gihon  prra 

to  give  IPp  K. 

to  give  light  nix  H. 

gladness  nnp® 

glory  “iaa 

to  go  pbn  K. 

to  go  down  "TP  K. 

to  go  forth,  go  out  xa?  K. 

to  go  up  “by  K. 

gold  ant 

good  alia 

God  bx,  n^n'bx 

grass 

great  bita 

to  be  great  b“a  K. 

to  make  great  b “a  P. 

greenness  p“P 

ground  np“X; 

bail  “ra 
half  “1?n 
Human  Ipn 
hand  T 


ENGLISH-HEBEEW  VOCABULARY. 


189 


handmaid  nns© 

T  •  * 

Havilah  nbiw 

r  • 

he  sin 
head  ©sh 
to  hear  "©©  K. 
to  hearken  2©©  K. 
heart  lb ,  mb 
heaven  Qi©B 

•  “  T 

to  he  heavy  133  K. 
to  take  heed  "i©o  N. 
heel  3)5? 
help  -it? 
herd  3©? 

Hiddelcel  bpijn 
to  hide  ssn  H. 

T  T 

hither  nan 

T  •* 

to  lay  hold  of  ©&n  K. 
holiness  ©“p 
to  he  holy  ©np  K. 
honey  ©3n 
honor  ni33 
to  honor  “133  P. 
host  S32£ 

T  T 

house  rni 

to  hover  over  5)©?  P. 
how  n33iS 

T  T  — 

how  much  less  "a  ps — how 
much  more  id. 
husband  ©is 

/  ©s ,  “©is 
if  ds 

image  obi 
in  3 


incense  ©nap 

to  burn  incense  nap  H. 

to  increase  abundantly  pn©K. 

indeed  D2©s 

T  :  • 

to  inhabit  3©  5  K. 
instead  of  nnn 
instruction  “101© 
into  3 

Israel  bsniir 

••  T  •  • 

■  • 

it  sin,  sin 

Jacob  3pan 
Jehovah  nini 

t  : 

Jericho  in  ini 

•  • 

Jerusalem  dboini 

•  -  t  : 

Jew  i“nm 
•  • 

Joseph  “?ii 

joy  P©© 

Judah  nmni 

T  J 

judgment  as©© 

to  keep  “1©©  K. 

to  keep  back  52©  K. 

to  keep  Sabbath  ro©  K. 

kind  n.  p© 

kindness  non 

•  • 

king  pb© 

to  make  king  pb©  H. 
kingdom  nisb©  ,  rob©© 
to  knoiv  -pr  K. 
to  let  know  JpP  H. 

land  n©ni{,  pns 
I  large  bina 


190 


ENGLLSH-HEBRE  \V  VOCABULARY. 


to  lead  H. 
leaf  nby 
to  leave  ayy  K. 
lest  "|S 

to  lie  down  a?®  K. 
life  run ,  npn ,  ®sb 
light  nix 
a  light  nix® 
to  give  light  nix  H. 
like  ? 

likeness  nnan 
little  fop 
a  little  ®?® 
to  live  ■'in,  nyn  K. 
living  ">n 
living  thing  nyn 
lo!  p,  nsn 
to  lodge  fb  K. 
lord  fins ,  bya 
Lord  ®nx 
to  love  anx  K. 
luminary  nix® 

majesty  nnn 
to  make  nicy  K. 
to  make  a  covenant  nna  K. 
to  make  few  or  small  ay®  H. 

t/  “  T 

to  make  king  pb®  H. 
to  make  many  nan  P.  H. 
male  nay 

man  anx ,  unx ,  ®i:x 

young  man  nyi 
manna  l1? 
many  an 


to  he  many  nan  K. 

Mara  sn® 
master 

mercies  opnn 
merciful  nmn 

I 

mercy  ncn 
midst  Tin 
mist  ns 
month  ®nn 
moon  nni 

-  r 

Mordecai  ■'ann® 

•  r 
•  •  * 

morning  npa 
mother  ns 
mouth  ns 
much  an 

to  multiply  intrans.  nan  K. 

trans.  nan  P.  H. 

naked  oiny 

T 

nakedness  ST? 
name  a® 

Naomi  ■'®ya 
nation  ",na 

to  bring  near  anp  H. 
to  come  near  anp  K. 

new  ®nn 

night  b'b 
Noah  nb 
nostril  "X 

not  bx  ,  inba ,  xb 

there  is  not  or  was  not  pi? 
that  not  "ys 
not  yet  an® 

now  (entreaty)  SI, (time)  npy 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


191 


to  observe  “too  K. 

ocean  ainn 

•  •  • 

to  offer  nby  H.,  aap  H. 
oil  p?© 

olive ,  olive-tree  rvjT 

one  “ns 

onyx  an© 

to  open  nns  K. 

to  open  the  eyes  nps  K. 

or  (in  a  disjunctive  question) 

as 

out  of  fa 
over  ba 

over  against  “133 
overtake  paa  H. 

pain  nap ,  paa© 

to  part  aap  K.  P.  H. 

people  a? 

to  perish  “ax  K. 

Pharaoh  naas 

Pharpar  asps 

Philistines  a-’ nebs 

•  • 

pillar  rncsj 
Pison  fittPB 
place  aipa 

to  place  W3  H.,  a*1©  K. 

to  plant  ©as  K. 

to  pour  pa?  K. 

pray  !  I  pray  thee  xd 

in  the  presence  of  as  3 ,  “psb  ; 

■»35rb© 

••  •  «B 

priest  pa 
to  produce  ato©  K. 


to  produce  seed  ©ay  H. 
to  pulverize  ppa  K.  H. 
pure  ai!ia 
to  be  pure  ana  K. 
to  purif  y  ana  P. 
to  purify  one's  self  cap  Hith, 
to  put  rra  H.,  yn;  K.,  m©  K. 
to  put  forth  nb©  K.  P. 
to  put  on  clothes  Cab  or  Cab 
K. 

queen  naba 
rain  ana 

T  T 

to  cause  to  rain  aaa  H. 

to  receive  bap  P. 

to  recount  asp  P. 

to  redeem  baa  K. 

to  reign  pba  K. 

to  remember  apt  K. 

remnant  max© 

•  ••  • 

to  rend  ©ap  K. 
reptile  ©aa ,  pa© 
respecting  ”bx 
to  rest  naa  K.,  na©  K. 
to  return  intrans.  an©  K, 
rib  ©ba 

T  '• 

righteousness  pa  a 
to  rise  early  as©  H. 
river  an? 
rock  ybo 
to  roll  bba  K. 
rule  nb©aa 

▼  t  :  v 

to  rule  b©a  K.,  ~aa  K. 


192 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


to  run  pi  K. 

Sabbath  na© 
to  keep  Sabbath  na©  K. 
sackcloth  p© 
salvation  S©? 

Samuel  bin©© 
to  sanctify  ©"p  P.  H. 
to  say  i©«  K. 
sea  o? 

sect  monster  p?i? 
season  "P© 
second  ©© 
a  second  time  tp® 

to  see  nsn  K. 

seed  yiT 

to  produce  seed  Sit  H. 
to  seize  ©sn 
to  sell  “ip©  K. 

to  send,  send  away  n^©  K. 

P.  H. 

to  separate  Via  H.,  niB  K.  P . 
H. 

separation  ia 
serpent  ©n? 

I 

servant  “ay 

to  serve  nay  K. 

seventh  “'pa© 

to  seio  isn  K. 

she  svi 

shekel  Vp© 

to  shine  lis  K.  N. 

to  shoot  forth  nrs  K.  P. 

shrub  n_i© 

to  shut ,  shut  up  “pc  K. 


side  yVs 

sight  nsi© 

sign  ttis 

silver  pcs 

sister  rrinx 

to  sit  a©? 

sixth  *’©© 

•  • 

skin  lis 
to  sleep  I©?  K. 
deep  sleep  “©pi? 
small  pp 

to  make  small  ©?©  H. 
so  ns,  i? 
to  soil  5)5©  P. 

Solomon  nb'V© 
son  1? 

sorrow  as?,  Tiaas 
soul  ©s'? 
sound 
source  ©si 
to  sow  air  K. 
to  speak  iai  P. 
species  V© 
spirit  nn 
splendor  Tin 

to  spring  tip  (said  of  grass) 

xffli  K. 

T  T 

to  sprout  n©a  K.  P. 
to  stand  1©?  K. 
star  aaia  ' 
to  station  “a®  P.  H. 
statue  nasi? 
stone  ?as 

to  be  strong  ptn  K. 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


193 


to  subdue  ©’23  K.  P. 
subtle  n my 
suckling  b^y 
sww  ©offi 

V  • 

to  surround  aao  K. 

to  swear  ya©  1ST. 

sweto:  nyt 

sword  ann 
•  • 

tabernacle  la©© 
to  take  npb  K. 
to  take  off  clothes  ©©a  H. 
to  torn  with  pn©  K. 

to  toW  nap  H.,  "iso  P. 
bns 

that  conj.  n©s?  13  pron.  sin 

that  not  “jS 

the  *<n 

then  TS 

there  o© 

therefore  “}?  by 

third  ''©■'b© 

this  ~J. 

thistle  nnnn 

thither  ‘ Tati 

thorn  fip 

thou  “Pi? 

throne  SG3 

thus  na 

Tigris  bpnn 

to  till  nay  K 

time  (duration)  P? 

time  (repetition)  D?a 

to  ”b« ,  b 


to  cause  to  toil  yap  P.  H.- 

to  touch  yap  K. 

tree ,  trees  r? 

trouble  “p? 

troughs  D‘1©nn 

to  be  found  true  !©s  N. 

t/t'uly  ©p©s 

tunic  r,:'P3 
•  \ 

to  turn  K. 

two  ©■’?© 

• 

under  pop 
until  ny 
unto  "bs ,  ny 
upon  by 
Ur  nns 

vapor  ns 

to  be  verified  1©?  N. 
very  ns© 
vessel  “’ba 
virgin  “bma 
voice  bip 

to  walk  ?fbn  K. 
to  walk  about  tfbn  Hith. 
wav  n©nb © 
to  wash  fnn  K. 
water  ©p© 
to  water  np©  H. 
way  TP"? 

to  wear  ©ab  or  ©ab  K. 
to  weary  yap  P.  H. 
to  be  weary  yap  K. 


9 


194 


english-hebrew  vocabulary. 


well  n.  *183 

••  X 

■what?  TO 

T 

whatever  TO 

T 

whence?  pTO 
where  ?  ,  fi»ss 

which  “iti» 

v  *: 

whither?  “:r 

t  r 

who  “Iffi'x 
••  •• 

•  • 

who?  *<a 
whoever 
whole  bs 
why  ?  nab }  nab 
wife  tox 
wilderness  “fiia 

T  ;  • 

wind  nn 


window  totn 

T  \  -S 

wing  fjis 

to  he  wise  bo  to  H. 

to  act  wisely  bsto  J]\ 

I  with  TO,  a  ey 

to  withhold  R53  K..  2TO 
woman  !TTO 

T  * 

\word  "W 

T  T 

\worh  roxba 

T  r  i 

year  nj© 
yet  “riy 

young  7nan  iyb 
Zion  fi”! 


